SIMATIC APT

Programming Reference
(Tables) Manual

Order Number: PPX:APT-8102--10

Text Assembly Number: 2801048--0007
Tenth Edition
 ! DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
DANGER is limited to the most extreme situations.

! WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury, and/or property damage.

! CAUTION
CAUTION used with a safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situ-
ation that, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially
hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in property damage.

NOTICE
NOTICE indicates a potential situation that, if not avoided, could result in an
undesirable result or state.

Copyright 2001 by Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

All Rights Reserved — Printed in USA

Reproduction, transmission, or use of this document or contents is not permitted without express consent of Siemens Energy &
Automation, Inc. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved.

Since Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc., does not possess full access to data concerning all of the uses and applications of
customer’s products, we do not assume responsibility either for customer product design or for any infringements of patents or rights
of others which may result from our assistance.
MANUAL PUBLICATION HISTORY
SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Tables) Manual
Order Manual Number: PPX:APT--8102--10
Refer to this history in all correspondence and/or discussion about this manual.

Event Date Description

Original Issue 11/88 Original Issue (2601247--0001)

Second Edition 03/90 Second Edition (2601247--0002)
Third Edition 07/91 Third Edition (2601247--0003)
Fourth Edition 11/92 Fourth Edition (2801048--0001)
Fifth Edition 02/94 Fifth Edition (2801048--0002)
Sixth Edition 10/94 Sixth Edition (2801048--0003)
Seventh Edition 05/95 Seventh Edition (2801048--0004)
Eighth Edition 11/96 Eighth Edition (2801048--0005)
Ninth Edition 12/98 Ninth Edition (2801048--0006)
Tenth Edition 4/01 Tenth Edition (2801048--0007)
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES

Pages Description Pages Description

Cover/Copyright Tenth Edition

History/Effective Pages Tenth Edition
Trademarks/Copyrights Tenth Edition
iii — xxv Tenth Edition
1-1 — 1-26 Tenth Edition
2-1 — 2-6 Tenth Edition
3-1 — 3-13 Tenth Edition
4-1 — 4-90 Tenth Edition
5-1 — 5-29 Tenth Edition
6-1 — 6-41 Tenth Edition
7-1 — 7-106 Tenth Edition
8-1 — 8-53 Tenth Edition
9-1 — 9-15 Tenth Edition
10-1 — 10-17 Tenth Edition
A-1 — A-106 Tenth Edition
Index -1 — Index-11 Tenth Edition
Registration Tenth Edition
Trademarks and Copyrights

S5t, SIMOREGt, and SIMOVERTt are trademarks, and STEPr, SIMATICr, and SINECr are registered trademarks, of Siemens AG.

386/ATMt, APTt, ESPt, Peerlinkt, Series 500t, Series 505t, TISOFTt, PCSt, TISTARt, TIWAYt, Thermocouplet, and
TurboMoldt are trademarks of Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

IBMr is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Intelr is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.

Laplinkr is a registered trademark of Traveling Software, Inc.

Windowsr, Windowsr95, Windows NTr, Windowsr2000, Microsoftr, and MS-DOSr are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

UNIXt is a trademark of Novell, Inc.

 Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Chapter 1 APT Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.1 Process Control Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Modular Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
APT Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Basic Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2 Identifying the Physical Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Equipment Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3 Identifying the Control Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Sequence of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Continuous Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.4 Identifying Safe-State Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Emergency Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Emergency Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.5 APT Program Structure and the Physical Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

APT Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Program Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Program Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Unit Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.6 APT Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

APT Object Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Naming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Configuring Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Scope of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Dot Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

1.7 APT Languages and the Control Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Textual and Graphics-based Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
State Control Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Math Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Sequential Function Chart Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Continuous Function Chart Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.8 APT and Safe-State Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Monitoring Emergency Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Safe-State SFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Contents iii
1.9 Controller Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Controller Models Supported By APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Chapter 2 Programs and Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 Understanding APT Program and Unit Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Unit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
APT Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Stopping and Restarting SFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Monitoring Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using Scan Time and Time-of-Day Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Using the Powerfail Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Chapter 3 I/O and Module Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 Understanding Module and I/O Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Referring to I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
I/O and Module Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2 Defining Modules and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Defining I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Defining Modules for Series 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Chapter 4 Series 500/505 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1 Module Definition Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Assigning Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Assigning I/O Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2 Standard Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2-Channel Analog Output (Series 500: 2AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2-Channel Analog Output (Series 505:2AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-Channel Analog Input (Series 500: 4AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 4AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 4AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
6-Channel Analog Input/2-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 6AI2O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
8-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 8AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
8-Channel Analog Input (Series 500: 8AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
8-Channel Analog Input (Series 505: 8AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
8-Channel Analog Output (Series 500: 8AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
8-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 8AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Parallel Word Input (Series 500: 8WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Parallel Word Input (Series 505: 8WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Parallel Word Input (Series 505: 16WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Parallel Word Output (Series 500: 8WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Parallel Word Output (Series 505: 8WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24

iv Contents
4.2 Standard Modules (continued)
Parallel Word Output (Series 505: 16WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Parallel Word Output SF (Series 505: 8WOSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
8-Channel Discrete Input (Series 500: 8DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
8-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 8DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
8-Channel Discrete Output (Series 500: 8DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
8-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 8DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
16-Channel Analog Input (Series 505: 16AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
16-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 16DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
16-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 16DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
20-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 2AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
32-Channel Discrete Input (Series 500: 32DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
32-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 32DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
32-Channel Discrete Output (Series 500: 32DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
32-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 32DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Smartslice (Series 505: SLICE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
User-Defined Module (Series 500: USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
User-Defined Module (Series 505: USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Isolated Interrupt Discrete Input Module (Series 505: INTRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
4.3 Intelligent Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
ASCII Message Output (Series 500: ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Programmable BASIC (Series 500:BASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Programmable BASIC (Series 505: BASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Dual Comm Port (Series 500: DCOMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
High Speed Pulse Input (Series 500: HSPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
High Speed Counter/Encoder (Series 505: HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Network Interface/ TIWAY (Series 500: NIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Network Interface/ TIWAY (Series 505: NIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Peerlink (Series 500: PLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Peerlink (Series 505: PLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Resistance Temperature Detector (Series 500: RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Resistance Temperature Detector (Series 505: 8RTD or 16RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Servo Axis (Series 500: SERVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Thermocouple (Series 500: TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Thermocouple (Series 505: TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
386/ATM Coprocessor (Series 505: ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Expert Solutions Processor (Series 500: ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
TurboMold (Series 500: TURBO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
TurboMold (Series 505: TURBO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
High Speed PID Controller (Series 500: HSPID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
110 VAC Redundant Output (Series 500: 110VO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
110 VAC Rapid Response (Series 500: 110VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
120 VDC Rapid Response (Series 500: 120VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
24 VDC Rapid Response (Series 500: 24VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Field Interface SIMOREG Mode (Series 505:SREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Field Interface SIMOREG Broadcast Mode (Series 505:SREGB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Field Interface SIMOVERT Mode (Series 505:SVRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Field Interface SIMOVERT Broadcast Mode (Series 505:SVRTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Communications Processor (Series 505: H1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84

Contents v
4.3 Intelligent Modules (continued)
High Density Advanced Function (Series 505: 16AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Ethernet TCP/IP Adapter (Series 505: ENET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
High Speed Counter Encoder (Series 505: HSCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Program Port Expander (Series 505: PPEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

Chapter 5 I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 Defining I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Entering I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

5.2 I/O Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Word I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Intelligent I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
The Image Register Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

5.3 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Using Analog Input (AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Defining AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Scaling Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.4 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

Using Analog Output (AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Defining AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

5.5 Digital Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Using Digital Flag (DF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Defining DF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15

5.6 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Using Digital Input (DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Defining DI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.7 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Using Digital Output (DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Defining DO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

vi Contents
5.8 Word Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Using Word Input (WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Defining WI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5.9 Word Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Using Word Output (WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Defining WO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.10 Binary-coded Decimal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Using Binary-coded Decimal Input (BI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Defining BI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
5.11 Binary-coded Decimal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Using Binary-coded Output (BO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Defining BO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.12 Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Using Resistance Temperature Detector (RT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Defining RT (Series 500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Defining RT (Series 505) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.13 Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Using Thermocouple (TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Defining TC (Series 500) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Defining TC (Series 505) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Chapter 6 Device Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 Basic Operation of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Devices Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2 Device Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Changing States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27

Contents vii
6.3 Device Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Override Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Null Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Single Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4 Device Power Fail Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power-Fail Recovery Logic for Series 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power-Fail Recovery Logic for S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5 Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

Chapter 7 Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7.1 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Hand-Operated/Dual-Feedback Valve (VND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Valve (VSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Valve (VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
User-defined Valve (VUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.2 Three-Position Valves with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Three-Position Valve/Type 1 (BV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Three-Position Valve/Type 2 (BV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.3 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Motor (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Motor (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Dual-Drive/Null-Feedback Motor (MDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Dual-Drive/Single-Feedback Motor (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
User-defined Motor (MUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.4 Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Reversible Motor/Type 1 (RM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Reversible Motor/Type 2 (RM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.5 Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Two-Speed Motor/Type 1 (TS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Two-Speed Motor/Type 2 (TS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.6 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Cylinder (CSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
User-defined Cylinder (CUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68

viii Contents
7.7 Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Hand-Operated/Dual-Feedback Press (PND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Press (PSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Press (PSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
User-defined Press (PUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7.8 Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Three-Position Press/Type 1 (PS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Three-Position Press/Type 2 (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
7.9 Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Using the Device Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Timer (TMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105

Chapter 8 APT Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8.1 Declaring Constants and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Declaration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Entering Constants and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2 Single-Value Declaration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Integer (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scaled Integer (SI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Boolean (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Real (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
APT Flag (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Text (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3 Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Using Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Integer Array (IA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Boolean Array (BA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
DI10 Array (IX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
DO10 Array (DX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Real Array (RA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Sequence Array (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Shift Register Array (SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Text Array (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4 Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Using Counters (CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.5 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Using Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Fast Timer (FT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Slow Timer (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

Contents ix
Chapter 9 Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
9.1 Understanding Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Recipe Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Recipe Usage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Defining Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Downloading from OSx (PCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Selecting a Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Using Recipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recipe Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 Recipe Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Creating a Recipe Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Editing a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Program and Unit Recipe Usage Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Creating a Program or Unit Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Editing Recipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5 Implementing Recipes in APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Chapter 10 User Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

10.1 User-defined and System-activated Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2 Creating a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using the Subroutine Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using Parameters in a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Math in a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
RLL-only Subroutine (Series 505 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
SFPGM-only Subroutine (Series 505 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Avoiding Temporary Variables in SFPGM-only Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Example of a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3 Creating a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Subroutine Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Programming in a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Accessing an FB from a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Using Math Statements in a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

x Contents
Appendix A Device RLL Code for Series 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
A.1 Device Extensions and Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
VND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
VSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
VSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
VDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
VMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
BV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
BV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
VUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
MDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
MUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
RM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
RM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
TS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
TS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
CSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
CUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.2 RLL for Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

Contents xi
List of Figures

1-1 Production Process Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1-2 Units in Process Production Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1-3 APT Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
1-4 APT Program Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
1-5 APT Program Content Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
1-6 APT Unit Content Directory for COOKER1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
1-7 APT Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
1-8 APT Step Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-9 Conditional Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
1-10 SFC Steps and Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
1-11 Continuous Function Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

3-1 Physical Addresses and I/O Symbolic Names for Series 505 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 Physical Addresses and I/O Symbolic Names for S5 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3-3 Defining Series 505 Modules Before I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3-4 Defining I/O Symbolic Names Before Series 505 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3-5 Defining I/O Symbolic Names for S5 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

4-1 Defining Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4-2 Assigning an Address to a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-3 Assigning I/O Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-4 Getting I/O Names from Module Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-5 Series 500 2-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-6 Series 505 2-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-7 Series 500 4-Channel Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-8 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-9 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4-10 Series 505 6-Channel Analog Input/2-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
4-11 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
4-12 Series 500 8-Channel Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
4-13 Series 505 8-Channel Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
4-14 Series 500 8-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4-15 Series 505 8-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
4-16 Series 500 8-Channel Parallel Word Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
4-17 Series 505 8-Channel Parallel Word Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
4-18 Series 505-Compatible 16-Channel Parallel Word Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4-19 Series 500 8-Channel Parallel Word Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-20 Series 505 8-Channel Parallel Word Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
4-21 Series 505-Compatible 16-Channel Parallel Word Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-22 Series 505-Compatible 8-Channel Parallel Word Output SF Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
4-23 Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
4-24 Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
4-25 Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

xii Contents
4-26 Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4-27 Series 505 High Density Analog Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-28 Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
4-29 Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
4-30 Series 505 20-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
4-31 Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
4-32 Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-33 Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
4-34 Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
4-35 Series 505 Smartslice Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
4-36 Series 500 User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
4-37 Series 505 User Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
4-38 Series 505 Isolated Interrupt Discrete Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
4-39 Series 500 ASCII Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
4-40 Series 500 BASIC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
4-41 Series 505 BASIC Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
4-42 Series 500 Dual Comm Port Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
4-43 Series 500 High Speed Pulse Input Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
4-44 Series 505 High Speed Counter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
4-45 Series 500 NIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
4-46 Series 505 NIM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
4-47 Series 500 Peer-to-Peer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
4-48 Series 500 Peerlink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58
4-49 Series 505 Peer-to-Peer Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
4-50 Series 505 Peerlink Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
4-51 Series 500 RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
4-52 Series 505 xxRTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
4-53 Series 500 Servo Axis Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
4-54 Series 500 Thermocouple Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
4-55 Series 505 Thermocouple Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
4-56 Series 505 386/ATM Coprocessor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
4-57 Series 500 Expert Solutions Processor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
4-58 Series 500 TurboMold Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
4-59 Series 505 TurboMold Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
4-60 Series 500 High Speed PID Controller Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
4-61 Series 500 110 VAC Redundant Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
4-62 Series 500 110 VAC Rapid Response Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
4-63 Series 500 120 VDC Rapid Response Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
4-64 Series 500 24 VDC Rapid Response Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
4-65 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOREG Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
4-66 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOREG Broadcast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
4-67 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOVERT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81

Contents xiii
List of Figures (continued)

4-68 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOVERT Broadcast Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83

4-69 Series 505 Communication Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
4-70 Series 505 High Density Advanced Function Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
4-71 Series 505 Ethernet TCP/IP Adapter Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4-72 Series 505 High Speed Counter Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
4-73 Series 505 Program Port Expander Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

5-1 Using Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5-2 Using Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6-1 Devices, Modules, and I/O Symbolic Names For Series 505 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-2 Devices and I/O Symbolic Names For S5 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-3 Using Device Commands and Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6-4 Manual and Auto Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-5 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
6-6 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-7 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
6-8 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41

7-1 VND Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

7-2 VSN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7-3 VSS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-4 VSD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-5 VDD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-6 VMD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
7-7 VUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
7-8 BV1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
7-9 BV2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
7-10 MSN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-11 MSS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-12 MDN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-13 MDS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
7-14 MUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
7-15 RM1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51
7-16 RM2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55
7-17 TS1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-59
7-18 TS2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63
7-19 CSD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-67
7-20 CUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71
7-21 PND Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7-22 PSN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7-23 PSS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-79
7-24 PSD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-83

xiv Contents
7-25 PDD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-87
7-26 PMD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-91
7-27 PUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-95
7-28 PS1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-99
7-29 PS2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-103

8-1 Declaration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

8-2 Using Integer Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-3 Using Scaled Integer Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-4 Using Boolean Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-5 Using Real Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-6 Using APT Flag Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
8-7 Using Text Declarations in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
8-8 Using Arrays in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
8-9 Using Sequence Arrays in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
8-10 Using Shift Register Arrays in SFC Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
8-11 Using Counters in SFCs or CFBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
8-12 Using Timers in SFCs or CFBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49

9-1 Recipe Usage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

9-2 OSx (PCS) Handshaking with APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
9-3 Using Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9-4 Creating a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
9-5 Program Recipe Usage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
9-6 Unit Recipe Usage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
9-7 Editing Recipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14

10-1 Subroutine Form for User-defined Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

10-2 Math Structure for User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-3 Math Example for User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-4 Subroutine Form for System-activated Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-5 Math Structure for System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
10-6 Math Example for System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17

A-1 VNDOPND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

A-2 VNDCLSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-3 VNDFAILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-4 VNDMOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23
A-5 VALVES: Move Image from V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-6 ALL: LOCKD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-7 VSN: CMMD (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24
A-8 VSN: CMMD (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-9 VSN: MOPEN (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
A-10 VSN: MOPEN (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26

Contents xv
List of Figures (continued)

A-11 VSN: OPND (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26

A-12 VSN: OPND (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-13 VSN: CLSD (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
A-14 VSN: CLSD (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-15 VSN: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-16 VALVES: Move Image to V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
A-17 VSS: OVRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A-18 VSS: OPENC (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A-19 VSS: OPENC (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
A-20 VSS: MOPEN (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A-21 VSS: MOPEN (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30
A-22 VSS: OPEN TIME EXPIRED [O.T.E.] (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-23 VSS: OPEN TIME EXPIRED [O.T.E.] (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
A-24 VSS: CLOSED TIME EXPIRED [C.T.E.] (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-25 VSS: CLOSED TIME EXPIRED [C.T.E.] (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32
A-26 VSS: OPND (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A-27 VSS: OPND (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A-28 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-33
A-29 VSS: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-30 VSS: OPND (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-31 VSS: OPND (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-32 VSS: OPND (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-34
A-33 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-34 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . A-35
A-35 VSS: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-36 VSS: CLSD (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35
A-37 VSS: CLSD (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-38 VSS: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-39 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-36
A-40 VSS: CLSD (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-41 VSS: CLSD (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-42 VSS: CLSD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-43 VSS: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-37
A-44 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-45 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (CLEAR CMMD OF FTO/FTC) . . . A-38
A-46 VSS: TRVL (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-38
A-47 VSS: TRVL (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-48 VSS: FTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-49 VSS: FTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-50 VSS: CMMD (EO/EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-39
A-51 VSS: CMMD (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-52 VSS: CMMD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40

xvi Contents
A-53 VSD: OVRDO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-54 VSD: OVRDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-40
A-55 VSD: OPND (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-56 VSD: OPND (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-57 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-41
A-58 VSD: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A-59 VSD: OPENC (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A-60 VSD: OPND (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A-61 VSD: OPND (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-42
A-62 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
A-63 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . A-43
A-64 VSD: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
A-65 VSD: CLSD (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-43
A-66 VSD: CLSD (EC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-67 VSD: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-68 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-44
A-69 VSD: CLSD (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A-70 VSD: CLSD (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A-71 VSD: CLSD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A-72 VSD: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-45
A-73 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A-74 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . A-46
A-75 VSD: FAILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A-76 VSD: FTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46
A-77 VSD: FTO (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A-78 VSD: FTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A-79 VSD: FTC (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A-80 VSD: CMMD (EO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-47
A-81 VSD: CMMD (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A-82 VSD: CMMD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A-83 VDD: CMMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A-84 VDD: OPENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-48
A-85 VDD: CLSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A-86 VDD: OPNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A-87 VDD: CLSTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-49
A-88 VDD: OPND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-89 VDD: OPND (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-90 VDD: OPND (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-91 VDD: OPND (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-50
A-92 VDD: CLSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A-93 VDD: CLSD (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51
A-94 VDD: CLSD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51

Contents xvii
List of Figures (continued)

A-95 VDD: CLSD (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-51

A-96 VDD: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-97 VDD: FTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-98 VSD: FTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-99 VDD: FAILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-52
A-100 VMD: STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A-101 VMD: OPENC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A-102 VMD: CLSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-53
A-103 VMD: OPNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A-104 VMD: CLSTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-54
A-105 BV1: OVRDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
A-106 BV1: OVRDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
A-107 BV1: SLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-55
A-108 BV1: SHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
A-109 BV1: MOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-56
A-110 BV1: MHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
A-111 BV1: OPNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-57
A-112 BV1: CLSTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
A-113 BV1: OPNDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
A-114 BV1: OPNDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-58
A-115 BV1: OPND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A-116 BV1: CLSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-59
A-117 BV1: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A-118 BV1: FTOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A-119 BV1: FTOH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A-120 BV1: FTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-60
A-121 BV1: FTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
A-122 BV2: DRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
A-123 BV2: POS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-61
A-124 BV2: MOPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-62
A-125 BV2: OPNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
A-126 BV2: CLSTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-63
A-127 BV2: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A-128 VUD: OPNTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A-129 VUD: CLSTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-64
A-130 MOTORS: Move Image To V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
A-131 MSN: CMMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-65
A-132 MSN: MSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66
A-133 MSN: RUNNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66
A-134 MSN: STPPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A-135 MSN: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67
A-136 MOTORS: Move Image from V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-67

xviii Contents
A-137 MSS: STRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
A-138 MSS: MSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-68
A-139 MSS: Running Time Expired (R.T.E.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
A-140 MSS: Stopped Time Expired (S.T.E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-69
A-141 MSS: RUNNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A-142 MSS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A-143 MSS: RUNNG (LATCH FTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-70
A-144 MSS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (LATCH FTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
A-145 MSS: STPPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
A-146 MSS: STPPD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-71
A-147 MSS: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A-148 MSS: FTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A-149 MSS: FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A-150 MSS: CMMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-72
A-151 MSS: CMMD (LATCH FTR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
A-152 MDN: CMMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
A-153 MDN: STRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
A-154 MDN: STOPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-73
A-155 MDS: STRTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A-156 MDS: STOPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A-157 MDS: STRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-74
A-158 MDS: STPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
A-159 MDS: RUNNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
A-160 MDS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-75
A-161 MDS: STPPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A-162 MDS: STPPD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A-163 MDS: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A-164 MDS: FTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-76
A-165 MDS: FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
A-166 MUD: STRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
A-167 MUD: STPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
A-168 RM1: OVRDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-77
A-169 RM1: OVRDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
A-170 RM1: FWRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
A-171 RM1: SFWRD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-78
A-172 RM1: REV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
A-173 RM1: SREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-79
A-174 RM1: MSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
A-175 RM1: MREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-80
A-176 RM1: STRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
A-177 RM1: STPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81
A-178 RM1: RUNF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-81

Contents xix
List of Figures (continued)

A-179 RM1: RUNR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82

A-180 RM1: RUNNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
A-181 RM1: STPPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-82
A-182 RM1: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
A-183 RM1: FTRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
A-184 RM1: FTRR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
A-185 RM1: FTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-83
A-186 RM1: FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A-187 RM1: FAILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A-188 RM2: DRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-84
A-189 RM2: DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
A-190 RM2: MSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-85
A-191 RM2: MREV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
A-192 TS1: OVRDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
A-193 TS1: OVRDH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-86
A-194 TS1: SLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
A-195 TS1: SHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-87
A-196 TS1: MSTRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
A-197 TS1: MHIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-88
A-198 TS1: STRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
A-199 TS1: STPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-89
A-200 TS1: RUNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
A-201 TS1: RUNH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
A-202 TS1: RUNNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-90
A-203 TS1: STPPD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
A-204 TS1: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-91
A-205 TS1: FTRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A-206 TS1: FTRH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A-207 TS1: FTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-92
A-208 TS1: FTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
A-209 TS2: DRV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
A-210 TS2: SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-93
A-211 TS2: STRTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
A-212 TS2: STPTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-94
A-213 TS2: TRVL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
A-214 CYLINDERS: Move Image from V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
A-215 CSD: OVRDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
A-216 CSD: OVRDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-95
A-217 CSD: CMMD (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
A-218 CSD: CMMD (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-96
A-219 CSD: MEXTEND (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97
A-220 CSD: MEXTEND (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-97

xx Contents
A-221 CSD: EXTEND TIME EXPIRED [E.T.E] (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
A-222 CSD: EXTEND TIME EXPIRED [E.T.E] (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
A-223 CSD: RETRACT TIME EXPIRED [R.T.E] (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-98
A-224 CSD: RETRACT TIME EXPIRED [R.T.E] (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A-225 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A-226 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-99
A-227 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A-228 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A-229 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A-230 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-100
A-231 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A-232 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A-233 CDS: RETRACTED (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A-234 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-101
A-235 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
A-236 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
A-237 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
A-238 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-102
A-239 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
A-240 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
A-241 CSD: TRVL (EE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-103
A-242 CSD: TRVL (ER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
A-243 CSD: FTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
A-244 CSD: FTE (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
A-245 CSD: FTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-104
A-246 CSD: FTR (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
A-247 CSD: FAILD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
A-248 CYLINDERS: Move image to V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-105
A-249 CUD: EXTTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106
A-250 CUD: RETTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-106

Contents xxi
List of Tables

1-1 APT Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

1-2 Key Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
1-3 APT Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
1-4 Series 505 Configurations in APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-5 APT Minimum Firmware Support and STEP 5 Support (S5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-6 APT Minimum Firmware Support and TISOFT Support (Series 505) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
1-7 APT Tools Supported by Series 505/S5 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-8 APT Features Supported by S5 Controller Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
1-9 APT Features Supported by Series 505 Controller Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

2-1 APT Program and Unit Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2-2 Program Extension Error Codes (Series 505 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

3-1 I/O Symbolic Name Types for Series 505 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3-2 I/O Symbolic Name Types for S5 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3-3 Module Types for Series 505 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

4-1 Channel Address Ranges: 560/560T/565/565P/565T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4-2 Channel Address Ranges: 545/545L/555/575 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

5-1 AI Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

5-2 Scaling Series 500/505 Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-3 Scaling S5 Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5-4 AO Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
5-5 Scaling S5 Analog Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
5-6 DF Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-7 WI Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
5-8 WO Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5-9 BI Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
5-10 BO Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
5-11 RT Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5-12 TC Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

6-1 APT Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

6-2 APT Device Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6-3 Valve Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
6-4 Motor Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-5 Cylinder Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-6 Press Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
6-7 Timer Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

7-1 VND Extensions and Commands .................................................. 7-3

7-2 VSN Extensions and Commands .................................................. 7-5
7-3 VSS Extensions and Commands .................................................. 7-8
7-4 VSD Extensions and Commands .................................................. 7-12

xxii Contents
7-5 VDD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-6 VMD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7-7 VUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
7-8 BV1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
7-9 BV2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
7-10 MSN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
7-11 MSS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
7-12 MDN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
7-13 MDS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
7-14 MUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-46
7-15 RM1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
7-16 RM2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
7-17 TS1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
7-18 TS2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-62
7-19 CSD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-66
7-20 CUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-70
7-21 PND Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-73
7-22 PSN Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-75
7-23 PSS Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-78
7-24 PSD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-82
7-25 PDD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-86
7-26 PMD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
7-27 PUD Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
7-28 PS1 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-98
7-29 PS2 Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
7-30 TMR Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-106

8-1 OSx (PCS) Translation and Declaration Fields That Do Not Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8-2 Integer Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-3 Scaled Integer Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
8-4 Boolean Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
8-5 Real Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
8-6 Flag Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
8-7 Text Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
8-8 SA Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
8-9 SR Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
8-10 CT Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
8-11 FT Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
8-12 ST Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53

9-1 Recipe Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

Contents xxiii
List of Tables (continued)

A-1 Device Options Used in the RLL Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

A-2 VND Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-3 VSN Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
A-4 VSS Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
A-5 VSD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
A-6 VDD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
A-7 VMD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
A-8 BV1 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
A-9 BV2 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
A-10 VUD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-11 MSN Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
A-12 MSS Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
A-13 MDN Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
A-14 MDS Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-15 MUD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
A-16 RM1 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
A-17 RM2 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
A-18 TS1 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
A-19 TS2 Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
A-20 CSD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
A-21 CUD Extensions and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22

xxiv Contents
 Preface
New Features of SIMATIC Application Productivity Tool — APT is a software package that
APT you can use to design and implement a solution to your process control
problem. The capabilities of APT have been enhanced in Software
Release 1.9A. The documented differences between APT Release 1.9 and
Release 1.9A are indicated by change bars in the manual page margins.

Controller Families APT continues to support two controller families, the Series 505 and the
SIMATIC S5. Most programming tasks, like writing a program,
downloading, or debugging, are handled the same way in APT regardless of
your controller type. The way APT treats direct memory addressing and I/O
is determined by whether you have an S5 or a Series 505 controller.

Using APT The APT manual set is organized to make it easy both to use the manuals
Documentation and to follow the program design process that is appropriate for APT. The
APT manual organization is described below.

 SIMATIC APT User Manual (Volume 1) is a guide for using the

operator interface to enter your program.

 SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Tables) Manual (Volume 2)

and SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual
(Volume 3) provide the information that you need to design your
process control solution. These manuals describe the APT programming
languages, the characteristics of APT objects, and the tables that you
use to configure APT objects. Information is presented in the order that
provides for the most efficient and logical design of an APT program.

 SIMATIC APT Applications Manual (Volume 4) is intended to help you

design and write an application program using APT. It includes
programming hints, specific examples, and a recommended approach to
designing the controls for a factory process.

 SIMATIC APT MAITT User Manual (Volume 5) provides the

information that you need to design and execute a test program for an
application program.

 SIMATIC APT Release Notes have important information not included

in the manual set.

 The APT manual set is available both in paper form (APT--8200--T) and
in electronic form on CD-ROM (APT--8200--CD).

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, the term “OSx” is used throughout this
manual to designate SIMATIC TISTAR Releases 1.x and 2.x in addition to
SIMATIC PCS Release 3.x and SIMATIC PCS 7 OSx Release 4.x.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Preface xxv

 Chapter 1
APT Overview

1.1 Process Control Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Modular Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
APT Philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Basic Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2 Identifying the Physical Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Equipment Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Ingredients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3 Identifying the Control Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Sequence of Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Continuous Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.4 Identifying Safe-State Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Emergency Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Emergency Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.5 APT Program Structure and the Physical Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

APT Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Program Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Program Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Unit Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.6 APT Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

APT Object Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Naming Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Configuring Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Scope of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Dot Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

1.7 APT Languages and the Control Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Textual and Graphics-based Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
State Control Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Math Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Sequential Function Chart Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Continuous Function Chart Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.8 APT and Safe-State Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Monitoring Emergency Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Safe-State SFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

1.9 Controller Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Controller Models Supported By APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-1

1.1 Process Control Solutions

Modular Approach APT is a program design tool that allows you to solve a process control
problem by using a structured, top-down approach. While APT encourages
and supports this modular technique, it does not require you to use this
approach.

Modular design involves breaking a large problem into smaller, more

manageable pieces. You can solve each subproblem independently, and then
integrate these subsets to provide a total solution. This structured design
approach can significantly reduce the time that is necessary to develop and
debug a given solution.

APT Philosophy A basic philosophy of APT is that the control solution should reflect the
natural organization of the physical plant. In arranging the physical layout
of the plant, the design engineer usually breaks the process into unit
operations (mixers, reactors, etc.). While each unit is designed
independently, the engineer also considers the overall requirements for the
integrated process.

For example, Figure 1-1 shows a process that consists of a weighing system
and two kettles, or cookers, along with the corresponding pipes, pumps,
valves, etc. Typically, the design engineer determines the size of the
equipment according to the general production requirements and then deals
with the design specifics on an equipment-by-equipment basis.

The process control engineer can use a similar approach and divide the
control solution along natural equipment boundaries. The overall control
requirement is to move ingredients through a weigh system, into the
cookers, and then on to the next processing phase. Each equipment area has
its own requirements that can be determined independently; however,
integration requirements make it necessary to consider the
inter-connectivity of the total solution.

A successful modular design partitions the problem according to what is

needed solely for unit operation and what is needed to connect the units. If
this approach is used in the problem in Figure 1-1, for example, the solution
to the control of Cooker 1 is also the solution to the control of Cooker 2. This
approach significantly reduces the effort to solve the total problem.

NOTE: The SIMATIC APT Applications Manual gives a more complete

discussion of the recommended approach to designing a process control
program for an application.

1-2 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Basic Tasks In designing a control solution with APT, you must complete the following
basic tasks.

 Identify the physical process, and partition it along natural boundaries

that define the equipment and ingredients that are involved.

 Identify the control process, which defines the sequence of events in the
process as well as the continuous control of equipment and ingredients.

 Identify exceptional conditions that require special processing or

operator intervention.

Site1 Production Line

Weigh WT
Tank

Weigh System

FT FT
M M
H2O H2O
M M
T T

LT LT

Cooker 1 Cooker 2

M M

Figure 1-1 Production Process Line

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-3

1.2 Identifying the Physical Process

Equipment Areas One of the basic tasks in designing the process control solution is to identify
the physical process. Because of the modularity of APT, one of the primary
considerations in identifying the physical process is to partition that process
into manageable units that can be operated independently. This is the first
step in breaking the large problem into subproblems.

One method of breaking the control solution of a production line into

subproblems is by partitioning along lines of major processing equipment.
For example, Figure 1-2 shows four equipment areas: a weigh system, two
cookers, and a transportation system that moves ingredients from the weigh
system into the cookers.

Equipment A subtask of identifying the physical process is to identify the pieces of

equipment that are used in each equipment area.

For example, the weigh system in Figure 1-2 consists of two valves and a
weight indicator. Each cooker consists of a water valve, a dump valve, an
agitator motor, a steam valve, a flow transmitter, and temperature and level
indicators. The transportation system includes two motor-driven pumps to
transport the ingredients.

Ingredients Another subtask of identifying the physical process is to identify the

ingredients that are used in the process. In the example in Figure 1-2, the
weight of each ingredient is part of the weigh system, and cooking times
that are based on ingredients are part of the cookers.

1-4 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Site 1 Production Line

M
FEED_PMP

FEED_VLV

Weigh WT
Tank

WS_DMP_VLV

Unit 1: Weigh System

M AUGER

C1_DVLV C2_DVLV
M FAN1

C1_FEED_VLV C2_FEED_VLV

C1_FEED_PMP C2_FEED_PMP

FT H_FLOW FT H_FLOW
M C1_AGITATOR M C2_AGITATOR
H2O H2O
M M
C1_TEMP T C2_TEMP T

C1_LEVEL LT STM_VLV C2_LEVEL LT STM_VLV

C1_DMP_VLV C2_DMP_VLV

M M
Unit 2: Cooker 1 C1_DMP_PMP Unit 3: Cooker 2 C2_DMP_PMP

Figure 1-2 Units in Process Production Line

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-5

1.3 Identifying the Control Process

Sequence of To define the sequence of events, examine each step, or state, that the
Events process must follow in order to produce a product. If you break the physical
process into manageable units, the definition of this sequence becomes
much easier.

In the production line example, you can define a relatively simple process if
you look only at the steps involved in one cooker. The sequence of events for
one cooker include the following.

 Fill cooker.

 Cook ingredients.

Turn on steam.

Raise temperature to certain point.

 Mix ingredients.

Start agitator.

 Cool ingredients.

Reduce temperature to certain point.

 Dump cooker.

Although each of these steps can involve additional details, an upper-level

definition is sufficient at this point. Later, each major step or procedure can
be refined further to produce the total control solution.

Continuous Control Continuous control is used to define the control of field equipment that must
be controlled no matter what step is currently being executed in the process.

For example, in the cooking process, the steam valve must be controlled
continuously to reach and maintain the specified temperature. The
temperature transmitter must be monitored continuously to determine
when the specified temperature is reached.

1-6 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

1.4 Identifying Safe-State Conditions

Emergency In any physical process, situations can arise that require you to stop the
Conditions process and make certain that all equipment is in a safe-state condition. For
example, if a motor overheats, it may be necessary to use a special
procedure to control the process during this emergency. In designing the
control solution, be sure to identify all situations that require special
procedures.

In the cooker, for example, emergency conditions might include the

following.

 Failure of the steam valve to close.

 Failure of weigh system to deliver appropriate amount of ingredient.

 Failure of agitator motor to start.

Emergency Like the control process for normal operation, the control process for
Procedures handling special conditions involves not only a sequence of events but also
continuous control and monitoring of equipment.

For example, if continuous monitoring of the temperature in the cooker

indicates that the steam valve has failed to close at the appropriate time,
you may need to dump the cooker in order to avoid overheating the
ingredients. This procedure requires the dumping process to occur outside of
the normal sequence of events.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-7

1.5 APT Program Structure and the Physical Process

APT Hierarchy The APT environment provides a hierarchical structure that assists you in
breaking your large process control problem into subproblems. The
hierarchy shown in Figure 1-3 consists of three levels.

 Program Directory Level

 Program Content Level

 Unit Content Level

PROGRAM HIERARCHY ESC

PROGRAM DIRECTORY

SYSTEM
PROGRAM CONTENT
CONFIG [ ] System Configuration
PROGRAMS ? CTLs OPTs ESC
WASH_DEM [ ] Site 1 UNIT CONTENT
Production COMPILE
Line F1 F2 F3
CONTROL [ ] Configuration for compile
TABLES TABLES
IO IO[ ] I/O symbolic
[ ]name
I/O symbolic
table name table
MODULE DEVICE [ ] Device
[ ] Module definition tabledefinition table
DEVICE DECLARE [ ] Declaration
[ ] Device definition table table
DECLARE RECIPE [ table
[ ] Declaration ] Recipe usage table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table SFCs
SUBROUTINEMAIN SFC
[ ] Subroutine[ table
] A: The main calling structure
DOWNLOAD UNITS [ ] B: Recipe Management
WASHER [ ] Washing machine unit CFCs
WSIM INTERLOC [ ] A: Device interlocks
[ ] Washer simulation
H2O CTR [ ] B: Auto open/close of hot/cold
RECIPE TEMPLATES
SAVED REPORTSSAVED REPORTS
DEVICE VAL [ ] Device Validation Report

Figure 1-3 APT Hierarchy

1-8 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Program Directory The Program Directory Level contains a list of all programs, as shown in
Figure 1-4. The physical process that is identified in solving the process
control problem is the basis for the definition of a program.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

PROGRAM DIRECTORY F1 F2 F3

SYSTEM
CONFIG [ ] System Configuration Site 1
PROGRAMS Controller
SITE 1 [ ] Site 1 production line
SITE 2 [ ] Site 2 production line

Site 2
Controller

Figure 1-4 APT Program Directory

A program in APT is that portion of the process that can run on a single
controller. The size of the program depends on controller memory size,
safety considerations, and other characteristics of the process line.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-9

APT Program Structure and the Physical Process (continued)

Program Content The Program Content Level, as shown in Figure 1-5, contains a list of all
units that you identify as a part of one program. The equipment areas, or
units, that are identified in the process line are the basis of the unit
definitions at the Program Content Level.

This level of the hierarchy includes a means of identifying equipment and

ingredients that must be accessed by more than one unit, or area, of
equipment. User-designed and customized tasks are defined in the
subroutine table, which is also at the program level.

For example, the transportation system in the Site 1 Production Line shown
in Figure 1-5 needs to be accessed by all three units in the process. The
equipment in the transportation system is defined in the Device Definition
Table, and control can be handled by the program-level Sequential Function
Charts (SFC)s and Continuous Function Charts (CFC)s. Ingredients for the
product(s) are defined in the Recipe Template. The amounts of ingredients
for each product are defined in the Recipe Usage Table.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

PROGRAM
PROGRAMCONTENT
CONTENT F1 F2 F3

COMPILE
CONTROL [ ] Configuration for compile
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
MODULE [ ] Module definition table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SUBROUTINE [ ] Subroutine table
UNITS
COOKER1 [ ] Cooker 1
COOKER2 [ ] Cooker 2
WEIGHSYS [ ] Weigh System
RECIPE TEMPLATES
PRODUCTA [ ] Product A Recipe Template
SFCS
CFCS
SAVED REPORTS

Weigh system
Unit

Global
Transportation
system
Cooker1 Cooker2
Unit Unit

Site1 Production Line -- Program

Figure 1-5 APT Program Content Directory

1-10 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Unit Content The Unit Content Level contains the definition of the actual control
processes, including sequential and continuous procedures that are specific
to the unit, as well as special procedures to handle emergency conditions.
This level also includes a means of identifying equipment and ingredients
that are local to each unit.

Sequential control of the process at the unit level is defined in one or more
SFCs, which are listed at the Unit Content Level, as shown in Figure 1-6.
Continuous control at the unit level is defined in one or more CFCs.

The equipment that is local to the unit is identified in the Device Definition
Table at the Unit Level. Amounts of ingredients for the products made in
the unit are stored in the Recipe Usage Table at the Unit Level.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

UNIT CONTENT F1 F2 F3

TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SFCs
CK1MAIN [ ] Control of Cooker 1
RAW_CHG [ ] Charge Raw Material to Cooker1
COOL [ ] Cool Down Cooker 1
CFCs
CK1TEMP [ ] Temp Control for Cooker 1
SAVED REPORTS

Figure 1-6 APT Unit Content Directory for COOKER1

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-11

1.6 APT Objects

APT Object An APT object is any portion of the control system that can be named and
Definition has attributes that can be configured. A unit is an object that includes a set
of items that define the unit. These items that define the unit are also
objects. These items include field devices (such as pumps, motors and
valves), control strategies, and processes. SFCs and CFBs are also objects.

All of these objects combine to define the control of the unit. You open a
valve to begin filling the cooker; you open a steam valve to start heating the
jacket of the cooker; and you start the motor to start agitating the cooking
ingredients.

Table 1-1 lists the basic APT objects, along with the maximum characters
that can be used in each object name.

Table 1-1 APT Objects

Object Naming Location Maximum Characters

Program Program Directory 8
Unit Program Content 8
Program Content
SFC 8
Unit Content
Program Content
CFC 8
Unit Content
CFB CFC 8
I/O Symbolic Name Table
I/O Symbolic Name 12
Module Definition Table
Device Device Definition Table 12
Constant Declaration Table 12
Variable Declaration Table 12
Recipe Recipe Usage Table 12
Recipe Template Program Content 8
Subroutine Program Content 8

Naming Objects Observe the following rules when you name an object.

 Valid characters that can be used in APT object names are

alphanumeric characters and the underscore.

 APT object names must contain at least one letter. Object names are
not case-sensitive; that is, you can enter a name in either upper-case or
lower-case letters.

1-12 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

  APT object names must not be in the form of scientific notation, for
example, 45E6 is not a valid object name.

 No words listed in Table 1-2 can be used as an object name.

Table 1-2 Key Words

ABS COM4 INT_TO_REAL ONN SFC

AND CON LEAD_LAG ONS SIN
ARCCOS COS LEFTSHIFT OR SQRT
ARCSIN EDGE LIMIT ORDER SSABORT
ARCTAN ELSE LN OUT SSARM
ARRAY ELSIF LOAD_ARRAY PBITS_TO_INT SSDEFINE
ASM END LOG PRAGMA SSDISARM
AUX ENDIF LOGSTEP PRINT SSENTRY
BCDBIN EXP LOOKUP_TABLE PRIORITY SSRETURN
BEGIN FALSE LOOP PRN SSTRIGGER
BINBCD FLAG LPT1 PROUND STATUS
BITCLEAR FOR LPT2 PTRUNC SUBROUTINE
BITS_TO_INT FRAC LPT3 PUBLIC TAN
BITSET FRS LPT4 RANGE THEN
BITTEST GLOBAL MATH REAL TIMING
BLOCK IF MAX RECORD TRIGGER
BODY IN MIN RETENTIVE TRUE
BOOLEAN IN_ASM MINMAX RETURN TRUNC
BY INHERIT MOD REVERSE TYPE
CHAR INIT NIL RIGHTSHIFT UNSCALE
CLEAR IN_OUT NOT ROUND UNTIL
COM1 INTEGER OF SCALE WHILE
COM2 INTERPOLATE OFF SCOPE XOR
COM3 INT_TO_BITS ON SETSSI

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-13

APT Objects (continued)

Configuring Each object that you name in APT must be configured. To configure a
Objects program, for example, you define units and global equipment and
ingredients. APT provides a set of six definition tables at the Program
Content Level that you use to define equipment and ingredients and
user-defined subtasks. These tables, shown in Figure 1-7, allow you to
define the I/O modules in your program as well as global I/O symbolic
names, devices, subroutines, declared constants and variables, and recipes.
Program-level sequence control is handled in the program-level SFCs.
Program-level continuous control is handled in the program-level CFCs.

To configure a unit, you define local equipment, ingredients, and the control
processes. Four definition tables are available at the Unit Content Level, as
shown in Figure 1-7. Each unit contains a table for defining I/O symbolic
names, devices, declared constants and variables, and recipes that are local
to the unit. SFCs and CFCs are part of a unit and are configured at this
level also.

PROGRAM CONTENT

COMPILE
CONTROL [ ] Configuration for compile
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
MODULE [ ] Module definition table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SUBROUTINE [ ] Subroutine table
UNITS
RECIPE TEMPLATES
SFCs
CFCs
SAVED REPORTS
? CTLs OPTs ESC
UNIT CONTENT F1 F2 F3
UNIT CONTENT
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SFCs
CFC
SAVED REPORTS

Figure 1-7 APT Tables

1-14 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Scope of Objects Because of the modular approach of APT, objects have a definite scope
within the program. Objects that are defined at the Program Content Level
are global and can be accessed from any point within the program.

Objects that are defined at the Unit Content Level are local to that unit and
can be accessed only within that unit.

When you name objects in APT, you must consider the scope of that object
and use names that are unique within that scope.

Dot Extensions When you name an object, you can access various aspects of that object by
appending a dot extension to the name that you created.

For example, if you identify switch102 as the open limit switch for valve102,
you can also refer to that switch as valve102.OLS. The dot extension .OLS
always indicates an open limit switch for the named device. You can
determine if valve102 is open by checking the status of valve102.OPND.

Each type of object has a corresponding list of dot extensions that provide
access to the different attributes that you configured for that object.

Recipes Recipes provide a structure that allows you to define the necessary
ingredients to produce a product. Recipes can also serve as a structure for
reports, control strategies, etc., and are considered objects that you
configure. The Recipe Template at the Program Level allows you to create
your own form for configuring the attributes of a recipe. The values of the
ingredients in a recipe can be configured at either the Program Level or at
the Unit Level.

For example, if Cooker 1 is designed to create three different products, you

can create three recipes (one for each product) in the Recipe Usage Table at
the Program Level. Since you can create only one product at a time in the
unit, you can define a working recipe at the Unit Level and then move the
appropriate recipe from the Program Level into the working recipe at the
Unit Level.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-15

1.7 APT Languages and the Control Process

Textual and APT provides four languages that you use to define the actual solution to
Graphics-based your control process. Table 1-3 lists these languages according to type.
Languages
Table 1-3 APT Programming Languages

Language Type Programming Language

The State Control Language
Textual
The Math Language
The Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Language
Graphics-based
The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) Language

 The State Control Language consists of commands and expressions

that you use in SFCs to control and evaluate the states of objects.

 The Math Language allows you to provide additional custom control by

defining mathematical calculations in SFCs, CFCs and subroutines.

 The Sequential Function Chart (SFC) Language uses boxes ( ) that

represent steps, or states, to define the sequential control of your
process. Transitions ( ) control the flow from box to box. Lines that
connect these symbols define the program flow from one step to
another.

 The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) Language uses boxes that

represent pre-defined algorithms that you configure to provide
continuous control of your process. You can also design your own
algorithms in the user-defined subroutines.

The State Control Language and the Math Language are called textual
languages to differentiate them from the graphics-based languages, namely,
the SFC Language and the CFC Language.

With the SFC and CFC Languages, you combine graphical elements on the
screen and configure relationships and characteristics with graphics and
text. With the text-based languages, you create a series of sequentially
executed program statements.

1-16 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

State Control The State Control Language is a textual language that includes both
Language commands and conditional expressions. The commands are related
specifically to the objects that they control and have a common format as
shown in Figure 1-8.

Command APT object name

OPEN valve102;

Figure 1-8 APT Step Commands

Conditional expressions in the State Control Language evaluate to true or

false and monitor the state of an object as shown in Figure 1-9.

valve102.OPND State Control Language

expression evaluates to true
(if valve is open) or to false (if
valve is not open).
APT object name Dot extension
indicates position

Figure 1-9 Conditional Expressions

Math Language The Math Language is a text-based language that provides a means for you
to perform arithmetic calculations and logical operations in both sequential
and continuous control operations.

The Math Language allows you to make assignment statements, use

WHILE loops, use IF..THEN..ELSE expressions, and perform various
pre-defined math functions and procedures.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-17

APT Languages and the Control Process (continued)

Sequential The SFC Language is a graphics-based language that allows you to define
Function Chart the sequence of events that control your physical process. SFCs control and
Language monitor the normal operation of objects. The SFC can be thought of as the
“supervisor” of all of the other objects within the unit.

For example, the Site 1 Production Line has a sequential order of

processing in the cooker unit.

 Fill the cooker and then turn on the steam.

 Wait for the temperature to reach a certain point and then turn on the
agitator.

 Wait for the temperature to cool down and then open the drain valve.

This sequential order of events is translated into the SFC Language, which
consists of a sequence of steps and transitions. A step specifies the control
action; a transition monitors the states of objects to determine when the
process is ready to proceed to the next step.

An SFC step can contain one or more State Control Language statements.
An SFC step can also include a math section consisting of one or more Math
Language statements.

An SFC transition consists of one conditional expression, which determines

when the system deactivates one step and activates the next step.

1-18 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Figure 1-10 shows the initial portion of an SFC. In Step 1, the system
requests an action that opens valve102. The system remains in that step, or
state, until it receives information that the valve is opened (Transition 1).
This transition controls the flow, or sequence, from Step 1 to Step 2.

Action request

S1 OPEN valve102;

T1 valve102.OPND Transition determines flow

from Step 1 to Step 2
S2

Figure 1-10 SFC Steps and Transitions

Like the physical process, the control process can be broken into small,
logical pieces. The SFC Language allows you to nest SFCs; that is, one step
can call another SFC and, therefore, make it possible to solve problems in
parts.

For example, you can have a main SFC for Cooker 1. The first phase, or
step, in the main SFC calls a subordinate SFC that prepares the devices for
the process. The second step calls another subordinate SFC that fills the
cooker and monitors the ingredients. In configuring the main SFC, you
define the upper level of the process (procedures) without concern for
details. In configuring a subordinate SFC you concentrate on details, but
only on the details related to a smaller portion of the overall process control
solution.

The SFC Language includes parallel branches that make it possible to do

two or more things simultaneously. Selection branches provide a
decision-making function that allows the system to follow different paths
depending on specified circumstances.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-19

APT Languages and the Control Process (continued)

Continuous The Continuous Function Chart (CFC) Language is a graphics-based

Function Chart language that allows you to define the flow of data to provide the continuous
Language control of your process.

A Continuous Function Chart consists of one or more Continuous Function

Blocks (CFBs) that are represented as boxes. Each box represents a
pre-defined or user-defined algorithm that you configure to control objects.
A CFB can represent an analog alarm, a PID loop, a limiter, a selector, etc.
A form allows you to configure all the attributes of the CFB, and you can
embed additional calculations by providing associated Math Language
statements.

In the Cooker example, various devices need to be controlled continuously to

allow the cooker to reach and hold a specified temperature. In the example
in Figure 1-11, the PID loop controls the steam valve and reads the
temperature transmitter to be certain that the temperature is reached and
maintained continuously.

After naming and configuring the PID block, the system controls the CFB
like a device. The CFB can be enabled and disabled from an SFC, and the
CFB has dot extensions that can be used to access status or other configured
attributes.

xxxxxx.PV
PV
SP SP

P I D
xxxxxx
OUT
xxxxxx.OUT

Figure 1-11 Continuous Function Blocks

1-20 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

1.8 APT and Safe-State Conditions

Monitoring APT allows you to define special procedures to handle situations that make
Emergency it necessary to stop the process for safety reasons. For example, you can
Conditions configure a CFB to provide continuous monitoring of conditions that could
become critical.

Safe-State SFCs Safe-state SFCs allow you to define special sequential procedures for use
when critical conditions are detected. Safe-state SFCs are separate
operations for handling special processing conditions. In an emergency,
therefore, the program can exit the normal sequence of events and go to
another SFC to shut down equipment and return the process to safe
operational conditions.

To configure a safe-state SFC, you must first define the conditions that
trigger the execution of the special procedure. You can define a priority level
that determines which safe-state SFC is executed if several emergency
conditions are detected simultaneously. You can also define a safe-state SFC
that is associated with only a single SFC and all its subordinate SFCs.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-21

1.9 Controller Support

Controller Models APT supports two controller families, the Series 505 and the S5. The Series
Supported By APT 505 controllers that APT supports are the following models.

 SIMATIC 545  SIMATIC 565

 SIMATIC 545L (545 Lite)  SIMATIC 565T

 SIMATIC 555  SIMATIC 565P

 SIMATIC 560  SIMATIC 575

 SIMATIC 560T

The S5 controllers that APT supports are these models.

 S5--135U with 928B CPU

 S5--155U with 948 CPU

 S5--155H with 948R CPU

Table 1-4 shows the part numbers for the Series 505 controller/CPU
configurations that are supported for this release.

Table 1-4 Series 505 Configurations in APT

Controller CPU Part Number(s)

545 545--1101 Rel. 2.1
545 545--1102 Rel. 3.x
545L 545--1103 Rel. 4.x
545 545--1104 Rel. 4.x
545 545--1105 Rel. 5.x
545 545--1106 Rel. 5.x
555 555--110x Rel. 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x
560 560--2120 Rel. 3.x
560T 560--2820 Rel. 6.x
565 560--2120 Rel. 3.x and 565--2120 Rel. 3.x
565T 560--2820 Rel. 6.x and 565--2120 Rel. 3.x
565P 560--2820 Rel. 6.x and 565--2820 Rel. 2.x
575 575--210x Rel. 3.x, 4.x, and 5.x

1-22 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 1-5 lists the minimum firmware support and SIMATIC STEP 5
support for controller models in the S5 family.

Table 1-5 APT Minimum Firmware Support and STEP 5 Support (S5)

CPU
Feature
928B 948R 948U
Minimum Firmware Revision 2 Revision 1 Revision 1
STEP 5 Compatible Stage 6, version 6.3 Stage 6, version 6.3 Stage 6, version 6.3

Table 1-6 lists the minimum firmware support and SIMATIC TISOFT
support for controller models in the Series 505 family. For releases earlier
than the minimums supported by APT, you must purchase an upgrade for
your controller.

Table 1-6 APT Minimum Firmware Support and TISOFT Support (Series 505)

Controller
Feature
545 545L 555 560 560T 565 565T 565P 575
Minimum See See
2.1 4.0 3.0 3.0 6.0 3.0 3.0
Firmware Note 1 Note 2
TISOFT
Rel. 4.0 Rel. 6.0 Rel. 4.0 Rel. 4.0 Rel. 4.0 Rel 4.0 Rel. 4.0 Rel. 4.0 Rel. 4.0
Compatible
Note 1: The 560--2820 card must be Release 6.0 or higher. The 565--2120 card must be Release 3.0 or higher.
Note 2: The 560--2820 card must be Release 6.0 or higher. The 565--2820 card must be Release 2.0 or higher.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-23

Controller Support (continued)

Table 1-7 lists the APT tools that are supported for each controller family
(Series 505 and S5).

Table 1-7 APT Tools Supported by Series 505/S5 Controllers

Tool Series 505 S5 Tool Series 505 S5

APT Compile Control Yes Yes1 Units Yes Yes
Module Editor Yes No SFCs Yes Yes
I/O Editor Yes Yes CFCs Yes Yes
Devices Yes Yes Reports Yes Yes3
Declarations Yes Yes Debug Yes Yes
Recipes Yes Yes MAITT Yes Yes
Subroutines Yes Yes2 Industrial Ethernet Yes Yes
1 S5 users can incorporate FBs, PBs, and SBs that they have written or purchased.
2 S5 users can program OB1--OB39 in subroutines.
3 Series 505 and S5 users get a comprehensive report of all the I/O that they have configured in APT.

1-24 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 1-8 lists the APT features supported by the different S5 CPUs.

Table 1-8 APT Features Supported by S5 Controller Models

CPU
Feature
928B 948U 948R
WHILE Loops Yes Yes Yes
Array Indexing Yes Yes Yes
Real/Integer Array Indexing with Expressions Yes Yes Yes
Boolean Array Indexing with Expressions No No No
Real Math Yes Yes Yes
All CFBs Supported Yes Yes Yes
SFPGM-only Instructions No 1 No 1 No 1
Analog I/O Modules Support Yes Yes Yes
Immediate Read/Write Yes Yes Yes
COPY_BYTES Procedure No No No
Real Number PID Inputs Yes Yes Yes
Integer PID Inputs No No No
1 While SFPGM code is not used with S5 controllers, all SFPGM functionality
has been incorporated into the STL code.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Overview 1-25

Controller Support (continued)

Table 1-9 lists the APT features supported by the Series 505 controllers.

Table 1-9 APT Features Supported by Series 505 Controller Models

Controller
Feature
545 545L 555 560 560T 565 565T 565P 575
WHILE Loops Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Array Indexing Yes Yes Yes Note 1 Note 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Real/Integer Array
Note 5 Yes Yes Yes
Indexing with No No No No No
Note 8 Note 8 Note 8 Note 8
Expressions in RLL
Boolean Array
Indexing with
Expressions in Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
SFPGM
Real Math Yes Yes Yes Note 2 Note 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
All CFBs Supported Yes Yes Yes Note 3 Note 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
SFPGM-only
Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instructions
Analog I/O Modules
Yes Yes Yes Note 4 Note 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Support
Use Local Cs on the
Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes Yes Yes
CPU
Cyclic RLL task
Note 5 Yes Yes No No No No No Yes
support
Interrupt RLL task
Note 6 Yes Note 6 No No No No No No
support
Immediate
Note 5 Yes Yes No No No No No Yes
Read/Write
Fast Bitpick
Note 7 Yes Yes No Note 7 No Note 7 Note 7 Yes
operations
COPY_BYTES
Note 5 Yes Yes No No No No No Yes
procedure
Real Number PID
Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inputs
Integer Number PID
Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes
Inputs
1 Arrays can be addressed with literal indexes only.
2 Real numbers can be used, but only with limited MATH capabilities.
3 Only Interlock and Math CFBs can be used.
4 Analog input points must have the .RAW extension. For example, AI point IVAR1 must be
addressed as IVAR1.RAW. APT cannot add scaling or filtering to the input from these points.
5 545 firmware Rel. 3.0 and higher.
6 545 firmware Rel. 3.0 and higher. 555 firmware Rel. 3.0 and higher
7 545 firmware Rel. 3.0. 560T RLL card firmware Rel. 6.x.
8 Avoid indexing with expressions wherever possible because it produces less efficient code generation.

1-26 APT Overview APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Chapter 2
Programs and Units
2.1 Understanding APT Program and Unit Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Program Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Unit Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
APT Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Stopping and Restarting SFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Monitoring Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Using Scan Time and Time-of-Day Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Using the Powerfail Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Programs and Units 2-1

2.1 Understanding APT Program and Unit Extensions

Program Definition A program in APT is that portion of the process that can run on a single
controller. The actual size of the program depends on controller memory
size, safety considerations, and other characteristics of the process line.

At the Program Content Level of an APT program you define the divisions
of plant operation (APT units) for your process along lines of equipment and
ingredient requirements. At this level, you also define the I/O modules, I/O
symbolic names, devices, declarations, recipes, and user-defined subtasks
(subroutines) that you want to access from all APT units in the program.
Recipe templates are also defined at the Program Content Level. Global
sequential and continuous control requirements can be handled at the
Program Content Level through global SFCs and CFCs.

Unit Definition The APT unit contains the control logic for a single division of plant
operation. This includes sequential (unit-level SFCs) and continuous
(unit-level CFCs) control and the safe-state procedures for the unit. At this
level, you also define the I/O symbolic names, devices, declarations, and
recipes that are local to this unit only.

2-2 Programs and Units APT Programming Reference (Tables)

APT Extensions When you name a program, APT creates the extension variables that are
listed in Table 2-1 and described in the paragraphs that follow.

Table 2-1 APT Program and Unit Extensions

Level Extension Definition

RLL or STL scan time in milliseconds (read-only
.TSCAN
integer)
.PWRFL powerfail (read-only boolean)
.TODS 1 time of day in seconds (read-only real)
.TOD 1 time of day in hours (read-only real)
.IHOUR 1 current hour past midnight (read-only integer)
Program-
Level .IMIN 1 current minute of the hour (read-only integer)
Extensions number of seconds in the current minute (read-only
.ISEC 1
integer)
.IYEAR 1 current calendar year (read-only integer)
.IMONTH 1 month of the year (read-only integer)
.IDAY 1 day of the month (read-only integer)
.IDOW 1 day of the week (read-only integer)
Disable first of two control blocks (read/write
.DIS_SF1 2,3
boolean)
Disable second of two control blocks (read/write
.DIS_SF2 2,3
boolean)
.ENABL Enable (read/write boolean)
.ABORT Abort (read/write boolean)
2,4 Error code (read-only integer)
Program-
g .ECODE1
and
d .IID1 2,3 Error controller block (read-only integer)
Unit-Level
Extensions .SNUM1 2,3 Error line number (read-only integer)
.ECODE2 2,4 Error code (read-only integer)
.IID2 2,3 Error controller block (read-only integer)
.SNUM2 2,3 Error line number (read-only integer)
Indicates that the second control block is taking
.OVRUN2 2,3 more than a half second to complete the
calculations (read-only integer)
1 Not used by 560/560T controllers. Not created if Do not convert TOD to integer
fields field is selected in Compiler Control File.
2 Not used by 560/560T controllers.
3 Not used by S5 controllers; these extensions pertain to SFPGM code.
4 For S5 controllers, program level ECODE1 and ECODE2 contain runtime error
information; however, unit level ECODE1 and ECODE2 do not. For Series 505
controllers, ECODE1 and ECODE2 contain error information at both the
program and the unit level.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Programs and Units 2-3

Understanding APT Program and Unit Extensions (continued)

Stopping and The unit_name.ENABL extension can be used to restart the unit SFCs either
Restarting SFCs during the debug operation or from an OSx (PCS) workstation. The
prog_name.ENABL extension restarts the program SFCs.

When a program is first downloaded to the controller, all .ENABL extension

variables are set to true. The first step in each main SFC is automatically
activated when the controller goes into run mode.

You can control the operation of any SFC by toggling the .ENABL extension
of the unit or program. If the .ENABL bit is true and you set it to false, all
SFCs are turned off and all devices are set to an unlocked state (manual
mode). When you set the .ENABL bit back to true, the first step of the main
SFC is activated. All devices can then be placed in the locked state
(automatic mode) with the appropriate command or assignment statement.

The prog_name.ABORT extension variable allows you to stop program SFC

execution by setting it to true. To restart the program, set the .ABORT
extension back to false and then toggle the .ENABL extension as explained
above. The unit_name.ABORT extension works similarly for unit SFCs.

Monitoring Analog When you create a program for a Series 505 controller, APT defines two
Inputs control blocks that are used to monitor analog inputs.

 The first control block is used to scale unfiltered analog inputs and
most math CFBs (exceptions: Interlock and Math). This process is
executed as quickly as possible.

 The second control block monitors filtered analog inputs. This process
is executed as quickly as possible.

Both control blocks can be disabled by setting these extensions to true:

prog_name.DIS_SF1 and prog_name.DIS_SF2.

Availability These control blocks require special function programming, and are
supported for Series 505 controllers only. S5 controllers can scale and filter
analog inputs, but do not use these control blocks or the extensions
(.DIS_SF1, .DIS_SF2, .ECODE, .IID, and .SNUM) associated with them. The
560/560T controllers do not use these control blocks or their associated
extensions, and do not scale or filter analog inputs.

2-4 Programs and Units APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 The extensions listed below provide data about the two SFPGM control
blocks that monitor the global analog inputs in all Series 505 controllers
except for the 560/560T. In the descriptions below, the value of x would
equal one to indicate the first control block, or two for the second control
block.

 If an execution error occurs, the prog_name.ECODEx extension contains

a non-zero value.

 The prog_name.IIDx extension identifies the SFPGM associated with

the block.

 The prog_name.SNUMx extension contains the SFPGM line number

that contains the error.

 The control blocks can be disabled by setting the prog_name.DIS_SFx

extension to true.

Table 2-2 lists the SFPGM error codes and the associated number that
appear in the .ECODE1 or .ECODE2 extension.

Table 2-2 Program Extension Error Codes (Series 505 only)

Code
Meaning
Hex Decimal
02 02 Address out of range
03 03 Requested data not found
09 09 Incorrect amount of data sent with request
11 17 Invalid data
43 67 Control block does not exist
4A 74 Attempt to access an integer variable as a real
4B 75 Attempt to access a real variable as an integer
4E 78 Attempt to write to a read-only variable
4F 79 Invalid variable data type for this operation
52 82 Invalid returned value
Attempt to use lead-lag procedure in event or continuous
53 83
math block
58 88 Stack overflow while evaluating IF..THEN statement
5A 90 Arithmetic overflow
5B 91 Invalid operator in an IF..THEN statement
5D 93 Attempt to divide by zero
60 96 Invalid data type code (usually in IF..THEN statement)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Programs and Units 2-5

Understanding APT Program and Unit Extensions (continued)

Using Scan Time You can use the program_name.TSCAN extension variable to read the
and Time-of-Day program scan time for all controller models. For Series 505 controllers, you
Variables can also read status word 10, using the format %STW10, to obtain the scan
time.

The time-of-day extension variables (.TODS, .IHOUR, .ISEC, etc.) can be used
anywhere in the program to read the current time from the real-time clock.
These extensions roll over at midnight. You cannot set the clock from your
APT program, although you can set the clock using the APT Debug option.
You can also set the clock from TISOFT if you have a Series 505 controller.

If you have a Series 505 controller, you can access status words 141--144 to
read the real-time clock. Use the format %STW## and read the date or time
as a variable. See the your controller’s programming reference manual more
information.

Using the Powerfail The powerfail extension variable (prog_name.PWRFL) can be monitored and
Variable used to trigger a high-priority interlock or a safe-state SFC in the event of a
power loss. The powerfail bit is set on return from powerfail and remains
true for one controller scan.

If the controller loses power, all units become inactive and remain inactive
until the power returns. When power returns, each unit and/or program
starts up in the initial step of the main SFC. To control the response to a
power failure, use a retentive safe-state SFC. Place an SSARM command in
the initial step of the main SFC, and use the prog_name.PWRFL extension as
a trigger in the SSTRIGGER command.

2-6 Programs and Units APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Chapter 3
I/O and Module Definitions
3.1 Understanding Module and I/O Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Referring to I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
I/O and Module Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.2 Defining Modules and I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Defining I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Defining Modules for Series 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-1

3.1 Understanding Module and I/O Definitions

Referring to I/O The APT system provides two methods for referring to an I/O point.
Series 505 controllers and S5 controllers can both use these two methods,
which are explained below.

 Symbolic Name The standard method of referring to an I/O point in

a program is with an I/O symbolic name that you define in the I/O
Symbolic Name Table as explained in Chapter 5.

If you define a symbolic name, you can use that name anywhere in the
program to refer to the actual, physical I/O point; and you can change
the location of the I/O module without making changes to your
program.

 Direct Address Another method of referring to an I/O point is to use

the internal controller address, or direct address, that is associated
with the field wiring to an I/O module.

The internal controller address is not typically used in the program. If

you use these direct addresses, such as %WX, %WY, etc., for Series 505,
or %PW, %OW, etc., for S5, in your program, and later move a module
across channels (Series 505) or change the module’s address (S5), you
have to change all program references to those addresses. See the Math
Language Overview Chapter in the SIMATIC APT Programming
Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual for more information about direct
memory addressing.

Figure 3-1 shows how you configure the symbolic name and the controller
address for your I/O if you have a Series 505 controller. Figure 3-2 shows
how you configure the symbolic name and the controller address for your
I/O if you have an S5 controller.

3-2 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Module Table
Base F10
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
1 1
2 Program Level
3 ESC I/O Series: 500
Module Definition Table
4 Slot Type Addrs Slot Type Addrs Pos Address I/O Name Description
5 1 8DO 1 9
1 Y0001 AG1_CW Cooling water
6 2 8DI 9 10 2 Y0002 AG1_OFF Stop bit
7 3 11
8 4 12
5 13
6 14
Program Level
Module Definition Table
7 15
8 16 Pos Address I/O Name Description
1 X0009 LTS_1 Low temp.
limit switch
Low temperature
limit switch: LTS_1
Physical address:
X0009
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table
Cooling water: AG1_CW
Physical address: Name Type Address Description
Y0001
AG1_CW DO Y0001 Cooling water
AG1_OFF DO Y0002 Stop bit
LTS_1 DI X0009 Low temp.
Stop bit: AG1_OFF limit switch
Physical address:
Y0002

Unit Level
SFC

S3 AG1_CW := true;
P C 8 8 LTS_1
/ P D D T3
S U O I S4 AG1_OFF := true;

Figure 3-1 Physical Addresses and I/O Symbolic Names for Series 505 Controllers

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-3

Understanding Module and I/O Definitions (continued)

Low temperature
limit switch: LTS_1
Physical address:
I 0.1
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table
Cooling water: AG1_CW
Physical address: Q 0.1 Name Type Address Description
AG1_CW DO Q 0.1 Cooling water
AG1_OFF DO Q 0.2 Stop bit
LTS_1 DI I 0.1 Low temp.
Stop bit: AG1_OFF limit switch
Physical address:
Q 0.2

Unit Level
SFC

S3 AG1_CW := true;
C 8 8 T3 LTS_1
P D D
U O I S4 AG1_OFF := true;

SIMATIC S5 SIEMENS

P/S

Figure 3-2 Physical Addresses and I/O Symbolic Names for S5 Controllers

3-4 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

I/O and Module An I/O Symbolic Name Table is available at both the Program Level and at
Tables the Unit Content Level. I/O names that are defined at the program level are
considered global and can be used in any unit in that program. I/O names
that are defined at the unit level can be used only within that unit.

The Module Definition Table is a utility which allows you to specify the
location of a module in a channel, base, and slot. The Module Definition
Table also associates a controller memory address with each I/O symbolic
name that identifies a physical I/O point wired to a module.

For S5 controllers, you must define the internal controller address in the I/O
Symbolic Name Table instead of using the Module Definition Table, because
you set the address of the I/O with dipswitches on the I/O card. Use the I/O
Symbol Table to associate a controller memory address with each I/O
symbolic name that identifies a physical I/O point wired to a module.

Availability I/O Symbolic Name Tables are supported for Series 500t I/O, Series 505
I/O, and S5 I/O. The Module Definition Table is only supported for Series
500 I/O and Series 505 I/O.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-5

3.2 Defining Modules and I/O

Overview The procedure you follow to configure your I/O points and modules differs
depending on your controller type.

For Series 505 controllers, APT allows you to define modules and I/O in
either of the following orders:

 Configure Modules First. This is a one-step process: you define an I/O

name in the Module Definition Table, and that name automatically
appears in the I/O Symbolic Name Table as the default type. See
Figure 3-3.

Configuring modules first is especially useful for intelligent I/O

modules, because APT automatically creates appropriate I/O names
and identifies I/O points that have specific purposes.

 Define I/O First. This is a two-step process: you define the symbolic
names and then configure the modules. The I/O names are not linked
with the physical addresses until you define the I/O name in the
Module Definition Table. See Figure 3-4.

Result
APT Program Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table

1 Name Type Address

Program Level name0 WI WX0129
Module Definition Table

Channel
Unit Level
Base
Unit 1
Slot
I/O Symbolic Name Table
Pos Address I/O Name Unit
1 WX0129 name0 Name Type Address
2 WX0130 name1 unit1 name1 WI WX0130
3 WX0131 name2 unit2

Definition Sequence Unit Level

1. Define module and enter I/O name in Unit 2
Module Definition Table.
Result: I/O name, I/O type, and I/O Symbolic Name Table
address automatically appear in I/O
Symbolic Name Table at appropriate Name Type Address
level.
name2 WI WX0131

Figure 3-3 Defining Series 505 Modules Before I/O Symbolic Names

3-6 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 APT Program
1
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table Unit Level Unit Level
Unit 1 Unit 2
Name Type Address
name0 WI I/O Symbolic Name Table I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address Name Type Address

name1 WI name2 WI

2
Program Level
Module Definition Table
Definition Sequence
Channel 1. Enter I/O name and I/O type in I/O Symbolic Name Table(s) at
Base appropriate level(s).
Slot 2. Define module and enter I/O name (defined in Step 1) in Module
Definition Table.
Pos Address I/O Name Unit Result: I/O address automatically appears in I/O Symbolic Name Table
with corresponding name at appropriate level.
1 WX0129 name0
2 WX0130 name1 unit1
3 WX0131 name2 unit2

Result
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table Unit Level Unit Level
Unit 1 Unit 2
Name Type Address
name0 WI WX0129 I/O Symbolic Name Table I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address Name Type Address

name1 WI WX0130 name2 WI WX0131

Figure 3-4 Defining I/O Symbolic Names Before Series 505 Modules

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-7

Defining Modules and I/O (continued)

For S5 controllers, you use only the I/O Symbolic Name Table, and not the
Module Definition Table, so it is a one-step process to link the symbolic
name to the physical address of your I/O points. See Figure 3-5.

APT Program
1
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table Unit Level Unit Level
Unit 1 Unit 2
Name Type Address
name0 WI %PW128 I/O Symbolic Name Table I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address Name Type Address

name1 WI %PW130 name2 WI %PW132

Definition Sequence
1. Enter I/O name, I/O type, and I/O address in I/O Symbolic Name Table(s) at appropriate level(s).
Result: I/O address appears in I/O Symbolic Name Table with corresponding name and address at appropriate level.

Result
Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table Unit Level Unit Level
Unit 1 Unit 2
Name Type Address
name0 WI %PW128 I/O Symbolic Name Table I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address Name Type Address

name1 WI %PW130 name2 WI %PW132

Figure 3-5 Defining I/O Symbolic Names for S5 Controllers

3-8 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Defining I/O The I/O Symbolic Name Table identifies all I/O symbolic names in an APT
Symbolic Names program. These names may or may not be associated with an actual
physical I/O point. For S5 controllers, you can test your program when your
I/O is not physically connected by selecting Image Register: (X) in the I/O
Symbolic Name Table. Series 505 controllers get the image register
automatically.

Table 3-1 lists the I/O code for each I/O type available in APT for Series 505
controllers. Table 3-2 lists the I/O code for each I/O type available in APT for
S5 controllers. Some types of I/O require additional information such as
high and low ranges, or offer options such as filtering and square root. Each
I/O type is described in detail in Chapter 5, which also shows the form that
you use to define each type.

Table 3-1 I/O Symbolic Name Types for Series 505 Controllers

Type of I/O Point Code Value Type Modules Supported Page Reference
4AI, 8AI, 4AI4O, 6AI2O,
Analog Input AI Real 1 5-6
8AI4O, 16AI, 2AI40
2AO, 4AO, 8AO, 4AI4O,
Analog Output AO Integer 5-11
6AI2O, 8AI4O, 2AI4O
Binary-coded Decimal Input BI Integer 8WI 5-20
Binary-coded Decimal Output BO Integer 8WO, 8WOSF 5-22
Digital Flag DF Boolean 8DO, 16DO, 32DO 5-14
Digital Input DI Boolean 8DI, 16DI, 32DI 5-16
Digital Output DO Boolean 8DO, 16DO, 32DO 5-17
Resistance Temperature
RT Real 1 RT 5-24
Detector
Thermocouple TC Real 1 TC 5-27
Word Input WI Integer 8WI, 16WI 5-18
Word Output WO Integer 8WO, 16WO, 8WOSF 5-19
1 These values appear in integer form for 560/560T controllers.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-9

Defining Modules and I/O (continued)

Table 3-2 lists the code for each I/O type available in APT for S5 controllers.

Table 3-2 I/O Symbolic Name Types for S5 Controllers

Page
Type of I/O Point Code Value Type Modules Supported 1
Reference
Analog Input AI Real 460, 465, 466 (not 463) 5-6
Analog Output AO Integer 470 5-11
Binary-coded Decimal Input BI Integer 420, 430, 431, 432, 434, 435, 436 5-20
Binary-coded Decimal Output BO Integer 420, 430, 431, 432, 434, 435, 436 5-22
441, 451, 453, 454, 456, 457, 458,
Digital Flag 2 DF Boolean 5-14
482, 498
Digital Input DI Boolean 420, 430, 431, 432, 434, 435, 436 5-16
441, 451, 453, 454, 456, 457, 458,
Digital Output DO Boolean 5-17
482, 498
Word Input WI Integer 420, 430, 431, 432, 434, 435, 436 5-18
441, 451, 453, 454, 456, 457, 458,
Word Output WO Integer 5-19
482, 498
1 Listed are the part numbers for the modules supported. The prefix to all of the part numbers is 6ES5.
2 An APT digital flag includes several interrelated logical statements that control an external bit. It is
different from an S5 flag.

3-10 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Defining Modules For Series 505 controllers, you use the Module Definition Table to identify
for Series 505 all I/O modules that you use in your control system. Table 3-3 lists the code
for each module type along with the associated I/O types and other
requirements. Each Series 505 module type is described in detail in
Chapter 4, which also shows the form that you use in identifying the
physical address for the I/O points in your system.

Table 3-3 Module Types for Series 505 Controllers

I/O No. I/O Memory I/O Name No. Slots Page

Module Code
Series Points Type Type Required✝ Reference
Standard Modules
500 2AO 2 WY AO -- 4-9
2 Ch Analog Output
2-Ch.
505 2AO 2 WY AO -- 4-10
4-Ch. Analog Input 500 4AI 4 WX AI -- 4-11
4-Ch. Analog Output 505 4AO 4 WY AO -- 4-12
4-Ch. AI/4-Ch. AO 505 4AI4O 4 WY AI
-- 4-13
4 WY AO

6-Ch. AI/2-Ch. AO 505 6AI20 6 WX AI

-- 4-14
2 WY AO

8-Ch. AI/4-Ch. AO 505 8AI4O 12 WX AI

-- 4-15
4 WY AO
500 8AI 8 WX AI -- 4-16
8 Ch Analog Input
8-Ch.
505 8AI 8 WX AI -- 4-17
500 8AO 8 WY AO -- 4-18
8 Ch Analog Output
8-Ch.
505 8AO 8 WY AO -- 4-19
500 8WI 8 WX WI -- 4-20
Parallel Word Input
p 505 8WI 8 WX WI -- 4-21
505 16WI 16 WX WI -- 4-22
500 8WO 8 WY WO -- 4-23
Parallel Word Output
p 505 8WO 8 WY WO -- 4-24
505 16WO 16 WY WO -- 4-25
Parallel Word Out (SF) 505 8WOSF 8 WY WO -- 4-26
500 8DI 8 X DI * 4-27
8 Ch Discrete Input
8-Ch.
505 8DI 8 X DI * 4-28
500 8DO 8 Y DO * 4-29
8 Ch Discrete Output
8-Ch.
505 8DO 8 Y DO * 4-30
16-Ch. Analog Input 505 16AI 16 WX AI -- 4-31
16-Ch. Discrete Input 505 16DI 16 X DI * 4-32
16-Ch. Discrete Output 505 16DO 16 Y DO * 4-33
20-Ch. AI/4-Ch. AO 505 2AI4O 20 WX AI
-- 4-34
4 WY AO
✝ The slot width for all modules is user configurable.
* These modules require one or two slots, depending upon the voltage.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-11

Defining Modules and I/O (continued)

Table 3-3 Module Types for Series 505 Controllers (continued)

I/O No. I/O Memory I/O Name No. Slots Page

Module Code
Series Points Type Type Required✝ Reference
Standard Modules
500 32DI 32 X DI * 4-35
32 Ch Discrete Input
32-Ch.
505 32DI 32 X DI * 4-36
500 32DO 32 Y DO * 4-37
32 Ch Discrete Output
32-Ch.
505 32DO 32 Y DO * 4-38
Smartslice 505 SLICE 16 X DI
-- 4-39
8 Y DO

User Defined Modules 500 USER

0--64 X,Y** DI
-- 4-40
0--64 WX, WY** DO

User Defined Modules 505 USER

0--64 X,Y** WI
-- 4-42
0--64 WX,WY** WO

Interrupt Module 505 INTRP

24 X DI
-- 4-44
8 Y DO
Intelligent Modules

ASCII Message Output 500 ASCII

7 WX WI
-- 4-46
1 WY WO

500 BASIC
4 WX WI
-- 4-48
4 WY WO
Programmable BASIC
505 BASIC
4 WX WI
-- 4-49
4 WY WO

Dual Comm. Port 500 DCOMM

7 WX WI
-- 4-50
1 WY WO
8 WY WO
High-Speed Pulse Input 500 HSPI 5 WX WI -- 4-52
3 Y DO

High-Speed Counter 505 HSC

3 WX WI
-- 4-54
5 WO WO
500 NIM 8 Y DO -- 4-55
TIWAY Interface
505 NIM 8 Y DO -- 4-56
500 PLINK
3 WX WI
-- 4-57
5 WY WO
Peerlink
505 PLINK
3 WX WI
-- 4-59
5 WY WO
500 RTD 16 WX RT -- 4-61
RTD 505 8RTD 8 WX RT -- 4-62
505 16RTD 16 WX RT -- 4-62
Servo Axis 500 SERVO
4 WX WI
-- 4-63
4 WY WO
500 TC 8 WX TC -- 4-64
Thermocouple
505 TC 8 WX TC -- 4-65
✝ The slot width for all modules is user configurable.
* These modules require one or two slots, depending upon the voltage.
** Total count must be less than or equal to 64 locations. The mix must be I/O symbolic names.

3-12 I/O and Module Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 3-3 Module Types for Series 505 Controllers (continued)

I/O No. I/O Memory I/O Name No. Slots Page

Module Code
Series Points Type Type Required✝ Reference
Intelligent Modules (continued)

386/ATM Coprocessor 505 ATM

4 WX WI
-- 4-66
4 WY WO
Expert Solutions 4 WX WI
500 ESP -- 4-67
Processor 4 WY WO

500 TURBO
4 WX WI
-- 4-68
4 WY WO
TurboMold
505 TURBO
4 WX WI
-- 4-69
4 WY WO

High-Speed PID Ctrl. 500 HSPID

4 WX WI
-- 4-70
4 WY WO

110 VAC Redun. Out. 500 110VO

3 X DI
-- 4-71
5 Y DO

110 VAC Rapid Resp. 500 110VR

2 X DI
-- 4-72
6 Y DO

120 VDC Rapid Resp. 500 120VR

2 X DI
-- 4-73
4 Y DO

24 VDC Rapid Resp. 500 24VDC

2 X DI
-- 4-74
6 Y DO
FIM
505 SREG
10 WX WI
-- 4-76
(SIMOREG Mode) 10 WY WO
FIM 16 X DI
(SIMOREG Broadcast 505 SREGB 16 Y DO -- 4-78
Mode) 10 WY WO
FIM
505 SVRT
4 WX WI
-- 4-80
(SIMOVERT Mode) 4 WY WO
FIM 16 X DI
(SIMOVERT Broadcast 505 SVRTB 16 Y DO -- 4-82
Mode) 4 WY WO
Communications 4 WX WI
505 H1 -- 4-84
Processor 4 WY WO
16 X DI
High Density Advanced 16 Y DO
505 16AF
32 -- 4-85
Function WX WI
32 WY WO
Ethernet TCP/IP 2 WX WI
505 ENET -- 4-87
Adaptor 6 WY WO
High Speed Counter 18 WX WI
505 HSCE -- 4-88
Encoder 14 WY WO
Program Port 2 WX WI
505 PPEXP -- 4-90
Expander 6 WY WO
✝ The slot width for all modules is user configurable.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O and Module Definitions 3-13

 Chapter 4
Series 500/505 Modules
4.1 Module Definition Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Assigning Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Assigning I/O Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.2 Standard Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2-Channel Analog Output (Series 500: 2AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
2-Channel Analog Output (Series 505:2AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-Channel Analog Input (Series 500: 4AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 4AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 4AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
6-Channel Analog Input/2-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 6AI2O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
8-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 8AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
8-Channel Analog Input (Series 500: 8AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
8-Channel Analog Input (Series 505: 8AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
8-Channel Analog Output (Series 500: 8AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
8-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 8AO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Parallel Word Input (Series 500: 8WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Parallel Word Input (Series 505: 8WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Parallel Word Input (Series 505: 16WI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Parallel Word Output (Series 500: 8WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Parallel Word Output (Series 505: 8WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Parallel Word Output (Series 505: 16WO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Parallel Word Output SF (Series 505: 8WOSF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
8-Channel Discrete Input (Series 500: 8DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
8-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 8DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
8-Channel Discrete Output (Series 500: 8DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
8-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 8DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
16-Channel Analog Input (Series 505: 16AI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
16-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 16DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
16-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 16DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
20-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (Series 505: 2AI4O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
32-Channel Discrete Input (Series 500: 32DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
32-Channel Discrete Input (Series 505: 32DI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
32-Channel Discrete Output (Series 500: 32DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
32-Channel Discrete Output (Series 505: 32DO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Smartslice (Series 505: SLICE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
User-Defined Module (Series 500: USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
User-Defined Module (Series 505: USER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Isolated Interrupt Discrete Input Module (Series 505: INTRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-1

4.3 Intelligent Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
ASCII Message Output (Series 500: ASCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Programmable BASIC (Series 500:BASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Programmable BASIC (Series 505: BASIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Dual Comm Port (Series 500: DCOMM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
High Speed Pulse Input (Series 500: HSPI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
High Speed Counter/Encoder (Series 505: HSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
Network Interface/ TIWAY (Series 500: NIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
Network Interface/ TIWAY (Series 505: NIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56
Peerlink (Series 500: PLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57
Peerlink (Series 505: PLINK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59
Resistance Temperature Detector (Series 500: RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61
Resistance Temperature Detector (Series 505: 8RTD or 16RTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62
Servo Axis (Series 500: SERVO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
Thermocouple (Series 500: TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Thermocouple (Series 505: TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
386/ATM Coprocessor (Series 505: ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
Expert Solutions Processor (Series 500: ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67
TurboMold (Series 500: TURBO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
TurboMold (Series 505: TURBO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
High Speed PID Controller (Series 500: HSPID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70
110 VAC Redundant Output (Series 500: 110VO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
110 VAC Rapid Response (Series 500: 110VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
120 VDC Rapid Response (Series 500: 120VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73
24 VDC Rapid Response (Series 500: 24VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
Field Interface SIMOREG Mode (Series 505:SREG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Field Interface SIMOREG Broadcast Mode (Series 505:SREGB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78
Field Interface SIMOVERT Mode (Series 505:SVRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
Field Interface SIMOVERT Broadcast Mode (Series 505:SVRTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
Communications Processor (Series 505: H1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
High Density Advanced Function (Series 505: 16AF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85
Ethernet TCP/IP Adapter (Series 505: ENET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
High Speed Counter Encoder (Series 505: HSCE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
Program Port Expander (Series 505: PPEXP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90

4-2 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

4.1 Module Definition Procedure

Overview The APT Module Definition Utility lets you configure the wiring of the
controller hardware to I/O points by specifying a channel, base, slot, type,
and starting address. It also lets you assign each controller address
(physical address) on that module to an I/O symbolic name.

Availability The APT Module Definition Utility is available for Series 500 I/O and
Series 505 I/O only. It is not available for S5 I/O.

Each I/O point can be associated with only one controller address, but all
points do not have to have a symbolic name. Once you have defined a
symbolic name and assigned it an address, you can refer to that I/O point by
either its symbolic name or by its associated controller address. However, if
you use the physical address in your program and later move the module,
you have to change those addresses in the program.

The process of defining a module (Figure 4-1) is a two-step procedure.

 Select a channel, base, and slot, and specify a module type and starting
address.

 Assign an I/O symbolic name to each address, and specify a unit and
description if necessary.

WASH_DEM MODULE Module definition table

Module Table
Base F10 ESC I/O Series: 505
Channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Slot Type Addrs Slot Type Addrs
1 1 9 8AO 57
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 8AI 17 12
5 5 13 32DI 25
6 6 14
7 7 15
8 8 16

? CTLs OPTs ESC

Channel: 1 Base: 5 Slot: 9 F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0057
2 WY0058
3 WY0059
4 WY0060

Figure 4-1 Defining Modules

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-3

Module Definition Procedure (continued)

Assigning The first step in defining a module is to select the channel, base, and slot to
Addresses specify a module type and starting address. The input windows for this step
are illustrated in Figure 4-2. Follow the editing procedures described in the
chapter on using table definition utilities in the SIMATIC APT User Manual
to select a channel, base, and slot to specify the module type and the
starting address.

Base F10 ESC I/O Series: 505

Channel 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Slot Type Addrs Slot Type Addrs
1 1 9 8AO 57
2 2 10
3 3 11
4 4 8AI 17 12
5 5 13 32DI 25
6 6 14
7 7 15
8 8 16

Figure 4-2 Assigning an Address to a Module

4-4 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 After you select a channel, base, and slot and specify the module type, APT
shows the default starting address. The default is the next available address
that has a sufficient number of addresses for that module. If you change the
default, the address must be on an eight-point boundary (1, 9, 17, etc.) and
in the range for that channel.

! WARNING
APT assumes that the field I/O matches the configuration of the Module Table,
including slot size. A mismatch between your field I/O and your Module Table
configuration could cause unpredictable operation by the controller.
Unpredictable operation by the controller after you download an APT program
could result in death or serious injury and/or equipment damage.
Verify that the field I/O matches the APT configuration before placing the
controller in RUN mode. This verification must be done as part of any actions
carried out prior to system commissioning. The Verify operation, accessed from
the hierarchy, and the AUX functions, accessed from Debug, warn you of I/O
mismatches. Refer to the “Compiling an APT Program” and the “Debugging an
APT Program” chapters in the SIMATIC APT User Manual for more information
about these operations.

The address ranges for each channel for the 560, 560T, 565, and 565P
controllers are listed in Table 4-1.

Table 4-1 Channel Address Ranges: 560/560T/565/565P/565T

Channel Address Range Channel Address Range

1 1 -- 1024 5 4097 -- 5120
2 1025 -- 2048 6 5121 -- 6144
3 2049 -- 3072 7 6145 -- 7168
4 3073 -- 4096 8 7169 -- 8192

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-5

Module Definition Procedure (continued)

Table 4-2 lists the address ranges for Channel 1 for the 545, 545L, 555, and
575.

Table 4-2 Channel Address Ranges: 545/545L/555/575

Controller Channel Address Range

545 2048 I/O points: 2048 maximum; up to 1024 may be
(Rel. 2.1 and 1 analog or word points, which must be numbered
higher) 1--1024.
545L 1 I/O points: 1024 maximum in any mix.
555 1 I/O points: 8192 maximum in any mix.
575
(Rel. 3.0 and 1 I/O points: 8192 maximum in any mix.
higher)

After you indicate the starting address, APT automatically assigns the
remaining points in the module to the next available sequential addresses.

You can change the I/O series from Series 500 to Series 505, and vice versa.
APT reports any incompatible modules when you select this option and
prompts you about deleting them. If you select Yes, the modules are
removed from the table. If you select No, the I/O series change is aborted
and no changes are made in the channel/base status.

You can change the slot width for a module if the APT default for the
module is not correct.

Some modules are double-wide and require two I/O slots. You may be able to
save a slot in a Series 500 base by placing a double-wide module in the last
slot of the base and allowing it to extend beyond the base.

4-6 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Assigning I/O The Module Definition Sub-Editor allows you to assign I/O symbolic names
Names to each controller address. The I/O names in a module must be unique to the
program or unit. If you do not enter the name of the unit, APT assumes that
the I/O point is global and exists at the Program Content Level.

For standard modules, a form appears like the one shown in Figure 4-3.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 05 8DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0033
2 X0034
3 X0035
4 X0036
5 X0037
6 X0038
7 X0039
8 X0040

Figure 4-3 Assigning I/O Names

If you have previously defined the I/O point in the I/O Symbolic Name
Definition Table, you only need to enter the I/O name and unit (if the point
is not global). The completion aids ( ) allow you to pick a unit and I/O point
within the unit defined. When you exit from the Module Definition
Sub-Editor, APT places the description from the I/O Symbolic Name Table
into the Description field of the Module Definition Sub-Editor.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-7

Module Definition Procedure (continued)

After you enter the I/O points in the Module Definition Sub-Editor, the I/O
symbolic name and all related information are automatically inserted in the
I/O Symbolic Name Table as shown in Figure 4-4.

Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table
Program Level
Module Definition Table Name Type Address
name0 WI WX0129
Channel
Base
Slot
Unit Level
Unit 1
Pos Address I/O Name Unit
1 WX0129 name0
I/O Symbolic Name Table
2 WX0130 name1 unit1
Name Type Address
name1 WI WX0130

Figure 4-4 Getting I/O Names from Module Table

Most of the intelligent modules require two forms for configuration.

 The first form appears the first time you edit the module and allows
you to enter a default prefix for the I/O names and the unit.

 If you enter the default prefix (maximum five characters), APT

automatically creates I/O symbolic names that appear in the second
form. These default names are also inserted automatically in the I/O
Symbolic Name Table at the required unit.

4-8 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8DO Series 500

4.2 Standard Modules

2-Channel Analog The Series 500 2-Channel Analog Output (2AO) Module is a differential,
Output 12-bit digital-to-analog converter that has two user-selectable voltage
(Series 500: 2AO) ranges per channel. The ranges are bipolar (--10 to 10) and unipolar (0 to
10). Regardless of the voltage range you select, the current output from each
channel is always 0 to 20 milliamps.

Figure 4-5 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 2-Channel
Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (6 APT-reserved locations)
WY (2 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 2AO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0009
2 X0010
3 X0011
4 X0012
5 X0013
6 X0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-5 Series 500 2-Channel Analog Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-9

2AO Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

2-Channel Analog The Series 505 2-Channel Analog Output (2AO) Module is a differential,
Output 12-bit digital-to-analog converter that has two user-selectable voltage
(Series 505:2AO) ranges per channel. The ranges are bipolar (--10 to 10) and unipolar (0 to
10). Regardless of the voltage range you select, the current output from each
channel is always 0 to 20 milliamps.

Figure 4-6 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 2-Channel
Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (2 consecutive locations)
WY (6 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 2AO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0009
2 WY0010
3 WY0011
4 WY0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-6 Series 505 2-Channel Analog Output Module

4-10 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 4AI Series 500

4-Channel Analog The Series 500 4-Channel Analog Input (4AI) Module is a differential, 12-bit
Input analog-to-digital converter that accepts bipolar (--10 to 10 or --5 to 5 volts) or
(Series 500: 4AI) unipolar (0 to 10 or 0 to 5 volts) signals and converts them to the equivalent
integer representation for the controller. The data sheet for the module
contains details of the electrical characteristics of the module.

Figure 4-7 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 4-Channel
Analog Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
Y (4 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 4AI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001
2 WX0002
3 WX0003
4 WX0004
5 Y0005
6 Y0006
7 Y0007
8 Y0008

Figure 4-7 Series 500 4-Channel Analog Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-11

4AO Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

4-Channel Analog The Series 505 4-Channel Analog Output (4AO) Module is a differential,
Output 12-bit digital-to-analog converter that has four user-selectable voltage
(Series 505: 4AO) ranges per channel. The ranges are bipolar (--10 to 10) and unipolar (0 to
10). Regardless of the voltage range you select, the current output from each
channel is always 0 to 20 milliamps.

Figure 4-8 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 4-Channel
Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 4AO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0009
2 WY0010
3 WY0011
4 WY0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-8 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Output Module

4-12 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 4AI4O Series 505

4-Channel Analog The Series 505 4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (4AI4O)
Input/4-Channel Module combines 12-bit analog-to-digital converters and 12-bit
Analog Output digital-to-analog converters into one unit. Refer to the user manual for this
(Series 505: 4AI4O) module for details about the electrical characteristics of this module.

Figure 4-9 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 4-Channel
Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)
AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 4AI4O ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-9 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel

Analog Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-13

6AI2O Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

6-Channel Analog The Series 505 6-Channel Analog Input/2-Channel Analog Output (6AI2O)
Input/2-Channel Module combines 12-bit analog-to-digital converters and 12-bit
Analog Output digital-to-analog converters into one unit. Refer to the user manual for this
(Series 505: 6AI2O) module for details about the electrical characteristics of this module.

Figure 4-10 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 6-Channel
Analog Input/2-Channel Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (6 consecutive locations)
WY (2 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)
AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 6AI2O ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WX0013
6 WX0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-10 Series 505 6-Channel Analog Input/2-Channel

Analog Output Module

4-14 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8AI4O Series 505

8-Channel Analog The Series 505 8-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (8AI4O)
Input/4-Channel Module combines 12-bit analog-to-digital converters and 12-bit
Analog Output digital-to-analog converters into one unit. Refer to the user manual for this
(Series 505: 8AI4O) module for details about the electrical characteristics of this module.

Figure 4-11 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 8-Channel
Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (12 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)
AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 8AI4O ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009 Input 1
2 WX0010 Input 2
3 WX0011 Input 3
4 WX0012 Input 4
5 WX0013 Input 5
6 WX0014 Input 6
7 WX0015 Input 7
8 WX0016 Input 8
9 WX0017 Output 1 Feedback
10 WX0018 Output 2 Feedback
11 WX0019 Output 3 Feedback
12 WX0020 Output 4 Feedback
13 WY0021 Output 1
14 WY0022 Output 2
15 WY0023 Output 3
16 WY0024 Output 4

Figure 4-11 Series 505 4-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel

Analog Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-15

8AI Series 500

Standard Modules (continued)

8-Channel The Series 500 8-Channel Analog Input (8AI) Module is a single-ended,
Analog Input 12-bit analog-to-digital converter. The module accepts eight analog inputs.
(Series 500: 8AI) You can select current or voltage at the terminal strip on the module. The
voltage input range is --5 to +5 volts; the current input range is 0 to 20
milliamps (across a 250-ohm resistor). The user manual for the module
contains more details.

Figure 4-12 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 8-Channel
Analog Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 03 8AI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0017
2 WX0018
3 WX0019
4 WX0020
5 WX0021
6 WX0022
7 WX0023
8 WX0024

Figure 4-12 Series 500 8-Channel Analog Input Module

4-16 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8AI Series 505

8-Channel The Series 505 8-Channel Analog Input (8AI) Module is a single-ended,
Analog Input 12-bit analog-to-digital converter. The module accepts eight analog inputs.
(Series 505: 8AI) You can select current or voltage at the terminal strip on the module. The
voltage input range is --5 to +5 volts; the current input range is 0 to 20
milliamps (across a 250-ohm resistor). The user manual for the module
contains more details.

Figure 4-13 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 8-Channel
Analog Input Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 03 8AI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0017
2 WX0018
3 WX0019
4 WX0020
5 WX0021
6 WX0022
7 WX0023
8 WX0024

Figure 4-13 Series 505 8-Channel Analog Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-17

8AO Series 500

Standard Modules (continued)

8-Channel The Series 500 8-Channel Analog Output (8AO) Module is a single-ended,
Analog Output 12-bit digital-to-analog converter. The output from the module is
(Series 500: 8AO) simultaneously available as a voltage (0 to 10 volts) and as a current (0 to
20 milliamps). Both outputs are on the terminal strip for each channel. The
user manual for the module contains more details.

Figure 4-14 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 8-Channel
Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 04 8AO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0025
2 WY0026
3 WY0027
4 WY0028
5 WY0029
6 WY0030
7 WY0031
8 WY0032

Figure 4-14 Series 500 8-Channel Analog Output Module

4-18 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8AO Series 505

8-Channel The Series 505 8-Channel Analog Output (8AO) Module is a single-ended,
Analog Output 12-bit digital-to-analog converter. The output from the module is
(Series 505: 8AO) simultaneously available as a voltage (0 to 10 volts) and as a current (0 to
20 milliamps). Both outputs are on the terminal strip for each channel. The
user manual for the module contains more details.

Figure 4-15 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 8-Channel
Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 04 8AO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0025
2 WY0026
3 WY0027
4 WY0028
5 WY0029
6 WY0030
7 WY0031
8 WY0032

Figure 4-15 Series 505 8-Channel Analog Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-19

8WI Series 500

Standard Modules (continued)

Parallel Word Input The Series 500 Parallel Word Input (8WI) Module is an eight-channel
(Series 500: 8WI) (multiplexed) module that accepts the following types of input signals.

 TTL

 CMOS

 Up to 28 volts DC

Each channel provides a 16-bit data word that is available as a WX memory

location. BCD (binary-coded decimal) thumbwheel switches are commonly
connected to a Parallel Word Input Module.

Figure 4-16 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 Parallel
Word Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)*

* WI is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal input (BI) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 09 8WI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0113
2 WX0114
3 WX0115
4 WX0116
5 WX0117
6 WX0118
7 WX0119
8 WX0120

Figure 4-16 Series 500 8-Channel Parallel Word Input Module

4-20 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8WI Series 505

Parallel Word Input The Series 505 Parallel Word Input (8WI) Module is an eight-channel
(Series 505: 8WI) (multiplexed) module that accepts the following types of input signals.

 TTL

 CMOS

 Up to 28 volts DC

Each channel provides a 16-bit data word that is available as a WX memory

location. BCD (binary-coded decimal) thumbwheel switches are commonly
connected to a Parallel Word Input Module.

Figure 4-17 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 Parallel
Word Input Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)*

* WI is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal input (BI) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 09 8WI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0113
2 WX0114
3 WX0115
4 WX0116
5 WX0117
6 WX0118
7 WX0119
8 WX0120

Figure 4-17 Series 505 8-Channel Parallel Word Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-21

16WI Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

Parallel Word Input The Series 505-Compatible Parallel Word Input (16WI) Module is a
(Series 505: 16WI) 16-channel (multiplexed) input module. Each channel provides a 16-bit data
word that is available as a WX memory location.

Figure 4-18 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505-compatible
16-point parallel word input module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)*

* WI is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal input (BI) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 09 16WI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0113
2 WX0114
3 WX0115
4 WX0116
5 WX0117
6 WX0118
7 WX0119
8 WX0120
9 WX0121
10 WX0122
11 WX0123
12 WX0124
13 WX0125
14 WX0126
15 WX0127
16 WX0128

Figure 4-18 Series 505-Compatible 16-Channel Parallel Word Input Module

4-22 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8WO Series 500

Parallel Word The Series 500 Parallel Word Output (8WO) Module is an eight-channel
Output (multiplexed) module that outputs TTL or CMOS signals. Each channel
(Series 500: 8WO) provides a 16-bit data word that is available as a WY memory location. A
BCD (binary-coded decimal) display is commonly connected to a Parallel
Word Output Module.

Figure 4-19 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 Parallel
Word Output Module, which has the following configuration requirements.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WO (word output)*

* WO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal output (BO) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 10 8WO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0121
2 WY0122
3 WY0123
4 WY0124
5 WY0125
6 WY0126
7 WY0127
8 WY0128

Figure 4-19 Series 500 8-Channel Parallel Word Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-23

8WO Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

Parallel Word The Series 505 Parallel Word Output (8WO) Module is an eight-channel
Output (multiplexed) module that outputs TTL or CMOS signals. Each channel
(Series 505: 8WO) provides a 16-bit data word that is available as a WY memory location. A
BCD (binary-coded decimal) display is commonly connected to a Parallel
Word Output Module.

Figure 4-20 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 Parallel
Word Output Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WO (word output)*

* WO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal output (BO) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 10 8WO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0121
2 WY0122
3 WY0123
4 WY0124
5 WY0125
6 WY0126
7 WY0127
8 WY0128

Figure 4-20 Series 505 8-Channel Parallel Word Output Module

4-24 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 16WO Series 505

Parallel Word The Series 505-Compatible Parallel Word Output (16WO) Module is a
Output 16-channel (multiplexed) output module. Each channel provides a 16-bit
(Series 505: 16WO) data word that is available as a WY memory location.

Figure 4-21 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505-compatible
parallel word output module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WO (word output)*

* WO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal output (BO) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 09 16WO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0113
2 WY0114
3 WY0115
4 WY0116
5 WY0117
6 WY0118
7 WY0119
8 WY0120
9 WY0121
10 WY0122
11 WY0123
12 WY0124
13 WY0125
14 WY0126
15 WY0127
16 WY0128

Figure 4-21 Series 505-Compatible 16-Channel Parallel Word Output

Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-25

8WOSF Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

Parallel Word The Series 505-Compatible Parallel Word Output (8WOSF) Special
Output SF Function (SF) Module operates similarly to the Parallel Word Output (8WO)
(Series 505: Module. However, the controller interacts with an 8WOSF module as if it
8WOSF) were an intelligent (SF) module. The 8WOSF module is an eight-channel
(multiplexed) module that outputs TTL or CMOS signals. Each channel
provides a 16-bit data word that is available as a WY memory location. A
BCD (binary-coded decimal) display is commonly connected to a Parallel
Word Output SF Module.

Figure 4-22 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505-Compatible
Parallel Word Output Module.

Slots required: 2 (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WO (word output)*

* WO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a binary-coded decimal output (BO) in
the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 10 8WOSF ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0121
2 WY0122
3 WY0123
4 WY0124
5 WY0125
6 WY0126
7 WY0127
8 WY0128

Figure 4-22 Series 505-Compatible 8-Channel Parallel Word Output SF

Module

4-26 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8DI Series 500

8-Channel The Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Input (8DI) Module accepts eight
Discrete Input discrete inputs, which may come from field devices such as push buttons or
(Series 500: 8DI) limit switches.

Figure 4-23 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 8-Channel
Discrete Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 05 8DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0033
2 X0034
3 X0035
4 X0036
5 X0037
6 X0038
7 X0039
8 X0040

Figure 4-23 Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-27

8DI Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

8-Channel The Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Input (8DI) Module accepts eight
Discrete Input discrete inputs, which may come from field devices such as push buttons or
(Series 505: 8DI) limit switches.

Figure 4-24 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 8-Channel
Discrete Input Module, which has the following configuration requirements.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 05 8DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0033
2 X0034
3 X0035
4 X0036
5 X0037
6 X0038
7 X0039
8 X0040

Figure 4-24 Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Input Module

4-28 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 8DO Series 500

8-Channel The Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Output (8DO) Module provides eight
Discrete Output channels of discrete outputs that drive field devices such as pilot lamps,
(Series 500: 8DO) motor starters, or solenoid valves.

Figure 4-25 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 8-Channel
Discrete Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: Y (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)*

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 06 8DO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0041
2 Y0042
3 Y0043
4 Y0044
5 Y0045
6 Y0046
7 Y0047
8 Y0048

Figure 4-25 Series 500 8-Channel Discrete Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-29

8DO Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

8-Channel The Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Output (8DO) Module provides eight
Discrete Output channels of discrete outputs that drive field devices such as pilot lamps,
(Series 505: 8DO) motor starters, or solenoid valves.

Figure 4-26 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 8-Channel
Discrete Output Module.

Slots required: 1 or 2; depends on the output voltage

(user-configurable)
Address type: Y (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)*

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 06 8DO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0041
2 Y0042
3 Y0043
4 Y0044
5 Y0045
6 Y0046
7 Y0047
8 Y0048

Figure 4-26 Series 505 8-Channel Discrete Output Module

4-30 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 16AI Series 505

16-Channel Analog The Series 505 16-Channel Analog Input (16AI) Module is a 16-channel
Input analog-to-digital converter. In unipolar mode, the module’s voltage input
(Series 505: 16AI) range is 0 to 5 VDC, or 0 to 10 VDC. Its current input range is 0 to 20 mA.
In bipolar mode, the module’s voltage input range is --5 to +5 VDC, or --10 to
+10 VDC. Its current input range is --20 to +20 mA. Please refer to the
module’s user manual for more details concerning the operation of the
module.

Figure 4-27 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 16-Channel
Analog Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 16AI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001
2 WX0002
3 WX0003
4 WX0004
5 WX0005
6 WX0006
7 WX0007
8 WX0008
9 WX0009
10 WX0010
11 WX0011
12 WX0012
13 WX0013
14 WX0014
15 WX0015
16 WX0016

Figure 4-27 Series 505 High Density Analog Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-31

16DI Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

16-Channel The Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Input (16DI) Module accepts sixteen
Discrete Input discrete inputs, which may come from field devices such as push buttons or
(Series 505: 16DI) limit switches.

Figure 4-28 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 16-Channel
Discrete Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 16DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0009
2 X0010
3 X0011
4 X0012
5 X0013
6 X0014
7 X0015
8 X0016
9 X0017
10 X0018
11 X0019
12 X0020
13 X0021
14 X0022
15 X0023
16 X0024

Figure 4-28 Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Input Module

4-32 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 16DO Series 505

16-Channel The Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Output (16DO) Module provides sixteen
Discrete Output channels of discrete outputs that drive field devices such as pilot lamps,
(Series 505: 16DO) motor starters, or solenoid valves.

Figure 4-29 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 16-Channel
Discrete Output Module.

Slots required: 1 or 2; depends on the output voltage

(user-configurable)
Address type: Y (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 16DO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0009
2 Y0010
3 Y0011
4 Y0012
5 Y0013
6 Y0014
7 Y0015
8 Y0016
9 Y0017
10 Y0018
11 Y0019
12 Y0020
13 Y0021
14 Y0022
15 Y0023
16 Y0024

Figure 4-29 Series 505 16-Channel Discrete Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-33

2AI4O Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

20-Channel Analog The Series 505 20-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output (2AI4O)
Input/ Module combines 12-bit analog-to-digital converters and 12-bit
4-Channel Analog digital-to-analog converters into one unit. Refer to the module’s user manual
Output for details on its electrical characteristics.
(Series 505: 2AI4O)
Figure 4-30 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 20-Channel
Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (20 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: AI (analog input)
AO (analog output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 2AI4O ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001 Input 1
2 WX0002 Input 2
3 WX0003 Input 3
4 WX0004 Input 4
5 WX0005 Input 5
6 WX0006 Input 6
7 WX0007 Input 7
8 WX0008 Input 8
9 WX0009 Input 1 Error Word
10 WX0010 Input 2 Error Word
11 WX0011 Input 3 Error Word
12 WX0012 Input 4 Error Word
13 WX0013 Input 5 Error Word
14 WX0014 Input 6 Error Word
15 WX0015 Input 7 Error Word
16 WX0016 Input 8 Error Word
17 WX0017 Output 1 Feedback
18 WX0018 Output 2 Feedback
19 WX0019 Output 3 Feedback
20 WX0020 Output 4 Feedback
21 WY0021 Output 1
22 WY0022 Output 2
23 WY0023 Output 3
24 WY0024 Output 4

Figure 4-30 Series 505 20-Channel Analog Input/4-Channel Analog Output

Module

4-34 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 32DI Series 500

32-Channel The Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input (32DI) Module
Discrete Input accepts 32 channels of discrete inputs from field devices such as push
(Series 500: 32DI) buttons or limit switches.

Figure 4-31 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 32-Channel
High Density Discrete Input Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (32 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 07 32DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0049
2 X0050
3 X0051
4 X0052
5 X0053
6 X0054
7 X0055
8 X0056
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
29 X0077
30 X0078
31 X0079
32 X0080

Figure 4-31 Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-35

32DI Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

32-Channel The Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input (32DI) Module
Discrete Input accepts 32 channels of discrete inputs from field devices such as push
(Series 505: 32DI) buttons or limit switches.

Figure 4-32 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 32-Channel
High Density Discrete Input Module.

Slots required: 1 or 2; depends on the output voltage

(user-configurable)
Address type: X (32 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 07 32DI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0049
2 X0050
3 X0051
4 X0052
5 X0053
6 X0054
7 X0055
8 X0056
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
29 X0077
30 X0078
31 X0079
32 X0080

Figure 4-32 Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Input Module

4-36 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 32DO Series 500

32-Channel The Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output (32DO) Module
Discrete Output provides 32 channels of discrete outputs that control the operation of
(Series 500: 32DO) equipment such as solenoid valves or motor starters.

Figure 4-33 shows the form that you use to define a Series 500 32-Channel
High Density Discrete Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: Y (32 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)*

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 08 32DO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0081
2 Y0082
3 Y0083
4 Y0084
5 Y0085
6 Y0086
7 Y0087
8 Y0088
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
29 Y0109
30 Y0110
31 Y0111
32 Y0112

Figure 4-33 Series 500 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-37

32DO Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

32-Channel The Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output (32DO) Module
Discrete Output provides 32 channels of discrete outputs that control the operation of
(Series 505: 32DO) equipment such as solenoid valves or motor starters.

Figure 4-34 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 32-Channel
High Density Discrete Output Module.

Slots required: 1 or 2; depends on the output voltage

(user-configurable)
Address type: Y (32 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)*

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 08 32DO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0081
2 Y0082
3 Y0083
4 Y0084
5 Y0085
6 Y0086
7 Y0087
8 Y0088
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
29 Y0109
30 Y0110
31 Y0111
32 Y0112

Figure 4-34 Series 505 32-Channel High Density Discrete Output Module

4-38 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SLICE Series 505

Smartslice The Series 505 Smartslice (SLICE) Module is a self-contained block of I/O
(Series 505: SLICE) that can be located at a remote distance from the base.

Figure 4-35 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 Smartslice
Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (16 consecutive locations)
Y (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 SLICE ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0009
2 X0010
3 X0011
4 X0012
5 X0013
6 X0014
7 X0015
8 X0016
9 X0017
10 X0018
11 X0019 (not used)
12 X0020 (not used)
13 X0021 (not used)
14 X0022 (not used)
15 X0023 (not used)
16 X0024 (not used)
17 Y0025
18 Y0026
19 Y0027
20 Y0028
21 Y0029
22 Y0030
23 Y0031 (not used)
24 Y0032 (not used)

Figure 4-35 Series 505 Smartslice Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-39

USER Series 500

Standard Modules (continued)

User-Defined The Series 500 User (USER) Module is a user-definable module that is not
Module associated with any specific hardware module. Use this module if your
(Series 500: USER) module does not fit any of the other modules supported by APT.

The User Module allows you to select the mix of X, Y, WX and WY locations
for your specific module needs. If your module is a special function module,
select the SF option in the form. The User Module cannot be reconfigured.
In order to change the configuration, you must first delete the module and
then add a new one. You will have to reconnect the associated I/O points.

Normal I/O and Special Function Modules have eight I/O points.
Configurations of a single I/O type are allowed, but modules of that
configuration are already supported by APT. The configuration can be in
any combination of an input and an output type (X/Y, X/WY, WX/Y, WX/WY),
except that the configuration of 5 X and 3 Y is not supported.

High Density Modules are those that have more than eight I/O points and
are limited by APT to 64 I/O points. The configuration for the I/O points
must follow these rules.

 Discrete I/O points (X and Y) are allowed on eight-point boundaries.

The following values are supported: 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, and 64.

 Word I/O points (WX and WY) are allowed on boundaries that are
multiples of two. The following values are supported: 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 32, and 64.

 Unlike Normal I/O and Special Function Modules, High Density

Modules allow any of the four I/O types to be combined.

4-40 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 USER Series 500

Figure 4-36 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 User
Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (user-configurable)
Y (user-configurable)
WX (user-configurable)
WY (user-configurable)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)
WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Build User-Defined Module ? ESC

F1

Number of X: [ ]
Number of Y: [ ]
Number of WX: [4]
Number of WY: [4]
Special Function: [ ]
OKAY
Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 USER ? CTLs OPTs ESC
F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-36 Series 500 User Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-41

USER Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

User-Defined The Series 505 User (USER) Module is a user-definable module that is not
Module associated with any specific hardware module. Use this module if your
(Series 505: USER) module does not fit any of the APT supported modules.

The User Module allows you to select the mix of X, Y, WX and WY locations
for your specific module needs. If your module is a special function module,
select the SF option in the form. The User Module cannot be reconfigured.
In order to change the configuration, first delete the module and then add a
new one. You will have to reconnect the associated I/O points.

Normal I/O and Special Function Modules have eight I/O points.
Configurations of a single I/O type are allowed, but modules of that
configuration are already supported by APT. The configuration can be in
any combination of an input and an output type (X/Y, X/WY, WX/Y, WX/WY),
except that the configuration of 5 X and 3 Y is not supported.

High Density Modules are those that have more than eight I/O points and
are limited by APT to 64 I/O points. The configuration for the I/O points
must follow these rules.

 Discrete I/O points (X and Y) are allowed on eight-point boundaries.

The following values are supported: 0, 8, 16, 24, 32, and 64.

 Word I/O points (WX and WY) are allowed on boundaries that are
multiples of two. The following values are supported: 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10,
12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 32, and 64.

 Unlike Normal I/O and Special Function Modules, High Density

Modules allow any of the four I/O types to be combined.

NOTE: If you are using the User Module to define a rack of I/O, for
instance, the ET200, you do not have to use all the types of I/O available for
the User Module. However, when you physically wire your I/O rack, you
must follow the order expected by the User Module: that is, Xs, Ys, WXs,
and finally WYs. So if you are only using WXs and WYs in your ET200 rack,
the WXs must precede the WYs.

4-42 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 USER Series 505

Figure 4-37 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 505 User
Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (user-configurable)
Y (user-configurable)
WX (user-configurable)
WY (user-configurable)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)
WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
Build User-Defined Module F1

Number of X: [ ]
Number of Y: [ ]
Number of WX: [4]
Number of WY: [4]
Special Function: [ ] OKAY

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 USER ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-37 Series 505 User Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-43

INTRP Series 505

Standard Modules (continued)

Isolated Interrupt The Series 505 Isolated Interrupt Discrete Input (INTRP) Module can be
Discrete Input configured in two ways:
Module
(Series 505: INTRP)  Sixteen isolated discrete inputs, all non-interrupts.

 Configurable mix of interrupt inputs and non-interrupt inputs. In this

mode, the module functions as a 32-point I/O module with 16 physical
inputs and 16 internal points. Points 1--8 are the non-interrupt inputs,
9--16 are the interrupt inputs, 17--24 are the internal interrupt status
inputs, and 25--32 are the internal interrupt enable bits.

In the interrupt input mode, the interrupt is first enabled (bits 25--32), and
then the status is continuously checked (bits 17--24). When an interrupt
occurs (bits 9--16), it triggers an immediate response without having to wait
for the controller to complete its current program scan. The controller
executes the interrupt code and continues with its normal execution (unless
the interrupt code specifies that it remain halted).

When used for 16 discrete inputs, the interrupt module can be installed on a
local base or on a remote base. When used for interrupts, the interrupt
module must be installed on the local base. For this reason, you cannot use
the INTRP module with 560, 565, and 575 controllers.

4-44 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 INTRP Series 505

Figure 4-38 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 505 Interrupt
Module.

Slots required: 1
Address type: X 24 consecutive locations
Y 8 consecutive locations
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)*

* DO is the default I/O type, but you can change this to a digital flag (DF) in the I/O Symbolic
Name Table.

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 INTRP ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0033 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
2 X0034 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
3 X0035 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
4 X0036 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
5 X0037 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
6 X0038 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
7 X0039 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
8 X0040 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
9 X0041 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
10 X0042 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
11 X0043 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
12 X0044 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
13 X0045 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
14 X0046 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
15 X0047 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
16 X0048 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
17 X0049 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
18 X0050 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
19 X0051 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
20 X0052 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
21 X0053 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
22 X0054 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
23 X0055 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
24 X0056 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
25 Y0057 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
26 Y0058 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
27 Y0059 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
28 Y0060 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
29 Y0061 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
30 Y0062 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
31 Y0063 ______ D ___________ D ______________________
32 Y0064 ______ D ___________ D ______________________

Figure 4-38 Series 505 Isolated Interrupt Discrete Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-45

ASCII Series 500

4.3 Intelligent Modules

ASCII Message The Series 500 ASCII Message Output (ASCII) Module is an intelligent I/O
Output module that lets you generate, store, and transmit messages in standard
(Series 500: ASCII) U.S. ASCII-character format. You program the module outside of the APT
environment.

There are two ways to communicate with the ASCII module.

 Whenever you program an ASCII module, you define the control relay
or digital output that initiates each function and the control relay that
signals its completion.

APT does not recognize these control relays (CRs) unless you reserve
CR memory locations in the compile control file. (See the section on
Compiling an APT Program (Chapter 6) in the SIMATIC APT User
Manual.) If you use digital outputs in your ASCII module program, you
must also configure these within APT.

 The module uses seven WX locations and one WY location. APT

appends the default prefix to the status words (e.g., xxxxx_ST1 or
xxxxx_ST2) so that you can monitor the module from a program. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual
that comes with the ASCII module.

4-46 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 ASCII Series 500

Figure 4-39 shows the extensions and forms that you use to define an ASCII
Message Output Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (7 consecutive locations)
WY (1 location)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 11 ASCII ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0129 yyy D xxxxx_ST1 D Status 1 (WI)
2 WX0130 yyy D xxxxx_ST2 D Status 2 (WI)
3 WX0131 yyy D xxxxx_P1 D Port 1 (WI)
4 WX0132 yyy D xxxxx_P2 D Port2 (WI)
5 WX0133 yyy D xxxxx_YM D Year/Month (WI)
6 WX0134 yyy D xxxxx_DH D Day/Hour (WI)
7 WX0135 yyy D xxxxx_MS D Min/Sec (WI)
8 WY0136 yyy D xxxxx_LO D Lockout bit (WO)

Figure 4-39 Series 500 ASCII Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-47

BASIC Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Programmable The Series 500 Programmable BASIC (BASIC) Module is an intelligent

BASIC module that has a BASIC operating system, on-board memory, and operator
(Series 500:BASIC) interfaces that allow information processing in parallel to the controller. You
program the module outside of the APT environment.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the I/O words. For
information about the meaning of these variables and how to program the
module, see the manual that comes with the BASIC Module.

Figure 4-40 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500
Programmable BASIC Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 BASIC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_WI1 D Word in 1 (WI)
2 WX0194 yyy D xxxxx_WI2 D Word in 2 (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_WI 3 D Word in 3 (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_WI4 D Word in 4 (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_WO5 D Word out 5 (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_WO6 D Word out 6 (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_WO7 D Word out 7 (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_WO8 D Word out 8 (WO)

Figure 4-40 Series 500 BASIC Module

4-48 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BASIC Series 505

Programmable The Series 505 Programmable BASIC (BASIC) Module is an intelligent

BASIC module that has a BASIC operating system, on-board memory, and operator
(Series 505: BASIC) interfaces that allow information processing in parallel to the controller. You
program the module outside the APT environment.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the I/O words. For
information about the meaning of these variables and how to program the
module, see the manual that comes with the BASIC Module.

Figure 4-41 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 505
Programmable BASIC Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 BASIC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_WI1 D Word in 1 (WI)
2 WX0194 yyy D xxxxx_WI2 D Word in 2 (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_WI3 D Word in 3 (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_WI4 D Word in 4 (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_WO5 D Word out 5 (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_WO6 D Word out 6 (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_WO7 D Word out 7 (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_WO8 D Word out 8 (WO)

Figure 4-41 Series 505 BASIC Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-49

DCOMM Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Dual Comm Port The Series 500 Dual Communications Port (DCOMM) Module provides two
(Series 500: independent RS-232-C/423 communications ports to the controller. It can
DCOMM) serve as a programming, monitoring, or troubleshooting tool from any
remote I/O base.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the Dual Communications Port Module.

4-50 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 DCOMM Series 500

Figure 4-42 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 Dual
Communications Port Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (7 consecutive locations)
WY (1 location)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 15 DCOMM ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0201 yyy D xxxxx_ERR D Error Status (WI)
2 WX0202 yyy D xxxxx_STW1 D Status Word 1 (WI)
3 WX0203 yyy D xxxxx_STW2 D Status Word 2 (WI)
4 WX0204 D D (not used)
5 WX0205 D D (not used)
6 WX0206 D D (not used)
7 WX0207 D D (not used)
8 WY0208 yyy D xxxxx_LO D Lockout bit (WO)

Figure 4-42 Series 500 Dual Comm Port Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-51

HSPI Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

High Speed Pulse The Series 500 High Speed Pulse Input (HSPI) Module is an intelligent
Input module that contains its own microprocessor and memory. It can make
(Series 500: HSPI) decisions based on the total count values from a field device. Typically, this
device counts pulse trains that a standard controller cannot accurately
count during its scan time.

You program the module outside the APT environment.

When you edit the Series 500 HSPI module, you must specify a counter
mode. The module supports six different modes.

 Modes 1--3 are bi-directional, up/down counters.

 Mode 4 provides rate calculations.

 Mode 5 provides ratio calculations.

 Mode 6 provides sum/difference calculations.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the High Speed Pulse Input Module.

Figure 4-43 shows the form that you use to define Counter Mode 1 of the
Series 500 High Speed Pulse Input Module.

4-52 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 HSPI Series 500

Counter Modes 2 through 6 have forms similar to the one shown in

Figure 4-43.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WY (8 consecutive locations)
WX (5 consecutive locations)
Y (3 consecutive locations
I/O symbolic name type: WO (word output)
WI (word input)
DO (discrete output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy
Counter Mode(1--6): 1

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 01 HSPI ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

COUNTER MODE: 1
(2 16-bit counters)

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WY0209 yyy D xxxxx_C1P1 D Channel 1 preset 1 (WO)

2 WY0210 yyy D xxxxx_C1P2 D Channel 1 preset 2 (WO)
3 WY0211 yyy D xxxxx_C2P3 D Channel 2 preset 3 (WO)
4 WY0212 yyy D xxxxx_C2P4 D Channel 2 preset 4 (WO)
5 WY0213 yyy D xxxxx_C1SET D Channel 1 setup (WO)
6 WY0214 D D (not used)
7 WY0215 yyy D xxxxx_C2SET D Channel 2 setup (WO)
8 WY0216 D D (not used)
9 WX0217 yyy D xxxxx_C1CT D Channel 1 count (WI)
10 WX0218 yyy D xxxxx_C2CT D Channel 2 count (WI)
11 WX0219 D D (not used)
12 WX0220 D D (not used)
13 WX0221 yyy D xxxxx_C1C2 D Channel 1 & 2 status (WI)
14 Y0222 D D (not used)
15 Y0223 D D (not used)
16 Y0224 D D (not used)

Figure 4-43 Series 500 High Speed Pulse Input Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-53

HSC Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

High Speed The Series 505 High Speed Counter/Encoder (HSC) Module is an intelligent
Counter/Encoder module that contains its own microprocessor and memory. It can make
(Series 505: HSC) decisions based on the total count values from a field device. Typically, this
device counts pulse trains that a standard controller cannot accurately
count during its scan time.

You program the module outside the APT environment.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information, see the user’s manual for the High Speed Counter and
Encoder Module.

Figure 4-44 shows the form that you use to define the Series 505 High
Speed Counter/Encoder Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (3 consecutive locations)
WY (5 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 01 HSC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0049 D xxxxx_SW D Status Word

2 WX0050 D xxxxx_C1CT D Channel 1 Count
3 WX0051 D xxxxx_C2CT D Channel 2 Count
4 WY0052 D xxxxx_SET D Module setup word
5 WY0053 D xxxxx_C1P1 D Channel 1 preset 1
6 WY0054 D xxxxx_C1P2 D Channel 1 preset 2
7 WY0055 D xxxxx_C2P1 D Channel 2 preset 1
8 WY0056 D xxxxx_C2P2 D Channel 2 preset 2

Figure 4-44 Series 505 High Speed Counter Module

4-54 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 NIM Series 500

Network Interface/ The Series 500 Network Interface/TIWAY (NIM) Module is the TIWAY I
TIWAY interface for Series 500 programmable controllers. The module provides two
(Series 500: NIM) TIWAY I communication ports.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status word. For
more information about the meaning of this variable, see the manual that
comes with the NIM Module.

Figure 4-45 shows the form that you use to define the Series 500 Network
Interface Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: Y (1 location)
Y (7 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 07 NIM ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0241 D D (not used)
2 Y0242 D D (not used)
3 Y0243 D D (not used)
4 Y0244 D D (not used)
5 Y0245 D D (not used)
6 Y0246 D D (not used)
7 Y0247 D D (not used)
8 Y0248 D D Lockout bit (DO)

Figure 4-45 Series 500 NIM Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-55

NIM Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Network Interface/ The Series 505 Network Interface/TIWAY (NIM) Module is the TIWAY I
TIWAY interface for Series 505 programmable controllers. The module provides two
(Series 505: NIM) TIWAY I communication ports.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status word. For
more information about the meaning of this variable, see the manual that
comes with the NIM Module.

Figure 4-46 shows the form that you use to define the Series 505 Network
Interface Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: Y (1 location)
Y (7 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DO (digital output)

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 07 NIM ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 Y0241 D D (not used)
2 Y0242 D D (not used)
3 Y0243 D D (not used)
4 Y0244 D D (not used)
5 Y0245 D D (not used)
6 Y0246 D D (not used)
7 Y0247 D D (not used)
8 Y0248 D D Lockout bit (DO)

Figure 4-46 Series 505 NIM Module

4-56 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PLINK Series 500

Peerlink The Series 500 Peerlink (PLINK) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 500: PLINK) allows each programmable controller on a peer-to-peer network to distribute
a block of data to every other controller on the network.

For example, Figure 4-47 shows a network with three stations. Each
controller has a block of 16 reserved words for each station. Each controller
can write to the reserved words for its own station. The words that are
reserved for other stations in that controller are read-only.

Station Station Station

1 2 3

1 1 1
read/write read only read only
2 2 2
read only read/write read only
3 3 3
read only read only read/write

Figure 4-47 Series 500 Peer-to-Peer Network

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the operation of Peerlink, see the manual that
comes with the module.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-57

PLINK Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Figure 4-48 shows the forms that you use to define a Series 500 Peerlink
Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (3 consecutive locations)
WY (5 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 05 PLINK ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0233 yyy D xxxxx_ST1 D Status 1 (WI)
2 WX0234 yyy D xxxxx_ST2 D Status 2 (WI)
3 WX0235 yyy D xxxxx_ST3 D Status 3 (WI)
4 WY0236 yyy D xxxxx_AHI D Address High (WO)
5 WY0237 yyy D xxxxx_ALO D Address Low (WO)
6 WY0238 D D (not used)
7 WY0239 D D (not used)
8 WY0240 D D (not used)

Figure 4-48 Series 500 Peerlink Module

4-58 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PLINK Series 505

Peerlink The Series 505 Peerlink (PLINK) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 505: PLINK) allows each programmable controller on a peer-to-peer network distribute a
block of data to every other controller on the network.

For example, Figure 4-49 shows a network with three stations. Each
controller has a block of 16 reserved words for each station. Each controller
can write to the reserved words for its own station. The words that are
reserved for other stations in that controller are read-only.

Station Station Station

1 2 3

1 1 1
read/write read only read only
2 2 2
read only read/write read only
3 3 3
read only read only read/write

Figure 4-49 Series 505 Peer-to-Peer Network

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the operation of Peerlink, see the manual that
comes with the module.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-59

PLINK Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Figure 4-50 shows the forms that you use to define a Series 505 Peerlink
Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (3 consecutive locations)
WY (5 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

? CTLs OPTs ESC

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 05 PLINK
F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0233 yyy D xxxxx_ST1 D Status 1 (WI)
2 WX0234 yyy D xxxxx_ST2 D Status 2 (WI)
3 WX0235 yyy D xxxxx_ST3 D Status 3 (WI)
4 WY0236 yyy D xxxxx_AHI D Address High (WO)
5 WY0237 yyy D xxxxx_ALO D Address Low (WO)
6 WY0238 D D (not used)
7 WY0239 D D (not used)
8 WY0240 D D (not used)

Figure 4-50 Series 505 Peerlink Module

4-60 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RTD Series 500

Resistance The Series 500 Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Module is an

Temperature intelligent module that measures an RTD resistance and converts the value
Detector to a temperature reading.
(Series 500: RTD)
The RTD Module maintains a small, consistent current through its attached
detector and monitors the voltage generated by the current passing through
the detector. For more information, see the manual that comes with the
RTD module. If the RTD input is the process variable for a loop or an analog
alarm, the .IERR extension of the loop contains the error code if an error
occurs.

Figure 4-51 shows the form that you use to define the Series 500 Resistance
Temperature Detector Module.

Slots required: 2 double wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: RT (Resistance Temperature Detector)

? CTLs OPTs ESC

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 05 RTD F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0249
2 WX0250
3 WX0251
4 WX0252
5 WX0253
6 WX0254
7 WX0255
8 WX0256
9 WX0257
10 WX0258
11 WX0259
12 WX0260
13 WX0261
14 WX0262
15 WX0263
16 WX0264

Figure 4-51 Series 500 RTD Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-61

8RTD and 16RTD Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Resistance The Series 505 Resistance Temperature Detector (8RTD or 16RTD) Module
Temperature is an intelligent module that measures an RTD resistance and converts it to
Detector a temperature value. The RTD Module maintains a small, consistent
(Series 505: 8RTD current through its attached detector and monitors the voltage generated by
and 16RTD) the current passing through the detector. For more information, see the
manual that comes with the RTD module.

When you configure a Series 505 RTD module for 16 word inputs (16RTD),
the errors for the first eight inputs are returned on the corresponding inputs
9 through 16. If you are using the inputs as process variables in loops or
analog alarms, APT does not recognize the error code because it is not
contained in the loop’s or analog alarm’s .IERR extension. If you want the
error to be displayed in the .IERR extension, configure the module for eight
word inputs (8RTD).

Figure 4-52 shows the form to use for defining the Series 505 xxRTD
Module (xx=8 or 16).

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 or 16 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: RT (Resistance Temperature Detector)

? CTLs OPTs ESC

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 05 xxRTD F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0249
2 WX0250
3 WX0251
4 WX0252
8RTD 5 WX0253
6 WX0254
7 WX0255
8 WX0256
16RTD 9 WX0257 Feedback 1
10 WX0258 Feedback 2
11 WX0259 Feedback 3
12 WX0260 Feedback 4
13 WX0261 Feedback 5
14 WX0262 Feedback 6
15 WX0263 Feedback 7
16 WX0264 Feedback 8

Figure 4-52 Series 505 xxRTD Module

4-62 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SERVO Series 500

Servo Axis The Series 500 Servo Axis (SERVO) Module controls a single axis of motion.
(Series 500: You can synchronize a Servo Axis Module to serve in a multiple-axis system
SERVO) with other Servo Axis Modules.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the SERVO Module.

The Servo Axis Module executes real-time control that is independent of the
controller scan. It can select and execute any program, communicating with
the module through the eight contiguous I/O words shown in Figure 4-53.

Figure 4-53 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 Servo
Axis Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 11 SERVO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0265 yyy D xxxxx_OPST D Operational Status (WI)
2 WX0266 yyy D xxxxx_ERR D Error Status (WI)
3 WX0267 yyy D xxxxx_POSHI D Position High Word (WI)
4 WX0268 yyy D xxxxx_POSLO D Position Low Word (WI)
5 WY0269 yyy D xxxxx_DREG D Data Register (WO)
6 WY0270 yyy D xxxxx_INT D Integer Data (WO)
7 WY0271 yyy D xxxxx_OFF D Offset (WO)
8 WY0272 yyy D xxxxx_CMD D Command Ctl Bits (WO)

Figure 4-53 Series 500 Servo Axis Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-63

TC Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Thermocouple The Series 500 Thermocouple (TC) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 500: TC) measures a thermocouple voltage and converts the value to a temperature
reading. The Thermocouple Module also accepts millivolt analog inputs. If
the thermocouple input is the process variable for a loop or an analog alarm,
the .IERR extension of the loop will contain the error code if an error occurs.

Figure 4-54 shows the form that you use to define the Series 500
Thermocouple Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: TC (Thermocouple)

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 13 TC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0273
2 WX0274
3 WX0275
4 WX0276
5 WX0277
6 WX0278
7 WX0279
8 WX0280

Figure 4-54 Series 500 Thermocouple Module

4-64 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TC Series 505

Thermocouple The Series 505 Thermocouple (TC) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 505: TC) measures a thermocouple voltage and converts the value to a temperature
reading. The Thermocouple Module also accepts millivolt analog inputs. If
the thermocouple input is the process variable for a loop or an analog alarm,
the .IERR extension of the loop will contain the error code if an error occurs.

Figure 4-55 shows the form that you use to define the Series 505
Thermocouple Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (8 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: TC (Thermocouple)

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 13 TC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0273
2 WX0274
3 WX0275
4 WX0276
5 WX0277
6 WX0278
7 WX0279
8 WX0280

Figure 4-55 Series 505 Thermocouple Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-65

ATM Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

386/ATM The Series 505 386/ATM Coprocessor (ATM) Module is an intelligent module
Coprocessor that is an IBM-compatible Intel 80386 computer with a diskette drive and a
(Series 505: ATM) hard disk.

Figure 4-56 shows the form that you use to define the Series 505 386/ATM
Coprocessor Module.

Slots required: 3 triple-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 13 ATM ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0273
2 WX0274
3 WX0275
4 WX0276
5 WY0277
6 WY0278
7 WY0279
8 WY0280

Figure 4-56 Series 505 386/ATM Coprocessor Module

4-66 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 ESP Series 500

Expert Solutions The Series 500 Expert Solutions Processor (ESP) Module is a high
Processor performance MS-DOS computer. APT supports only the 4WX/4WY I/O
(Series 500: ESP) configuration.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
information about the meaning of these variables and how to program the
module, see the manual that comes with the Expert Solutions Module.

Figure 4-57 shows the form that you use to define the Series 500 Expert
Solutions Processor Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 ESP ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_WI1 D Word in 1 (WI)
2 WX0194 yyy D xxxxx_WI2 D Word in 2 (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_WI3 D Word in 3 (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_WI4 D Word in 4 (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_WO5 D Word out 5 (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_WO6 D Word out 6 (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_WO7 D Word out 7 (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_WO8 D Word out 8 (WO)

Figure 4-57 Series 500 Expert Solutions Processor Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-67

TURBO Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

TurboMold The Series 500 TurboMold (TURBO) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 500: has its own set of high-speed I/O for rubber injection molding machine
TURBO) control. The I/O consist of four analog inputs and four analog outputs. The
TurboMold module provides these functions.

 Clamp opening and closing

 Injection

 Pack and hold

 Barrel refill/cure

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the TurboMold Module.

Figure 4-58 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500
TurboMold Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 TURBO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_M_STAT D Module Status (WI)
2 WX0194 yyy D xxxxx_CYCLE D Cycle Complete Codes (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_STATUS D Status Codes (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_ERROR D Process Error Codes (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_DOWN_V D Start Download Table (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_UP_V D Start Upload Table (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_M_CTRL D Module Control (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_START D Start Cycle Instruct. (WO)

Figure 4-58 Series 500 TurboMold Module

4-68 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TURBO Series 505

TurboMold The Series 505 TurboMold (TURBO) Module is an intelligent module that
(Series 505: has its own set of high-speed I/O for rubber injection molding machine
TURBO) control. The I/O consist of four analog inputs and four analog outputs. The
TurboMold module provides these functions.

 Clamp opening and closing

 Injection

 Pack and hold

 Barrel refill/cure

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the TurboMold Module.

Figure 4-59 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 505
TurboMold Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy
Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 TURBO ? CTLs OPTs ESC
F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_M_STAT D Module Status (WI)
2 WX0194 yyy D xxxxx_CYCLE D Cycle Complete Codes (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_STATUS D Status Codes (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_ERROR D Process Error Codes (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_DOWN_V D Start Download Table (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_UP_V D Start Upload Table (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_M_CTRL D Module Control (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_START D Start Cycle Instruct. (WO)

Figure 4-59 Series 505 TurboMold Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-69

HSPID Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

High Speed PID The Series 500 High Speed PID Controller (HSPID) Module is an intelligent
Controller module that has its own set of high-speed I/O for PID loop control. The I/O
(Series 500: HSPID) consist of four analog inputs and four analog outputs.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the High Speed PID Controller Module.

Figure 4-60 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 High
Speed PID Controller Module.

Slots required: 2 double-wide (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy
Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 13 HSPID ? CTLs OPTs ESC
F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0193 yyy D xxxxx_ERROR D Module error code (WI)
2 WX0194 D D (not used) (WI)
3 WX0195 yyy D xxxxx_1_2ALM D Loop 1/2 alarm bits (WI)
4 WX0196 yyy D xxxxx_3_4ALM D Loop 3/4 alarm bits (WI)
5 WY0197 yyy D xxxxx_A_DOWN D Starting download addr (WO)
6 WY0198 yyy D xxxxx_A_UP D Starting upload addr (WO)
7 WY0199 yyy D xxxxx_A_C D Starting C-flags addr (WO)
8 WY0200 yyy D xxxxx_FL_INT D Float/Integer (WO)

Figure 4-60 Series 500 High Speed PID Controller Module

4-70 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 110VO Series 500

110 VAC The Series 500 110 VAC Redundant Output (110VO) Module is an
Redundant Output intelligent I/O module that senses an input and switches an output without
(Series 500: 110VO) requiring controller intervention. The 110 VAC Redundant Module accepts
110 VAC signals from field devices such as push buttons, limit switches, and
optical sensors. The module provides two physically separate and isolated
channels.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the 110 VAC Redundant Output Module.

Figure 4-61 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 110 VAC
Redundant Output Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (3 consecutive locations)
Y (5 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 01 Slot: 15 110VO ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0281 yyy D xxxxx_FAIL D Primary pass/fail (DI)
2 X0282 yyy D xxxxx_FL1 D Fail code 1 (DI)
3 X0283 yyy D xxxxx_FL2 D Fail code 2 (DI)
4 Y0284 yyy D xxxxx_OPT D Option select (DO)
5 Y0285 yyy D xxxxx_CH1 D Channel 1 output (DO)
6 Y0286 yyy D xxxxx_CH2 D Channel 2 output (DO)
7 Y0287 yyy D xxxxx_CH3 D Channel 3 output (DO)
8 Y0288 yyy D xxxxx_CH4 D Channel 4 output (DO)

Figure 4-61 Series 500 110 VAC Redundant Output Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-71

110VR Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

110 VAC Rapid The Series 500 110 VAC Rapid Response (110VR) Module is an intelligent
Response I/O module that senses an input and switches an output without controller
(Series 500: 110VR) intervention. The 110 VAC Rapid Response Module accepts 110 VAC signals
from field devices such as push buttons, limit switches, and optical sensors.
The module provides two physically separate and isolated channels.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the 110 VAC Rapid Response Module.

Figure 4-62 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 110 VAC
Rapid Response Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (2 consecutive locations)
Y (4 consecutive locations)
Y (2 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 02 Slot: 1 110VR ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0289 yyy D xxxxx_CL1 D Channel 1 latch (DI)

2 X0290 yyy D xxxxx_CL2 D Channel 2 latch (DI)
3 Y0291 yyy D xxxxx_C1OUT D Channel 1 out enable (DO)
4 Y0292 yyy D xxxxx_C2OUT D Channel 2 out enable (DO)
5 Y0293 yyy D xxxxx_C1OPT D Channel 1 option (DO)
6 Y0294 yyy D xxxxx_C2OPT D Channel 2 option (DO)
7 Y0295 D D (not used)
8 Y0296 D D (not used)

Figure 4-62 Series 500 110 VAC Rapid Response Module

4-72 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 120VR Series 500

120 VDC Rapid The Series 500 120 VDC Rapid Response (120VR) Module is an intelligent
Response I/O module that senses an input and switches an output without controller
(Series 500: 120VR) intervention. The 120 VDC Rapid Response Module accepts 120 VDC
signals from field devices such as push buttons, limit switches, and optical
sensors. The module provides two physically separate and isolated channels.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the 120 VDC Rapid Response Module.

Figure 4-63 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 120 VDC
Rapid Response Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (2 consecutive locations)
Y (4 consecutive locations)
Y (2 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 02 Slot: 1 120VR ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0289 yyy D xxxxx_CL1 D Channel 1 latch (DI)

2 X0290 yyy D xxxxx_CL2 D Channel 2 latch (DI)
3 Y0291 yyy D xxxxx_C1OUT D Channel 1 out enable (DO)
4 Y0292 yyy D xxxxx_C2OUT D Channel 2 out enable (DO)
5 Y0293 yyy D xxxxx_C1OPT D Channel 1 option (DO)
6 Y0294 yyy D xxxxx_C2OPT D Channel 2 option (DO)
7 Y0295 D D (not used)
8 Y0296 D D (not used)

Figure 4-63 Series 500 120 VDC Rapid Response Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-73

24VDC Series 500

Intelligent Modules (continued)

24 VDC Rapid The Series 500 24 VDC Rapid Response (24VDC) Module is an intelligent
Response I/O module that senses an input and switches an output without controller
(Series 500: intervention. The 24 VDC Rapid Response Module accepts 24 VAC signals
24VDC) from field devices such as push buttons, limit switches, and optical sensors.
It detects an input and responds with an output more quickly than a
standard module that uses normal, discrete I/O. The module provides two
physically separate and isolated channels.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. For
more information about the meaning of these variables, see the manual that
comes with the 24 VDC Rapid Response Module.

4-74 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 24VDC Series 500

Figure 4-64 shows the forms that you use to define the Series 500 24 VDC
Rapid Response Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (2 consecutive locations)
Y (4 consecutive locations)
Y (2 APT-reserved locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 02 Slot: 2 24VDC ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0297 yyy D xxxxx_CL1 D Channel 1 latch (DI)
2 X0298 yyy D xxxxx_CL2 D Channel 2 latch (DI)
3 Y0299 yyy D xxxxx_C1OUT D Channel 1 out enable (DO)
4 Y0300 yyy D xxxxx_C2OUT D Channel 2 out enable (DO)
5 Y0301 yyy D xxxxx_C1OPT D Channel 1 option (DO)
6 Y0302 yyy D xxxxx_C2OPT D Channel 2 option (DO)
7 Y0303 D D (not used)
8 Y0304 D D (not used)

Figure 4-64 Series 500 24 VDC Rapid Response Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-75

SREG Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Field Interface The Series 505 Field Interface Module (FIM) with the SIMOREG (SREG)
SIMOREG Mode configuration is a field interface module that controls a SIMOREG DC
(Series 505:SREG) drive. Although the module requires a configuration of 14 WYs, four are
unused. APT downloads only 10 WYs to the controller. The controller then
communicates to the DC drive; the 10 WXs contain the response from the
DC drive. (See the manuals for the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module
and the SIMOREG Digital DC Drive Serial Interface for more information
concerning the contents of these WYs and WXs.)

Since the FIM module acts like a remote base controller (RBC) card and can
handle up to 15 SIMOREG DC motors, you need to define the SIMOREG
DC drives that are controlled by the FIM module in a separate I/O base.
Configure the I/O base on the FIM module with switch S1. For example, if
you set switch S1 to 2 on the FIM module, then you must configure your
SREG modules in APT for I/O base 2.

When you set up an SREG in APT, each SREG appears as a slot in the I/O
base. You can use slots 1 through 15 to define the SIMOREG DC motors
that are controlled by the FIM module, and you must define a SIMOREG
broadcast channel (SREGB) in slot 16. The SIMOREGs do not work unless
you have an SREGB defined in slot 16 of whichever I/O base you have
configured for the FIM module. You do not have to use the SREGB, but it
must be configured. (See the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module User
Manual for more information.)

4-76 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SREG Series 505

Figure 4-65 shows the form that you use to define a FIM Module in this
mode.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (10 consecutive locations)
WY (10 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 SREG ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WX0013
6 WX0014
7 WX0015
8 WX0016
9 WX0017
10 WX0018
11 WY0019
12 WY0020
13 WY0021
14 WY0022
15 WY0023
16 WY0024
17 WY0025
18 WY0026
19 WY0027
20 WY0029

Figure 4-65 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOREG Mode

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-77

SREGB Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Field Interface The Series 505 Field Interface Module (FIM) with the SIMOREG broadcast
SIMOREG (SREGB) configuration is a field interface module that controls Siemens
Broadcast Mode SIMOREG DC drives in broadcast mode. You can send an immediate
(Series 505: command to one or more DC motors, or to all 15 motors, with the SREGB.
SREGB) (See the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module User Manual for a description
of the immediate broadcast mode.)

Although the module requires a configuration of 16 WYs, six are unused.

Only 10 WYs are downloaded to the controller. You must declare the SREGB
in slot 16 of whichever I/O base you have configured to contain the SREGs.
Slot 16 is designated as the broadcast channel for the FIM module. The
SREGs do not work unless there is an SREGB defined in slot 16.

4-78 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SREGB Series 505

Figure 4-66 shows the form that you use to define a FIM module in this
mode.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (16 consecutive locations)
Y (16 consecutive locations)
WY (10 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 SREGB ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0001
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
16 X0016
17 Y0017
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
32 Y0032
33 WY0033
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
42 WY0042

Figure 4-66 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOREG Broadcast Mode

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-79

SVRT Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Field Interface The Series 505 Field Interface Module (FIM) with the SIMOVERT (SVRT)
SIMOVERT Mode configuration is a field interface module that controls a SIMOVERT AC
(Series 505:SVRT) drive. APT downloads four WYs to the controller. The controller then
communicates to the AC drive; the four WXs contain the response from the
AC drive. (See the manuals for the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module
and the SIMOVERT AC Drive Serial Interface for more information
concerning the contents of these WYs and WXs.)

Since the FIM module acts like a remote base controller (RBC) card and can
handle up to 15 SIMOVERT AC motors, you need to define the SIMOVERT
AC drives that are controlled by the FIM module in a separate I/O base.
Configure the I/O base on the FIM module with switch S1. For example, if
you set switch S1 to 2 on the FIM module, then you must configure your
SVRT modules in APT for I/O base 2.

When you set up an SVRT in APT, each SVRT appears as a slot in the I/O
base. You can use slots 1 through 15 to define the SIMOVERT AC motors
that are controlled by the FIM module, and you must define a SIMOVERT
broadcast channel (SVRTB) in slot 16. The SIMOVERTs do not work unless
you have an SVRTB defined in slot 16 of whichever I/O base you have
configured for the FIM module. You do not have to use the SVRTB, but it
must be configured. (See the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module User
Manual for more information.)

4-80 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SVRT Series 505

Figure 4-67 shows the form that you use to define a FIM module in this
mode.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 SVRT ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0009
2 WX0010
3 WX0011
4 WX0012
5 WY0013
6 WY0014
7 WY0015
8 WY0016

Figure 4-67 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOVERT Mode

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-81

SVRTB Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Field Interface The Series 505 Field Interface Module (FIM) with the SIMOVERT
SIMOVERT broadcast (SVRTB) configuration is a field interface module that controls
Broadcast Mode Siemens SIMOVERT AC drives in broadcast mode. You can send an
(Series 505:SVRTB) immediate command to one or more AC motors, or to all 15 motors, with the
SVRTB. (See the SIMATIC 505 Field Interface Module User Manual for a
description of the immediate broadcast mode.)

Although the module requires a configuration of eight WYs, four are

unused. Only four WYs are downloaded to the controller. You must declare
the SRVTB in slot 16 of whichever I/O base you have configured to hold your
SVRTs. Slot 16 is the broadcast channel on the FIM module. The SVRTs do
not work unless there is an SVRTB defined in slot 16.

4-82 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SVRTB Series 505

Figure 4-68 shows the form that you use to define a FIM module in this
mode.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (16 consecutive locations)
Y (16 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 02 SVRTB ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 X0001
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
16 X0016
17 Y0017
. .
. .
. .
. .
32 Y0032
33 WY0033
. .
. .
36 WY0036

Figure 4-68 Series 505 FIM Module: SIMOVERT Broadcast Mode

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-83

H1 Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Communications The Series 505 Communications Processor Module (CP1434TF) can be used
Processor for both controller-to-controller communication (peer) and supervisory host
(Series 505: H1) to controller communication (TF) on the Industrial Ethernet. The
information transferred and the logic to perform the transfer have to be
configured elsewhere in APT. The module editor defines the CP module.
Figure 4-69 shows the form that you use to define the module.

The module uses four WXs and four WYs. They are 16-bit words, in which
the bits are used for handshaking. The WYs contain the start bits for 40
jobs and the WXs contain the corresponding status bits for the 40 jobs. The
bits have to be manipulated for communication to occur. The last WX and
WY are not currently used.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words (xxxxx
in Figure 4-69). For information about the meaning of these variables, see
the manual that comes with the CP1434TF communications processor.

Slots required: 2 double-wide

Address type: WX (4 consecutive locations)
WY (4 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

? ESC
I/O Default Name F1

Default prefix for I/O: xxxxx

Unit Name: yyy

Channel: 1 Base: 0 Slot: 02 H1 ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0025 yyy xxxxx_WI1 JOB ACTIVE BIT (JOB 1--16) (DI)

2 WX0026 yyy xxxxx_WI2 JOB ACTIVE BIT (JOB 17--32) (DI)
3 WX0027 yyy xxxxx_WI3 JOB ACTIVE BIT (JOB 33--40) (DI)
4 WX0028 (not used)
5 WY0029 yyy xxxxx_WO5 JOB START BIT (JOB 1--16) (DO)
6 WY0030 yyy xxxxx_WO6 JOB START BIT (JOB 17--32) (DO)
7 WY0031 yyy xxxxx_WO7 JOB START BIT (JOB 33--40) (DO)
8 WY0032 (not used)

Figure 4-69 Series 505 Communication Processor

4-84 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 16AF Series 505

High Density The Series 505 High Density Advanced Function (16AF) Module provides 16
Advanced Function channels and performs processing on the analog signals before transferring
(Series 505: 16AF) that information to the programmable controller. This module supports
scaling, alarming, peak/valley hold, averaging, and digital filtering for each
of its 16 channels. Refer to the module’s user manual for more details
concerning the operation of the module.

Figure 4-70 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 High Density
Advanced Function (16AF) Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: X (16 consecutive locations)
Y (16 consecutive locations)
WX (32 consecutive locations)
WY (32 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: DI (digital input)
DO (digital output)
WI (word input)
WO (word output)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-85

16AF Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 16AF ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

16 X0016 Module ready flag

17 Y0017 Data Transfer Type Bit 1
18 Y0018 Data Transfer Type Bit 2
19 Y0019 Data Transfer Type Bit 3
20 Y0020 (not used)
. . (not used)
. . (not used)
. . (not used)
27 Y0027 Averaging reset (all channels)
28 Y0028 Valley hold reset (all channels)
29 Y0029 Peak hold reset (all channels)
30 Y0030 Read peak hold or valley hold
31 Y0031 Read flags or peak/valley hold
32 Y0032 Data ready flag
33 WX0033 Channel 1 conversion data
34 WX0034 Channel 2 conversion data
35 WX0035 Channel 3 conversion data
36 WX0036 Channel 4 conversion data
37 WX0037 Channel 5 conversion data
38 WX0038 Channel 6 conversion data
39 WX0039 Channel 7 conversion data
40 WX0040 Channel 8 conversion data
41 WX0041 Channel 9 conversion data
42 WX0042 Channel 10 conversion data
43 WX0043 Channel 11 conversion data
44 WX0044 Channel 12 conversion data
45 WX0045 Channel 13 conversion data
46 WX0046 Channel 14 conversion data
47 WX0047 Channel 15 conversion data
48 WX0048 Channel 16 conversion data
49 WX0049
. .
. .
. .
64 WX0064
65 WY0065
. .
. .
. .
96 WY0096

Figure 4-70 Series 505 High Density Advanced Function Module

4-86 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 ENET Series 505

Ethernet TCP/IP The Series 505 Ethernet TCP/IP Adapter (ENET) Module provides
Adapter communication capability using the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet
(Series 505: ENET) Protocol (TCP/IP).

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. Refer
to the module’s user manual for more details concerning the operation of the
module. APT does not communicate with the controller by means of this
module. APT does not support program download, debug, MAITT, or any
other APT communication functions with this module.

Figure 4-71 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 Ethernet
TCP/IP Adapter (ENET) Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (2 consecutive locations)
WY (6 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 ENET ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001 XXXXX_M_STAT Module Status Word

2 WX0002 XXXXX_C_STAT Command Status Word
3 WY0003 XXXXX_M_CTRL Module Control Word
4 WY0004 XXXXX_C_CTRL Command Control Word
5 WY0005 XXXXX_CMDSL1 Command Slot 1
6 WY0006 XXXXX_CMDSL2 Command Slot 2
7 WY0007 XXXXX_CMDSL3 Command Slot 3
8 WY0008 XXXXX_CMDSL4 Command Slot 4

Figure 4-71 Series 505 Ethernet TCP/IP Adapter Module

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-87

HSCE Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

High Speed The Series 505 High Speed Counter Encoder Module is an intelligent
Counter Encoder module that contains its own microprocessor and memory. It provides a total
(Series 505: HSCE) of six counters and eight outputs, divided into two channels.

APT appends the default prefix that you specify to the status words. Refer
to the module’s user manual for more details concerning the operation of the
module.

Figure 4-72 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 High Speed
Counter Encoder (HSCE) Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (18 consecutive locations)
WY (14 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

4-88 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 HSCE Series 505

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 HSCE ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001 XXXXX_C1CCVH Ctr 1 Current Count Value High

2 WX0002 XXXXX_C1CCVL Ctr 1 Current Count Value Low
3 WX0003 XXXXX_C2CCV Ctr 2 Current Count Value
4 WX0004 XXXXX_C3CCV Ctr 3 Current Count Value
5 WX0005 XXXXX_C4CCVH Ctr 4 Current Count Value High
6 WX0006 XXXXX_C4CCVL Ctr 4 Current Count Value Low
7 WX0007 XXXXX_C5CCV Ctr 5 Current Count Value
8 WX0008 XXXXX_C6CCV Ctr 6 Current Count Value
9 WX0009 XXXXX_C1HR1H Ctr 1 Holding Register 1 High
10 WX0010 XXXXX_C1HR1L Ctr 1 Holding Register 1 Low
11 WX0011 XXXXX_C1HR2H Ctr 1 Holding Register 2 High
12 WX0012 XXXXX_C1HR2L Ctr 1 Holding Register 2 Low
13 WX0013 XXXXX_C4HR3H Ctr 4 Holding Register 3 High
14 WX0014 XXXXX_C4HR3L Ctr 4 Holding Register 3 Low
15 WX0015 XXXXX_C4HR4H Ctr 4 Holding Register 4 High
16 WX0016 XXXXX_C4HR4L Ctr 4 Holding Register 4 Low
17 WX0017 XXXXX_STATHI Module Status, High Word
18 WX0018 XXXXX_STATLO Module Status, Low Word
19 WY0019 XXXXX_SETHI Setup Word, High Word
20 WY0020 XXXXX_SETLO Setup Word, Low Word
21 WY0021 XXXXX_C1P1H Ctr 1 Preset 1 High Word
22 WY0022 XXXXX_C1P1L Ctr 1 Preset 1 Low Word
23 WY0023 XXXXX_C1P2H Ctr 1 Preset 2 High Word
24 WY0024 XXXXX_C1P2L Ctr 1 Preset 2 Low Word
25 WY0025 XXXXX_C2P3 Ctr 2 Preset 3 Word
26 WY0026 XXXXX_C3P4 Ctr 3 Preset 4 Word
27 WY0027 XXXXX_C4P5H Ctr 4 Preset 5 High Word
28 WY0028 XXXXX_C4P5L Ctr 4 Preset 5 Low Word
29 WY0029 XXXXX_C4P6H Ctr 4 Preset 6 High Word
30 WY0030 XXXXX_C4P6L Ctr 4 Preset 6 Low Word
31 WY0031 XXXXX_C5P7 Ctr 5 Preset 7 Word
32 WY0032 XXXXX_C6P8 Ctr 6 Preset 8 Word

Figure 4-72 Series 505 High Speed Counter Encoder

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Series 500/505 Modules 4-89

PPEXP Series 505

Intelligent Modules (continued)

Program Port The Series 505 Program Port Expander (PPEXP) Module provides
Expander additional RS-232C and RS-422 communications ports for the
(Series 505: programmable controller to use. Refer to the module’s user manual for more
PPEXP) details concerning the operation of the module.

Figure 4-73 shows the form that you use to define a Series 505 Program
Port Expander (PPEXP) Module.

Slots required: 1 (user-configurable)

Address type: WX (2 consecutive locations)
WY (6 consecutive locations)
I/O symbolic name type: WI (word input)
WO (word output)

Channel: 1 Base: 00 Slot: 01 PPEXP ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

POS ADDRESS UNIT I/O NAME DESCRIPTION

1 WX0001
2 WX0002
3 WY0003
4 WY0004
5 WY0005
6 WY0006
7 WY0007
8 WY0008

Figure 4-73 Series 505 Program Port Expander Module

4-90 Series 500/505 Modules APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Chapter 5
I/O Symbolic Names
5.1 Defining I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Entering I/O Symbolic Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 I/O Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Analog I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Word I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Intelligent I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
The Image Register Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.4 Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.5 Digital Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.6 Digital Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

5.7 Digital Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.8 Word Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

5.9 Word Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

5.10 Binary-coded Decimal Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20

5.11 Binary-coded Decimal Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

5.12 Resistance Temperature Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

5.13 Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-1

5.1 Defining I/O Symbolic Names

Overview The APT I/O Symbolic Name Definition Utility lets you define I/O symbolic
names that you then use to refer to I/O points in your system.

The I/O Symbolic Name Definition Utility lets you identify various
characteristics of I/O points, including the type of input or output, high and
low input ranges, and the rates at which variables are filtered.

You can enter the I/O Symbolic Name Table at either the Program Content
Level or the Unit Content Level. A symbolic name that is defined at the
Program Content Level is considered global and can be used in any unit in
that program. A symbolic name that is defined at the Unit Content Level
can be used only within that unit.

Availability The I/O Symbolic Name Definition Utility is supported for both Series 505
and S5 controllers. The Module Editor Utility is not supported for S5
controllers; use the I/O Symbolic Name Definition Utility to define your I/O
symbolic names if you have an S5 controller.

Entering I/O When you define an I/O symbolic name, you enter information in the
Symbolic Names following fields.

Name can be from 1 to 12 characters long and can consist of any

combination of letters, digits, and underscores. At least one of the
characters must be a letter.

The name must be unique within the current program or unit,

depending on where you are defining the I/O point. It cannot be the
same as the name of any other I/O point, nor can it be the same as the
name of any other object (declaration, device, etc.) within its scope. A
symbolic name cannot be an APT keyword. See Chapter 1 for a list of
key words.

Type is a two-letter code that represents the type of I/O point that you
are defining.

Other Information that you need to enter appears on the screen after
you specify the name and type. This information varies depending on
the type of I/O point that you are defining.

You cannot edit the Name or Type fields if you have already marked the I/O
name for OSx (PCS) tag translation. Additional fields for thermocouple
(TC), resistance temperature detector (RT), and analog input (AI) I/O types
cannot be edited after the name is marked for translation. These fields are
listed under the descriptions for these I/O types.

5-2 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Analog

5.2 I/O Types

Analog I/O Analog values are 16-bit words that evaluate to one distinct signal. APT
provides two types of analog I/O symbolic names: analog input (AI) and
analog output (AO).

Availability AI and AO are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The
symbol names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your
controller type; however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

Analog I/O are typically used with CFBs, as shown in Figure 5-1, but they
can also be monitored and changed in an SFC.

CFB flow
Series 500/Series 505 PV

SP P
I/O Symbolic Name Table
I
Name Type Address VLV_CTL D
OUT
flow AI WX0017
valve
valve AO WY0025

SFC
S5 Controllers

I/O Symbolic Name Table T2 flow > 0

Name Type Address

S3 valve:= 32000;
flow AI PW128
valve AO PW128

Figure 5-1 Using Analog I/O

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-3

Digital

I/O Types (continued)

Digital I/O Digital I/O values are one-bit discrete values that evaluate to True or False.
APT provides three types of digital I/O symbolic names: digital input (DI),
digital output (DO), and digital flag (DF).

Availability DI, DO, and DF are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O.
The symbol names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your
controller type; however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

Digital I/O symbolic names can be used in SFC steps and transitions to
detect and change the status of field equipment.

Figure 5-2 shows the symbolic name assignments used in an SFC that
checks the status of a digital input, writes to a digital output, and turns on a
digital flag. Figure 5-2 also shows how to use digital I/O in a CFB Math
statement. (Digital flags cannot be used on the left side of an assignment
statement.)

NOTE: A digital flag contains logic that controls an external bit, that is, the
flag is a logical construct that manipulates a digital output. A digital flag
requires the commands LATCH, CLEAR, and ON to set its logic state. This
is different from an S5 flag, which controls a single internal bit and has no
associated logic or commands.

Series 500/Series 505

CFB
INTERLOCK
I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address

BATCH
strt_bch DI X0001
bch_phase DO Y0009 IF strt_bch AND dflag THEN
dflag DF Y0010 bch_phase := true;

S5 Controllers SFC

I/O Symbolic Name Table T2 strt_bch

Name Type Address

S3 LATCH dflag;
strt_bch DI I1.0
bch_phase DO Q1.0
T3 dflag
dflag DF Q1.1

S4 bch_phase := true;

Figure 5-2 Using Digital I/O

5-4 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Word

Word I/O Word I/O values are 16-bit values that contain 16 different bits of
information. APT provides four types of word I/O symbolic names: word
input (WI), word output (WO), binary-coded decimal input (BI), and
binary-coded decimal output (BO).

Availability WI, WO, BI, and BO are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5
I/O. The symbol names and their use in APT are the same regardless of
your controller type; however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

If you have a Series 505 controller, and you configure a parallel word
module in the Module Definition Table before you define the I/O symbolic
name, the type defaults to word input or word output. You can change the
type to binary-coded decimal in the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

Intelligent I/O For Series 500 I/O and Series 505 I/O, APT provides two special input types
that are used with intelligent I/O modules, the Resistance Temperature
Detector (RT) and the Thermocouple (TC).

Availability RT and TC inputs are only available for Series 500 I/O and Series 505 I/O.

The Image Register Series 505 controllers have an image register for digital and word I/O in
Option their firmware. S5 controllers have an image register that handles digital
I/O in their firmware (the PII and PIQ area); in addition, APT has provided
the Image Register option in the I/O Table for S5 peripheral I/O.

If you have an S5 controller, you must select (X) the Image Register option
when you want to do the following:

 Test your program when your peripheral I/O is not physically

connected.

 Translate your peripheral I/O to OSx (PCS).

 Evaluate your peripheral I/O using Debug.

You do not have to deselect the Image Register option when you connect
your I/O; actual physical I/O values automatically take precedence over the
values contained by the image register.

NOTE: When your output module is not physically connected, and you wish
to use the Image Register, you must program an error OB. Use a
system-activated subroutine (described in Chapter 10) to program OB 23,
24, or 25. You can put any necessary code in the math section of the
subroutine, or else simply enter a BEGIN statement. If you do not program
an error OB, the controller goes into STOP mode. You do not have to
program an error OB for input modules.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-5

AI

5.3 Analog Input

Using Analog Input An analog input (AI) is a voltage or current signal from the field to the
(AI) controller that varies continuously over a specified range of voltages or
currents. Analog inputs normally come from measuring devices, such as
flow meters and pressure transmitters, and are proportional to the
measured parameter. The three scaling options that are available for analog
inputs are described at the end of this section.

Availability Both the Series 505 and S5 controllers can scale, calculate square roots, and
filter an analog input. The 560/560T controllers, which do not support
floating point calculations, cannot do these functions.

 The No Scaling option causes no scaling to be done, and the raw

unprocessed input from the module is used. Neither filtering nor the
square root functions can be done on the analog input.

For S5 I/O, when you choose any scaling option (that is, when you do
not select No Scaling), the analog input or output is bit-shifted by the
SCALE or UNSCALE procedure. See the chapter called “Math
Functions and Procedures” in the SIMATIC APT Programming
Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual for more information. When an S5
analog input is used as the process variable for a PID loop, analog
alarm block, or on/off block, the analog input must be scaled.

For Series 500 and Series 505 I/O, if an analog input is used as the
process variable for any of the standard or advanced control blocks
(PID loop, analog alarm, dual mode, etc.) then the algorithms for these
blocks can do a square root and an internal scaling based on the values
of the process variable low and high ranges (PVL and PVH).

NOTE: For Series 500 and Series 505 I/O, do not select the No Scaling
option for the uncontrolled (wild) process variable for a ratio station block.
You can select No Scaling for the controlled process variable, however.

For Series 500 and Series 505 I/O, if you choose an analog input for the
process variable for any standard or advanced control block and also
select the No Scaling option, then you may still use the PID .IN or .PV
extensions just like a scaled analog input.

If you do not select the No Scaling option: When you change the
values of the process variable low or high ranges (PVL and PVH) for
standard or advanced blocks during program execution, the range for
the analog input (loop_name.IN or AI name) does not change
correspondingly and therefore will no longer reflect the same value as
the .LPV. If you want to change the high and low values you must
change them on the AI form, recompile and download.

5-6 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 AI

 The square root option normalizes the incoming signal to a value

between 0 and 1, takes the square root, and then scales the value as
shown below for bipolar values.

0 to 32000 0 to 1 ¯value scale

--32000 to 0 --1 to 0 − ¯|value| scale

 The filter option applies a first-order exponential filter at a rate

determined by a specified time constant. If the filter is used with the
square root option, the filter is applied before the square root. The
following formula is used to process the value every half second:
−.5 −.5
name = (e .ftau)name + (1 − e.ftau)name.srv
You can use an AI symbolic name in an SFC step or Math statement or in a
CFB that uses an analog input. For example, the process variable in a PID
loop is normally an analog input. An AI symbolic name has the extensions
listed in Table 5-1.

Table 5-1 AI Extensions

Extension Definition
name1 scaled2, processed (filtered) real value (read-only)
name.BTA3 broken transmitter flag (read-only)
name.FLTR1 filtered value (read-only)
name.FTAU1 time constant that indicates rate for filter (read/write)
name.IO image register value (Image Register option3)(read-only)
name.OVR3 overrange flag (read-only)
name.RAW raw, integer input from module (read-only)
name.SRV1 raw, scaled2 value before filter (read-only)
1 Used by Series 505 and S5 but not 560/560T controllers.
2 All but the 560/560T controllers can scale inputs.
3 Used by S5 only.

When you reference the symbolic name of an AI in your program, APT uses
the scaled value (for all but the 560/560T). The scaling of the analog input is
updated each time the associated math is executed. Any program attempts
to modify this scaled value are overwritten by the system. The 560/560T
controllers, which do not scale inputs, use the raw integer input, name.RAW,
from an analog module.

When you mark the AI object name for OSx (PCS) tag translation in the
Mark PCS Tags subeditor, you cannot edit the Name and Type fields.
Furthermore, if you mark the AI object name for translate without using
the .RAW extension, you also cannot edit the No Scaling field. The AI object
name without the .RAW extension translates to an OSx CALC data type,
whereas object_name.RAW translates to an OSx AI data type.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-7

AI

Analog Input (continued)

Defining AI When you select Analog Input, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: AI S Analog input

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:
Sub type: TS 20% offset
Eng. Units:
Low range: 0.0
High range: 100.0
No Scaling: [ ]
Sq.Root: [ ]
Filter: [ ] Time Constant: 1.0sec
PLC address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Analog Input.
Series 500/505 modules that use this I/O type include 4AI, 8AI, 4AI4O,
6AI2O, 8AI4O.
S5 modules that use this I/O type include the 460, 465, and 466.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %IW0--126. The most commonly used
area for analog inputs is %PW128--254. The % sign must be included in the address.
For Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the
Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your AI to OSx. If your I/O is connected, the image register is updated
with the I/O values every program scan. You do not need the Image Register option
in order to test programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller
already has that ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Sub type: code (B, T, or Z) that represents voltage or current range of input to the
Series 500/505 or S5 module as listed below.

(Series 500/505)
20% offset (T) is the default.
B (Bipolar): --10 to +10 V or --5 to +5 V
T (20% offset): 1 to 5 V, 2 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA
Z (Zero bias): 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or 0 to 20 mA

(S5)
20% offset (T) is the default.
B (Bipolar): á12 mV, á50 mV, á500 mV, á1 V, á5 V, á10 V, á20 mA
T (20% offset): 4 to 20 mA
Z (Zero bias): 0 to 12 mV, 0 to 50 mV, 0 to 500 mV, Pt100, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V,
0 to 10 V, or 0 to 20 mA

5-8 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 AI

Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe units of final, scaled

value (8 characters maximum).
Low Range (all but the 560/560T): real number that indicates low range of input in
engineering units. Value must be less than high range. A value must be entered for
all controllers, but is used by all but the 560/560T.
High Range (all but the 560/560T): real number that indicates high range of input
in engineering units. Value must be greater than low range. A value must be
entered for all controllers, but is used by all but the 560/560T.
No Scaling (all but the 560/560T): X indicates no scaling is to be done on the input.
Scaling is not possible for the 560/560T.
Square Root (all but the 560/560T): X indicates square root of input is used. Select
this option if the input for the process variable comes from a device (such as an
orifice meter) that requires a square root calculation to scale its value.
Filter (all but the 560/560T): X indicates the input is filtered.
Time Constant (all but the 560/560T): real number that indicates rate in seconds
for filter; field appears only if you select Filter.
PLC Address (all but the 560/560T): Refers to controller address allocation for the
scaled value as listed below. Automatic is the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address
User Assigned: Allows user to specify a controller address for the scaled
value.

Reserved Address (all but the 560/560T): starting controller address you specify
for the scaled value of the analog input.

(Series 500/505)
The types of memory available for this declaration are %V, %G, and %Gx (where x is
the application ID). See your controller manual for the types of memory your
controller supports. Memory types %G and %Gx are only available for a 575
controller.

(S5)
The types of memory available for this declaration are %DB:DD or %DX:DD.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-9

AI

Analog Input (continued)

Scaling Analog Series 505 controller analog values are scaled differently from S5 controller
Values analog values. For Series 500/Series 505 I/O, three scaling options are
available for analog input and output values: bipolar, 20% offset, and zero
bias. See Table 5-2.

Table 5-2 Scaling Series 500/505 Analog I/O

Low Range High Range

Scale Option Input Range
Input Value Integer Value Input Value Integer Value

--10 to +10 volts --10 --32000 10 32000

Bipolar
--5 to +5 volts --5 --32000 5 32000
1 to 5 volts 1 6400 5 32000
20% Offset 2 to 10 volts 2 6400 10 32000
4 to 20 milliamps 4 6400 20 32000
0 to 5 volts 0 0 5 32000
Zero Bias 0 to 10 volts 0 0 10 32000
0 to 20 milliamps 0 0 20 32000

For S5, the scaling of the analog inputs are handled differently from the
scaling of outputs. Three scaling options are available for analog input
values: bipolar, 20% offset, and zero bias. Analog inputs are allowed up to
200% overranging. The following measuring ranges are supported: á12 mV,
á50 mV, á500 mV, Pt100, á1 V, á5 V, á10 V, á4--20 mA (with 4 and 2
wire transducers). Table 5-3 lists examples of the different ranges.

Table 5-3 Scaling S5 Analog Inputs

Low Range High Range

Scale Option Input Range Input Integer APT .RAW Input Integer APT .RAW
Value Value Value1 Value Value Value1

--10 to +10 volts --10 --2048 --16384 10 2048 16384

Bipolar
--5 to +5 volts --5 --2048 --16384 5 2048 16384
20% Offset 4 to 20 milliamps 4 512 4096 20 2560 20480
0 to 5 volts 0 0 0 5 2048 16384
0 to 10 volts 0 0 0 10 2048 16384
Zero Bias 0 to 20 milliamps 0 0 0 20 2048 16384
PT100 0 0 0 200 2048 16384
0 to 200 ohms
1 Analog inputs are 16-bit numbers with 12 bits of resolution. The three bits that are taken off contain error
information on overranging and broken transmitter. For test purposes you must multiply your 0 to 2048
range by 8 to use as the analog_name.RAW.

5-10 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 AO

5.4 Analog Output

Using Analog Analog Output (AO) is a signal from the controller to a process control
Output (AO) device that provides modulation information for field equipment. Analog
outputs normally go to analog display meters and proportional control
valves.

Availability Analog outputs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O.
The symbol names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your
controller type; however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

The value of an AO is always an integer. When you configure an AO, you

must specify the scaling option. Series 500 and Series 505 modules can
choose between three options: zero offset, 20% offset, and bipolar. S5
modules can choose between two options: zero offset and bipolar. The scaling
range of an option is different for the different controller families: for
instance, a bipolar value of --10 volts would correspond to an AO value of
--32000 for a Series 505 controller, whereas a bipolar value of --10 volts
would correspond to an AO value of --1024 for an S5 controller.

The scaling options are used only when the AO is configured as the output
of a loop. If you write directly to the AO from a math block, you must use
the UNSCALE function to get a properly scaled output.

An AO symbolic name can be used in an SFC step or Math statement or can

be configured in a CFB that uses an analog output. For example, the output
from a PID loop is normally an analog output. An AO symbolic name has
the extensions listed in Table 5-4.

Table 5-4 AO Extensions

Extension Definition
name integer value (read-only)
name.IO image register value (Image Register option1) (read-only)
name.OVR overrange occurred during scaling1 (read-only)
1 Used by S5 only.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-11

AO

Analog Output (continued)

Defining AO When you select Analog Output, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: AO S Analog output

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:
Sub type: T S 20% offset
Eng. Units:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Analog Output.
Series 500/505 modules that use this I/O type include 2AO, 4AO, 8AO, 4AI40,
6AI20, 8AI40.
The S5 module that uses this type is the 470.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %QW0--126. The most commonly used
area for analog outputs is %PW128--254. The % sign must be included in the
address. For Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are
assigned in the Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your AO to OSx and evaluate your AO using Debug. However, if your
AO module is not connected, then the error OB must be programmed, or else the
controller will go into STOP mode. You do not need the Image Register option in
order to test programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller
already has that ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Sub type: code (B, T, or Z) that represents type of output to the field as listed below.

(Series 500/505)
20% (T) is the default.
B (Bipolar): --10 to +10 V or --5 to +5 V
T (20% offset): 1 to 5 V, 2 to 10 V, or 4 to 20 mA
Z (Zero bias): 0 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, or 0 to 20 mA

(S5)
Zero bias (Z) is the default.
B (Bipolar): --10 V to 10 V
T (20% offset): NOT AVAILABLE
Z (Zero bias): 0 to 20 mA, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 5 V, or 4 to 20 mA

NOTE: If your S5 analog output module has a built-in 20% offset, you must select
zero bias. If your module does not have a 20% offset built in, you can choose between
zero bias and bipolar. You cannot choose 20% offset.

Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe units of final value

(8 characters maximum).

5-12 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 AO

For Series 500/Series 505 I/O, three scaling options are available for analog
output values: bipolar, 20% offset, and zero bias. See Table 5-2.

For S5 analog outputs, two scaling options are available; bipolar and zero
bias. A 20% offset module is entered as a zero bias module, because the
offset is done in the modules themselves. Table 5-5 lists the scaling options
available for S5 analog outputs.

Table 5-5 Scaling S5 Analog Outputs

Low Range High Range

Scale Option Input Range Input Integer Input Integer
APT Value APT Value
Value Value Value Value

--10 to +10 --10 --1024 --16384 10 1024 16384

volts
Bipolar
--5 to +5 volts --5 --1024 --16384 5 1024 16384
0 to 5 volts 0 0 0 5 1024 16384
0 to 10 volts 0 0 0 10 1024 16384
1 to 5 volts 1 0 0 5 1024 16384
Zero Bias
(Includes 20% 2 to 10 volts 2 0 0 10 1024 16384
Offset)
0 to 20 0 0 0 20 1024 16384
milliamps
4 to 20 4 0 0 20 1024 16384
milliamps
1 Analog outputs are 16-bit numbers with 11 bits of resolution. Four bits are added to match the format of
an analog input; they do not contain any information. For test purposes you must multiply your 0 to 1024
or +/-- 1024 range by 16 to check the value that is placed in the analog output name.
2 If your S5 analog output module has a built-in 20% offset, you must select zero bias. If your module
does not have a 20% offset built in, you can choose between zero bias and bipolar.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-13

DF

5.5 Digital Flag

Using Digital Flag A Digital Flag (DF) is a read/write boolean value that can be used anywhere
(DF) you might use a digital output and can be assigned to any digital output
module.

Availability DFs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

NOTE: If you have Series 500 or Series 505 I/O and you define a DF in the
I/O Symbolic Name Table before you define the DO module, the point
remains a DF when you enter the name in the module. If you define the
module first, the default is a digital output (DO), and you must change the
type to DF in the I/O Symbolic Name Table.

A digital flag I/O symbolic name is used in the parallel section of an SFC
step or a Math section with the commands listed in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 DF Commands

Command Definition
LATCH Turns on output until CLEAR command turns it off.

ON Turns on output as long as the SFC step or Math statement is

active.
CLEAR Turns off output; takes precedence over ON or LATCH.

Digital flags differ from boolean and DO (digital output) variables. All
references to a digital flag are logically connected, and the flag state is set in
one place in the compiled program. In contrast, an S5 flag controls a single
internal bit and has no associated logic or commands. References to boolean
or digital output (DO) variables can appear any number of places in the
compiled code.

Use the following commands to turn on and off s1_low, a digital flag.

ON (s1_low); LATCH (s1_low); CLEAR (s1_low);

NOTE: Do not use a digital flag on the left side of an assignment statement.

5-14 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 DF

Defining DF When you select Digital Flag, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: DF S Digital flag

Address:
Description:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Digital Flag.
Series 500 and Series 505 modules that use this I/O type include 8DO,
16DO, 32DO, 110VO, 110VR, 120VR, 24VDC.
For S5, all digital output cards can use this type.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %Q0.0--127.7. The % sign must be included in the address. For Series
500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the Module
Definition Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).

NOTE: For S5 controllers, APT digital flags are stored in the PIQ area, so S5
controllers do not need the Image Register for DFs. If you want to test your S5
program without I/O connected, enter No to the “System stop if addressing error
occurs” option in the Compiler Control file. After this selection is downloaded to the
controller, you must do a COLDSTART.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-15

DI

5.6 Digital Input

Using Digital Input Digital Input (DI) is a signal from the field to the controller that reflects the
(DI) status of field equipment, such as the position of a valve or the input from a
limit switch.

Availability DIs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

Digital Input is a read-only boolean value that is either true or false and
represents a discrete value such as on/off, open/closed, or running/stopped.

A DI symbolic name can be used in an SFC transition to detect the status of

equipment and can be configured as feedback for a field device. See
Chapter 6 for information about inputs used as device feedback.

Defining DI When you select Digital Input, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: DI S Digital input

Address:
Description:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Digital Input.
Series 500 and Series 505 modules that use this I/O type include 8DI, 16DI,
32DI, 110VO, 110VR, 120VR, 24VDC, INTRP, SLICE, USER, SREGB, and
SVRTB.
For S5, all digital input cards can use this type.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %I0.0--127.7. The % sign must be included in the address. For Series
500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the Module
Definition Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).

NOTE: For S5 controllers, digital inputs are stored in the PII area, so S5 controllers
do not need the Image Register for DIs. If you want to test your S5 program without
I/O connected, enter No to the “System stop if addressing error occurs” option in the
Compiler Control file. After this selection is downloaded to the controller, you must
do a COLDSTART.

5-16 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 DO

5.7 Digital Output

Using Digital Digital Output (DO) is a signal from the controller that changes the on/off
Output (DO) state of field equipment.

Availability DOs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

Digital Output is a read/write boolean value that is either true or false and
represents discrete values such as on/off, open/shut, or start/stop.

A DO symbolic name can be used in an SFC step or Math statement to

change the status of equipment. A DO can also be configured as the output
for a field device. See Chapter 7 for information about device outputs.

Defining DO When you select Digital Output, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: DO S Digital output

Address:
Description:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Digital Output.
Series 500 and Series 505 modules that use this I/O type include 8DO, 16DO,
32DO, 110VO, 110VR, 120VR, 24VDC, NIM, HSPI, SLICE, USER, SREGB,
and SVRTB.
For S5, all digital output cards can use this type.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %Q0.0--127.7. The % sign must be included in the address. For Series
500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the Module
Definition Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).

NOTE: For S5 controllers, digital outputs are stored in the PIQ area, so S5
controllers do not need the Image Register for DOs. If you want to test your S5
program without I/O connected, enter No to the “System stop if addressing error
occurs” option in the Compiler Control file. After this selection is downloaded to the
controller, you must do a COLDSTART.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-17

WI

5.8 Word Input

Using Word Input Word Input (WI) is a signal from the field to the controller that is a
(WI) read-only integer. Because it does not require special processing, Word
Input does not include scaling or filtering information.

Availability WIs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

A WI symbolic name can be used in a CFB, in an SFC transition, or in a

Math statement as the parameter to a function such as BITTEST. A WI
symbolic name has the extensions listed in Table 5-7.

Table 5-7 WI Extensions

Extension Definition
name converted, integer value
name.IO image register value (Image Register option1)
1 Used by S5 only.

Defining WI When you select Word Input, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: WI S Word input:

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Word Input.
Series 500 and Series 505 modules that use this I/O type include 8WI, 16WI,
ASCII, BASIC, DCOMM, HSPI, PLINK, SERVO, HSC, H1, USER, ATM,
ESP, TURBO, HSPID, SREG, and SVRT.
For S5, all digital input cards can use this type.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %IW0--126. The most commonly used
area for word inputs is %IW0--126. The % sign must be included in the address. For
Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the
Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your WI to OSx. If your I/O is connected, the image register is
updated with the I/O values every program scan. This option is not necessary in
order to test programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller
already has that ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).

5-18 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 WO

5.9 Word Output

Using Word Output Word Output (WO) is a signal from the controller to a process-control device
(WO) that is a read/write integer. Because it does not require special processing,
Word Output does not include scaling or filtering information.

Availability WOs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The
symbol names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your
controller type; however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

A WO symbolic name can be used in an SFC step, in a Math statement, or

in a CFB. If you assign a value to a WO, the value must be an integer. A
WO symbolic name has the extensions listed in Table 5-8.

Table 5-8 WO Extensions

Extension Definition
name converted, integer value
name.IO image register value (Image Register option1)
1 Used by S5 only.

Defining WO When you select Word Output, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: WO S Word output:

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Word Output.
Series 500 and Series 505 modules that use this I/O type include 8WO,
16WO, 8WOSF, ASCII, BASIC, DCOMM, HSPI, PLINK, SERVO, HSC, H1,
USER, ATM, ESP, TURBO, HSPID, SREG, SREGB, SVRT, SVRTB.
For S5, all digital output cards can use this type.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %QW0--126. The most commonly used
area for word outputs is %QW0--126. The % sign must be included in the address.
For Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the
Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your WO to OSx and evaluate your WO using Debug. However, if your
WO module is not connected, then the error OB must be programmed, or else the
controller will go into STOP mode. This option is not necessary in order to test
programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller already has that
ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-19

BI

5.10 Binary-coded Decimal Input

Using Binary-coded Decimal Input (BI) is a signal from the field to the controller
Binary-coded that represents a decimal number that has been coded into a binary
Decimal Input (BI) representation.

Availability BIs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

Binary-coded decimal inputs are most commonly used to get thumbwheel

information into the program. If you declare your BCD input as a BI I/O
type, then APT converts the BCD value to an integer. The BI symbolic name
contains this converted integer, which can be used in the math language of
an SFC step or a CFB.

The BI symbolic name has the extensions listed in Table 5-9. Notice that the
name.RAW contains the binary value, while the symbolic name contains the
converted integer.

Table 5-9 BI Extensions

Extension Definition
name converted, integer value (read-only)
name.IO image register value (Image Register option1)(read-only)
name.RAW raw, integer value of BCD input from module (read-only)
1 Used by S5 only.

5-20 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BI

Defining BI When you select Binary-coded Decimal Input, this form appears, as shown
below.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: BI S BCD Input

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:
Eng. Units:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Binary-coded Decimal Input.
The Series 500 and Series 505 module that uses this I/O type is 8WI.
For S5, this I/O type is used by digital input cards.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %IW0--126. The most commonly used
area for BCD inputs is %IW0--126. The % sign must be included in the address. For
Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the
Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your BI to OSx. If your I/O is connected, the image register is updated
with the I/O values every program scan This option is not necessary in order to test
programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller already has that
ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe units of final value
(eight characters maximum).

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-21

BO

5.11 Binary-coded Decimal Output

Using Binary-coded Decimal Output (BO) is a signal from the controller to a

Binary-coded process-control device such as a BCD display. A Binary-coded Decimal
Output (BO) Output is a binary number represented as a 16-bit integer and coded into a
decimal representation.

Availability BOs are available for Series 500 I/O, Series 505 I/O, and S5 I/O. The symbol
names and their use in APT are the same regardless of your controller type;
however, the actual I/O addresses are different.

A BO symbolic name is used as an output from a CFB or in an SFC step or

Math statement. A BO symbolic name has the extensions listed in
Table 5-10. Notice that the BO I/O type receives an integer output value and
converts it to the BCD format before sending it to the BCD display.

Table 5-10 BO Extensions

Extension Definition
name binary value of integer
name.IO image register value (Image Register option1)

name.OUT integer that represents BCD value that is sent to the field
(read only)
1 Used by S5 only.

5-22 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BO

Defining BO When you select Binary-coded Decimal Output, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: BO S BCD Output

Address: Image Register: [ ] {S5 only}
Description:
Eng. Units:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Binary-coded Decimal Output.
The Series 500 and Series 505 module that uses this I/O type is 8WO.
For S5, this I/O type is used by digital output cards.
Address: you can only edit this field if you have an S5 controller. For S5, valid
addresses are %PW0--254, %OW0--254, and %QW0--126. The most commonly used
area for BCD outputs is %OW0--126. The % sign must be included in the address.
For Series 500/505, addresses are not assigned on this form; they are assigned in the
Module Definition Table.
Image Register: this field only appears for S5 controllers. When the image register
is selected (X), you can test your program without connecting up your I/O. You can
also translate your BO to OSx and evaluate your BO using Debug. However, if your
BO module is not connected, then the error OB must be programmed, or else the
controller will go into STOP mode. This option is not necessary in order to test
programs with I/O disconnected for Series 500/505; the controller already has that
ability.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe units of final value
(eight characters maximum).

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-23

RT

5.12 Resistance Temperature Detector

Using Resistance Resistance Temperature Detector (RT) is a signal from the field to the
Temperature controller that represents an analog-to-digital conversion of the input
Detector (RT) temperature. This is a symbolic name type that is used specifically for the
inputs to an RTD module.

Availability RTs are available for Series 500 and Series 505 I/O only.

An RT symbolic name can be used in an SFC step or Math statement or can

be configured in a CFB. An RT symbolic name has the extensions listed in
Table 5-11.

Table 5-11 RT Extensions

Extension Definition

name1 scaled, processed (filtered) real value (read-only)

name.FTAU 1 time constant that indicates rate for filter (read/write)
name.RAW raw integer input from module (read-only)
name.SRV 1 raw, scaled value before filter (read-only)
1 Not available for the 560/560T controllers.

When you reference the symbolic name of an RT in your program, APT uses
the scaled value for all but the 560/560T; the scaling is updated each time
the associated SFPGM is executed. Any program attempts to modify this
scaled value are overwritten by the system. The 560/560T controllers, which
do not scale inputs, use the raw integer input, name.RAW, from an RTD
module.

NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Series 500 or Series 505 RTD manual for
configuration information.

5-24 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RT

Defining RT When you select Resistance Temperature Detector (for the Series 500), this
(Series 500) form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: RT S Resist Temp Detector

Address:
Description:
RTD type (alpha): S
Filter: [ ] Time Constant: 1.0 sec
Eng. Units: IS Integer Range: F S Full 1000 deg. C
Start temp: A S --200 deg. C

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Resistance Temperature Detector.
The module that uses this I/O type is RTD.
Address: you cannot edit this field; address is assigned in the Module Definition
Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
RTD type: code that represents mode of operation of RTD as listed below.
1 100 ohm Platinum, 0.003850 ohm/ohm/C
2 100 ohm Platinum, 0.003916 ohm/ohm/C
3 100 ohm Platinum, 0.003902 ohm/ohm/C
4 100 ohm Nickel, 0.006720 ohm/ohm/C
5 100 ohm Platinum, 0.003900 ohm/ohm/C
Filter: X indicates that you want to filter the input with a first-order exponential
filter at a rate determined by a specified time constant.
Time Constant: real number that indicates rate in seconds at which you want to
filter input; field appears only if you select Filter.
Engineering Units: code that represents the output format, as listed below;
default is C.
C Degrees Centigrade F Degrees Fahrenheit
O Ohms I Integer
Integer Range: code that represents range of the temperature being monitored, as
listed below; default is F; field appears if you select Integer for units.
F Full 1000 deg C. H Half 500 deg C.
Q Quarter 250 deg C. E Eighth 125 deg C.
Start Temp: code that represents lowest value in temperature range being
monitored, as listed below; default is A; field appears if you select Integer for units.
A --200 deg C. E 300 deg C.
B --75 deg C. F 425 deg C.
C 50 deg C. G 550 deg C.
D 175 deg C. H 675 deg C.

You cannot edit the Name or Type fields of an RT I/O tag you have marked
for OSx (PCS) translation unless you first unmark the tag.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-25

RT

Resistance Temperature Detector (continued)

Defining RT When you select Resistance Temperature Detector (for the Series 505), this
(Series 505) form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: RT S Resist Temp Detector

Address:
Description:
Probe type: P S Platinum
Filter: [ ] Time Constant: 1.0 sec
Eng. Units: 0 S Ohms
Ohms: A 100, 120, 130, 200, 500, or 1000 Ohm

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Resistance Temperature Detector
The module that uses this I/O type is 8RTD or 16RTD.
Address: you cannot edit this field; address is assigned in the Module Definition
Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
RTD type: code that represents material of which RT is composed:
P Platinum
N Nickel
C Copper
Filter: X indicates that you want to filter the input with a first-order exponential
filter at a rate determined by a specified time constant.
Time Constant: real number that indicates rate (in seconds) at which you want to
filter input; field appears only if you select Filter.
Engineering Units: code that represents the output format, as listed below;
default is C.
C Degrees Centigrade: different ranges for the different types of RTD.
F Degrees Fahrenheit: different ranges for the different types of RTD.
Platinum Copper Nickel
C --200.0 to 850.0 --200.0 to 260.0 --80.0 to 275.0
F --328.0 to 1562.0 --328.0 to 50.0 --112.0 to 527.0
O Ohms: Resistance measurements
A ohms x 100 Range 1.0 to 2000.0
B ohms x 10 Range 1.0 to 320.0
I Integer: scaled integer Range 0.0 to 32000.0
You cannot edit the Name or Type fields of an RT I/O tag you have marked
for PCS translation unless you first unmark the tag.

5-26 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TC

5.13 Thermocouple

Using Thermocouple (TC) is a signal from the field to the controller that
Thermocouple (TC) represents a thermocouple voltage. This a symbolic name type that is used
specifically for the inputs to a thermocouple module.

Availability TCs are available for Series 500 and Series 505 I/O only.

A TC symbolic name can be used in an SFC step or Math statement or can

be configured in a CFB. A TC symbolic name has the extensions listed in
Table 5-12.

Table 5-12 TC Extensions

Extension Definition

name 1 scaled, processed (filtered) real value (read-only)

name.FTAU 1 time constant that indicates rate for filter (read/write)
name.RAW raw integer input from module (read-only)
name.SRV 1 raw, scaled value before filter (read-only)
1 Not available for the 560/560T controllers.

When you reference the symbolic name of a TC in your program, APT uses
the scaled value for all but the 560/560T; the scaling is updated each time
the associated SFPGM is executed. Any program attempts to modify this
scaled value are overwritten by the system. The 560/560T controllers, which
do not scale inputs, use the raw integer input, name.RAW, from a
thermocouple module.

The TC behaves differently depending on whether it is attached to a

Series 500 or a Series 505 Thermocouple Module. Until the I/O point is
connected, the TC behaves as a Series 500 module point.

NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Series 500 or Series 505 thermocouple

manual for configuration information.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-27

TC

Thermocouple (continued)

Defining TC When you select Thermocouple (for the Series 500), this form appears:
(Series 500)

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TC S Thermocouple

Address:
Description:
Sub type: J S
Span: A (A,B,C,D)
Eng. Units: C (Celsius -- C, Fahrenheit --F)
Format: I (Scaled -- S, Integer -- I)
Filter: [ ] Time Constant: sec

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Thermocouple.
The module that uses this I/O type is TC.
Address: you cannot edit this field; address is assigned in the Module Definition
Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Sub Type: code that represents type of input to the module as listed below.
J Probe Type J S Probe Type S
K Probe Type K B Probe Type B
T Probe Type T E Probe Type E
R Probe Type R N Probe Type N
Span: code (A,B,C, or D) that represents a voltage span for millivolt inputs or a
temperature span for thermocouple inputs; default is A. For more information about
these spans, see the manual that comes with the thermocouple module.
Engineering Units: code that represents the temperature format as listed below.
C Degrees Centigrade
F Degrees Fahrenheit
Format: code that represents the output format as listed below.
S Scaled -- Corresponds to the thermocouple “Degree” format
I Integer -- Corresponds to the thermocouple “Integer” format
Filter: X indicates you want to filter the input with a first-order exponential filter
at a rate determined by a specified time constant.
Time Constant: real number that indicates rate in seconds at which you want to
filter input; field appears only if you select Filter.

You cannot edit the Name, Type, or Engineering Units fields of an TC I/O
tag you have marked for OSx (PCS) translation unless you first unmark the
tag.

5-28 I/O Symbolic Names APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TC

Defining TC When you select Thermocouple (for the Series 505), this form appears:
(Series 505)

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TC S Thermocouple

Address:
Description:
Sub type: J S
Span: A (A,B,C,D)
Eng. Units: C (Celsius -- C, Fahrenheit --F)
Format: I (Scaled -- S, Integer -- I)
Filter: [ ] Time Constant: sec

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: 2-letter code for Thermocouple.
The module that uses this I/O type is TC.
Address: you cannot edit this field; address is assigned in the Module Definition
Table.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Sub Type: code that represents type of input to the module as listed below.
J Probe Type J S Probe Type S
K Probe Type K E Probe Type E
T Probe Type T N Probe Type N
R Probe Type R
Span: code that represents a temperature span for thermocouple inputs. The only
span available for a Series 505 TC is A. For more information about this span, see
the manual that comes with the thermocouple module.
Engineering Units: code that represents the temperature format as listed below.
C Degrees Centigrade
F Degrees Fahrenheit
Format: code that represents the output format as listed below.
S Scaled -- Corresponds to the thermocouple “Engineering Units” format
I Integer -- Corresponds to the thermocouple “Scaled Integer” format
Filter: X indicates you want to filter the input with a first-order exponential filter
at a rate determined by a specified time constant.
Time Constant: real number that indicates rate in seconds at which you want to
filter input; field appears only if you select Filter.

You cannot edit the Name, Type, or Engineering Units fields of an TC I/O
tag you have marked for OSx (PCS) translation unless you first unmark the
tag.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) I/O Symbolic Names 5-29

 Chapter 6
Device Definitions
6.1 Basic Operation of Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Devices Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
6.2 Device Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Auto Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Changing Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Changing States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.3 Device Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Override Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Reset Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Null Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Single Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
6.4 Device Power Fail Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power-Fail Recovery Logic for Series 505 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Power-Fail Recovery Logic for S5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
6.5 Device Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-1

6.1 Basic Operation of Devices

Overview An APT device is an object that uses a collection of I/O points to monitor and
manipulate a field device, such as a valve, motor, cylinder, or press.

APT valves, motors, cylinders, and presses have two basic modes of
operation.

 Manual mode indicates that a field device can be controlled by an

operator.

 Auto mode indicates that the field device is under the control of the
controller from a Sequential Function Chart, or from a Continuous
Function Block.

The State Control Language and the Math Language include commands
that you use to manipulate the field devices in auto mode. These commands
have no effect in manual mode. APT also provides dot extensions that are
appended to device names and used to monitor and control the field devices.
In auto mode, commands take precedence over assignments made to
extension variables.

6-2 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 The Device Definition Utility allows you to define and name APT devices in
your process and to define the I/O points that control the corresponding field
devices. Before you compile a program, the field I/O points associated with
the APT device must also be defined in the Module Definition Table
(for Series 505 controllers), or in the I/O Symbolic Name Table (for S5
controllers). See Figure 6-1 and Figure 6-2.

A Device Definition Table is available at both the Program Level and at the
Unit Content Level. Devices defined at the Program Level can be referenced
in any unit in that program. Devices defined at the Unit Level can be
referenced only within that unit.

Each device type is described in detail in Chapter 7, which also shows the
form that you use in configuring a device. You cannot edit the Name or Type
fields in these forms if you have already marked the device for OSx (PCS)
tag translation.

Availability All APT devices (valves, motors, cylinders, presses, and stopwatch timers)
are supported for both Series 505 and S5 controllers.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-3

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Program Level
Device Definition Table
Name: V10 Type: VSS Valve single drive / single feedback
Description:
Energized state: O Open
Open/Close command: V10_OC
Open/Close limit switch: V10_OLS
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC?: [ ] Program Level
Open/Close alarm time: 0.5 seconds
Module Definition Table
Channel: 1
Base: 1
V10_OC Slot: 6
or
V10.CMMD
Pos Address I/O Name Unit
1Y0041 V10_OC
V10 V10_OLS 2Y0042
. :
or
V10.OLS . :
. :
8Y0048

Program Level
I/O Symbolic name: V10_OLS
Physical Address: X0049 Module Definition Table
Channel: 1
Base: 1
I/O Symbolic name:
Slot: 7
V10_OC
Physical Address: Y0041 Pos Address I/O Name Unit
1X0049 V10_OLS
2X0050
. :
. :
. :
8X0056

Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table

Name Type Address

P C 8 8 V10_OLS DI X0049
/ P D D V10_OC DO Y0041
S U O I

Figure 6-1 Devices, Modules, and I/O Symbolic Names For Series 505 Controllers

6-4 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Program Level
Device Definition Table
Name: V10 Type: VSS Valve single drive / single feedback
Description:
Energized state: O Open
Open/Close command: V10_OC
Open/Close limit switch: V10_OLS
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC?: [ ]
Open/Close alarm time: 0.5 seconds

V10_OC
or
V10.CMMD

V10 V10_OLS
or
V10.OLS

I/O Symbolic name: V10_OLS

Physical Address: I12.1

I/O Symbolic name:

V10_OC
Physical Address: Q10.1

Program Level
I/O Symbolic Name Table

C 8 8 Name Type Address

P D D V10_OLS DI I12.1
U O I V10_OC DO Q10.1

SIMATIC S5 SIEMENS

P/S

Figure 6-2 Devices and I/O Symbolic Names For S5 Controllers

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-5

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Devices Types Table 6-1 lists characteristics of the APT devices provided by the system. If
none of these devices fit your application, you can control and monitor field
devices with Math Language statements in a math or interlock CFB.

Table 6-1 APT Devices

Device Type APT Code Failed State

Valves
Hand Valve/Dual-Feedback VND
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback (Energize Open) VSN (Type O) Closed
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback (Energize Closed) VSN (Type C) Open
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback (Energize Open) VSS (Type O) Closed
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback (Energize Closed) VSS (Type C) Open
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Open) VSD (Type O) Closed
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Closed) VSD (Type C) Open
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback VDD Closed
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback VMD Closed
Three-Position Low/High/Dual-Feedback BV1 Closed
Three-Position Open/Position/Dual-Feedback BV2 Closed
User-defined VUD User-defined
Motors
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback MSN Stopped
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback MSS Stopped
Dual-Drive/Null-Feedback MDN Stopped
Dual-Drive/Single-Feedback MDS Stopped
Reversible Forward/Reverse/Dual-Feedback RM1 Stopped
Reversible Drive/Direction/Dual-Feedback RM2 Stopped
Two-Speed Low/High/Dual-Feedback TS1 Stopped
Two-Speed Drive/Speed/Dual-Feedback TS2 Stopped
User-defined MUD User-defined
Cylinder
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Extend) CSD (Type E) Retracted
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Retract) CSD (Type R) Extended
User-defined CUD User-defined

6-6 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-1 APT Devices (continued)

Device Type APT Code Failed State

Press
Hand Press/Dual-Feedback PND
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback (Energize Raise) PSN (Type R) Down
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback (Energize Lower) PSN (Type L) Up
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback (Energize Raise) PSS (Type R) Down
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback (Energize Lower) PSS (Type L) Up
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Raise) PSD (Type R) Down
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback (Energize Lower) PSD (Type L) Up
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback PDD Down
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback PMD Down
Three-Position Low/High/Dual-Feedback PS1 Down
Three-Position Raise/Position/Dual-Feedback PS2 Down
User-defined PUD User-defined
Stopwatch
Timer TMR

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-7

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Commands All devices have associated commands in the State Control Language that
you use to control the device when it is in auto mode. Commands have no
effect in manual mode. You can use commands from the parallel section of
an SFC step or a math block that generates RLL code. Table 6-2 lists the
device commands with the corresponding APT device types.

Table 6-2 APT Device Commands

Command Action Devices

Valve Commands
LOCK Place in auto mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
UNLOCK Place in manual mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
OPEN Open valve VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD VUD
OPENA Open option A VUD
OPENB Open option B VUD
OPENH Open high, option H BV1/2 VUD
OPENL Open low, option L BV1/2 VUD
CLOSE Close valve VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
Clear feedback overrides,
RESET VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
trigger alarm timer to reset
Motor Commands
LOCK Place in auto mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
UNLOCK Place in manual mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
START Start motor MSN MSS MDN MDS MUD
STARTF Start forward RM1/2
STARTR Start reverse RM1/2
STARTH Start high TS1/2
STARTL Start low TS1/2
STOP Stop motor MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
Clear feedback overrides,
RESET MSS MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
trigger alarm timer to reset
Cylinder Commands
LOCK Place in auto mode CSD CUD
UNLOCK Place in manual mode CSD CUD
EXTEND Extend piston CSD CUD
RETRACT Retract piston CSD CUD
Clear feedback overrides,
RESET CSD CUD
trigger alarm timer to reset

6-8 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-2 APT Device Commands (continued)

Command Action Devices

Press Commands
LOCK Place in auto mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
UNLOCK Place in manual mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
RAISE Raise press PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PUD
RAISEA Raise option A PUD
RAISEB Raise option B PUD
RAISEH Raise high, option H PS1/2 PUD
RAISEL Raise low, option L PS1/2 PUD
LOWER Lower press PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
Clear feedback overrides,
RESET PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
trigger alarm timer to reset
Stopwatch Commands
START Start stopwatch TMR
STOP Stop stopwatch TMR
HOLD Hold current count TMR
CONT Continue count TMR
CONTINUE Continue count TMR
RESET Clear current count TMR

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-9

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Extensions All APT devices have associated extension variables that can be used to
monitor and control the operation of a field device. APT creates these
variables by appending a dot extension to the APT device name. These
extensions create two types of bit variables.

 Status bits, which are read-only boolean values, allow you to monitor
the condition of the device. These include output bits, position bits,
feedback inputs, and fail bits.

 Command bits, which are read-write boolean values, change the

condition of the field device. When you use the commands associated
with the device, the commands manipulate the command-bit
extensions.

All of the following methods can be used to change the state of a device;
however, since commands overwrite APT flags and boolean extensions, do
not try to control a device using a mixed-method approach.

Method Example
Use a command in an SFC Lock valve_1;
Use a command in MATH (RLL only) Lock (valve_1);
Use an APT flag On (valve_1.RTL);
Use a boolean extension valve_1.LOCKD := true;

Use the commands, rather than the command-bit extensions, to control the
mode of the device. Use the APT flags and any of the boolean extensions to
monitor the status of the device. If you use an APT flag extension, you must
use the LATCH, ON, and CLEAR math procedures, described in the chapter
called “Math Functions and Procedures” in the SIMATIC APT Programming
Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual.

The stopwatch device has other types of extensions that are explained in the
“Stopwatch” section of Chapter 7 in this manual.

6-10 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 When you want to manipulate a field device, you can use commands that
allow you to execute an action on an object from the parallel section of an
SFC step or a math block that generates RLL code for Series 505
controllers, or STL code for S5 controllers. You can also use math procedures
to control the APT flag extensions of an object. Refer to Figure 6-3. In this
example, v10 opens when Step 1 becomes active. When the status bit
v10.OPND becomes true, indicating that the valve is actually open, the
program moves to Step 2.

Command APT device name

S1 OPEN v10;

T1 v10.OPND Dot extension:

position bit

S2
APT device name

Figure 6-3 Using Device Commands and Extensions

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-11

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-3 lists the valve extensions, their basic function, and the
corresponding valve types. Table 6-4 lists the motor extensions; Table 6-5
lists the cylinder extensions; Table 6-6 lists the press extensions; and
Table 6-7 lists the timer extensions.

! WARNING
APT does not prevent you from writing to read-only variables. If you write to
these variables, the controller overwrites them on the next scan with the
system-defined values.
Writing to read-only variables may cause your application to execute in an
unpredictable and unsafe manner that could result in death or serious injury
and/or property damage.
Understand what you are doing when you write to read-only variables.

6-12 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-3 Valve Extensions

Extension Definition Valve Types

Output Bits (Read-only)
.CMMD open/close command VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD VUD
.OPENC open command VDD VMD VUD
.SHIGH open high BV1
.SLOW open low BV1
.DRV open command BV2
.POS open position BV2
.CLSC close command VDD VMD VUD
Position Bits (Read-only)
.OPND opened VND VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.CLSD closed VND VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.OPNDA opened option A VUD
.OPNDB opened option B VUD
.OPNDH opened high, option H BV1/2 VUD
.OPNDL opened low, option L BV1/2 VUD
.TRVL traveling VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
Feedback Inputs (Read-only) 1

.OLS open feedback VND VSS 2 VSD VDD VMD VUD

.CLS closed feedback VND VSS 3 VSD VDD VMD VUD
.HIO open high feedback BV1/2
.LIO open low feedback BV1/2
Fail Bits (Read-only)
.FTO fail to open VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.FTC fail to close VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.FTOH fail to open high BV1/2
.FTOL fail to open low BV1/2
.FAILD failed VND VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
Operation Bits (Read/Write)
.DSBLD forced to manual mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.LOCKD auto mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.NRDY not ready VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.MOPEN manual open VND VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.MHIGH manual high BV1/2
.RTS stop the valve motor VMD
1 If the feedback inputs are not external discrete inputs (type DI), these bits are read/write.
2 Energize-open valve only
3 Energize-closed valve only

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-13

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-3 Valve Extensions (continued)

Extension Definition Valve Types

Override Bits (Read/Write)
.OVRD override feedback VSS
.OVRDO override open feedback VSD VDD VMD VUD
.OVRDC override closed feedback VSD VDD VMD VUD
override high, option H
.OVRDH BV1/2
feedback
override low, option L
.OVRDL BV1/2
feedback
.CRESET close reset VUD
.ORESET open reset VUD
Flags/Commands (Read/Write)
.RTL/LOCK place in auto mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.RTU/
place in manual mode VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
UNLOCK
.RTO/OPEN open valve VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD VUD
.RTOA/
open option A VUD
OPENA
.RTOB/
open option B VUD
OPENB
.RHIGH/
open high BV1/2 VUD
OPENH
.RLOW/
open low BV1/2 VUD
OPENL
.RTC/CLOSE close valve VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
clear feedback overrides,
.RESET/
trigger alarm timer to VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
RESET
reset

6-14 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-3 Valve Extensions (continued)

Extension Definition Valve Types

Timer Status (Read-only)
.CLSTO close timeout VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
.OPNTO open timeout VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
Timer Integer Current (Read-only)
close timer counter
current
.CTCC VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
open timer counter
current
.OTCC VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
Timer Integer Preset (Read/Write)
close timer counter preset
.CTCP (1 count equals 1/10 VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
second)
open timer counter preset
.OTCP (1 count equals 1/10 VSN VSS VSD VDD VMD BV1/2 VUD
second)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-15

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-4 Motor Extensions

Extension Definition Motor Types

Output Bits (Read-only)
.CMMD start/stop output MSN MSS MDN MDS MUD
.STRTC start output MDN MDS MUD
.STOPC stop output MDN MDS MUD
.SFWRD start forward output RM1
.SREV start reverse output RM1
.SHIGH start high output TS1
.SLOW start low output TS1
.DRV start output RM2 TS2
.DIR direction output RM2
.SPEED speed output TS2
Position Bits (Read-only)
.RUNNG running MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.RUNF running forward RM1/2
.RUNR running reverse RM1/2
.RUNH running high TS1/2
.RUNL running low TS1/2
.STPPD stopped MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.TRVL traveling MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
Feedback Inputs (Read-only) 1
.RUNIO run feedback MSS MDS MUD
.FIO forward feedback RM1/2
.RIO reverse feedback RM1/2
.HIO high feedback TS1/2
.LIO low feedback TS1/2
Fail Bits (Read-only)
.FTR fail to run MSS MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.FTS fail to stop MSS MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.FTRF fail to run forward RM1/2
.FTRR fail to run reverse RM1/2
.FTRH fail to run high TS1/2
.FTRL fail to run low TS1/2
.FAILD failed RM1/2 TS1/2
Operation Bits (Read/Write)
.DSBLD forced to manual mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.LOCKD auto mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.NRDY not ready MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.MSTRT manual start MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.MREV manual reverse RM1/2
.MHIGH manual high TS1/2
1 If the feedback inputs are not type DI, these bits are read/write.

6-16 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-4 Motor Extensions (continued)

Extension Definition Motor Types

Override Bits (Read/Write)
.OVRD override feedback MSS MDS MUD
override forward
.OVRDF RM1/2
feedback
.OVRDR override reverse feedback RM1/2
.OVRDH override high feedback TS1/2
.OVRDL override low feedback TS1/2
.RRESET run reset MUD
.SRESET stop reset MUD
Flags/Commands (Read/Write)
.RTL/LOCK place in auto mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.RTU/
place in manual mode MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
UNLOCK
.RTR/START start motor MSN MSS MDN MDS MUD
.RFWRD/
start forward RM1/2
STARTF
.RREV/
start reverse RM1/2
STARTR
.RHIGH/
start high TS1/2
STARTH
.RLOW/
start low TS1/2
STARTL
.RTS/STOP stop motor MSN MSS MDN MDS MUD
.RSTOP/STOP stop motor RM1/2 TS1/2
clear feedback overrides,
.RESET/
trigger alarm timer to MSS MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
RESET
reset
Timer Status (Read-only)
.STPTO stop timeout MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
.STRTO start timeout MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
Timer Integer Current (Read-only)
run timer counter
.RTCC current (1 count equals MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
1/10 second)
stop timer counter
.STCC current (1 count equals MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
1/10 second)
Timer Integer Preset (Read/Write)
run timer counter preset
.RTCP (1 count equals 1/10 MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
second)
stop timer counter preset
.STCP (1 count equals 1/10 MSN MSS MDN MDS RM1/2 TS1/2 MUD
second)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-17

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-5 Cylinder Extensions

Extension Definition Cylinder Types

Output Bits (Read-only)
.CMMD extend/retract command CSD CUD
.EXTC extend command CUD
.RETC retract command CUD
Position Bits (Read-only)
.EXTENDED extended CSD CUD
.RETRACTED retracted CSD CUD
.TRVL traveling CSD CUD
Feedback Inputs (Read-only) 1
.ELS extended feedback CSD CUD
.RLS retracted feedback CSD CUD
Fail Bits (Read-only)
.FTE fail to extend CSD CUD
.FTR fail to retract CSD CUD
.FAILD failed CSD CUD
Operation Bits (Read/Write)
.DSBLD forced to manual mode CSD CUD
.NRDY not ready CSD CUD
.LOCKD auto mode CSD CUD
.MEXTEND manual extend CSD CUD
Override Bits (Read/Write)
override extend
.OVRDE CSD CUD
feedback
override retract
.OVRDR CSD CUD
feedback
.ERESET extend reset CUD
.RRESET retract reset CUD
Flags/Commands (Read/Write)
.RTL/LOCK place in auto mode CSD CUD
.RTU/
place in manual mode CSD CUD
UNLOCK
.RTE/EXTEND extend cylinder CSD CUD
.RTR/
retract cylinder CSD CUD
RETRACT
clear feedback overrides,
.RESET/
trigger alarm timer to CSD CUD
RESET
reset
1 If the feedback inputs are not external discrete inputs (type DI), these bits are read/write.

6-18 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-5 Cylinder Extensions (continued)

Extension Definition Cylinder Types

Timer Status (Read-only)
.EXTTO extend timeout CUD
.RETTO retract timeout CUD
Timer Integer Current (Read-only)
extend timer counter
current
.ETCC CSD CUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
retract timer counter
current
.RTCC CSD CUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
Timer Integer Preset (Read/Write)
extend timer counter
preset
.ETCP CSD CUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
retract timer counter
preset
.RTCP CSD CUD
(1 count equals 1/10
second)
1 If the feedback inputs are not external discrete inputs (type DI), these bits are read/write.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-19

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-6 Press Extensions

Extension Definition Press Types

Output Bits (Read-only)
.CMMD raise/lower command PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PUD
.UPC raise command PDD PMD PUD
.SHIGH raise high PS1
.SLOW raise low PS1
.DRV raise command PS2
.POS raise position PS2
.DOWNC lower command PDD PMD PUD
Position Bits (Read-only)
.UP up PND PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.DOWN down PND PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.UPA up option A PUD
.UPB up option B PUD
.UPH up high, option H PS1/2 PUD
.UPL up low, option L PS1/2 PUD
.TRVL traveling PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
Feedback Inputs (Read-only) 1

.ULS up feedback PND PSS2 PSD PDD PMD PUD

.DLS down feedback PND PSS3 PSD PDD PMD PUD
.HIO open high feedback PS1/2
.LIO open low feedback PS1/2
Fail Bits (Read-only)
.FTR fail to raise PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.FTL fail to lower PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.FTRH fail to raise high PS1/2
.FTRL fail to raise low PS 1/2
.FAILD failed PND PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
Operation Bits (Read/Write)
.DSBLD forced to manual mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.LOCKD auto mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.NRDY not ready PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.MRAISE manual raise PND PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.MHIGH manual high PS1/2
.RTS stop the press motor PMD
1 If the feedback inputs are not external discrete inputs (type DI), these bits are read/write.
2 Energize-raise press only.
3 Energize-lower press only.

6-20 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Table 6-6 Press Extensions (continued)

Override Bits (Read/Write)

.OVRD override feedback PSS
.OVRDD override down feedback PSD PDD PMD PUD
.OVRDU override up feedback PSD PDD PMD PUD
override high option H
.OVRDH PS1/2
feedback
override low, option L
.OVRDL PS1/2
feedback
.URESET lower reset PUD
.DRESET raise reset PUD
Flags/Command (Read/Write)
.RTL / LOCK place in auto mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.RTU /
place in manual mode PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
UNLOCK
.RTO/RAISE raise press PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PUD
.RTOA/
raise option A PUD
RAISEA
.RTOB/
raise option B PUD
RAISEB
.RHIGH/
raise high PS1/2 PUD
RAISEH
.RLOW/
raise low PS1/2 PUD
RAISEL
.RTC/LOWER lower press PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
clear feedback overrides,
.RESET/
trigger alarm timer to PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
RESET
reset
Timer Status (Read-only)
.UPTO down timeout PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
.DOWNTO up timeout PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
Timer Integer Current (Read-only)
down timer counter
.DTCC current (1 count equals PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
1/10 second)
up timer counter
.UTCC current (1 count equals PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
1/10 second)
Timer Integer Preset (Read/Write)
down timer counter
.DTCP preset (1 count equals PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
1/10 second)
up timer counter preset
.UTCP (1 count equals 1/10 PSN PSS PSD PDD PMD PS1/2 PUD
second)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-21

Basic Operation of Devices (continued)

Table 6-7 Timer Extensions

Extension Definition Extension Definition

Read-only
.RUNNG running .GT true when (.CUR > .PSET)
.HOLD holding .EQ true when (.CUR = .PSET)
.MAXC maximum value reached .TOUT time out (.CUR ∫ .PSET)
Read/Write
.RATE tick rate of timer .CUR current timer count
.PSET preset

6-22 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

6.2 Device Modes

Manual Mode A field device is in manual mode whenever the .LOCKD bit for that device is
false. When the program is first downloaded to the controller, all devices are
in manual mode and set to the failed (de-energized) state, which is listed in
Table 6-1.

After the program is in the controller, the following conditions place a field
device in manual mode.

 The .DSBLD bit for that device is set to true.

 An UNLOCK command is issued for that device.

 The unit containing the device is disabled (unit_name.ENABL is false;

this applies only to APT devices local to a unit, not to APT devices
defined at the Program Level.)

A device remains in manual mode until a LOCK command places the device
in auto mode, or the device is interlocked (.NRDY is true). However, any one
of the above conditions takes precedence over a LOCK command and
prevents the object from leaving manual mode.

In manual mode, an operator can control a device by toggling the operation

bits (.MOPEN bit for valves, the .MSTRT bits for motors, the .MEXTEND bit for
cylinders, and .MRAISE for presses). These bits can also be manipulated from
the following types of CFBs: math, interlock, PID, or analog alarm.

 To open (start, extend, raise) the device, set the .MOPEN (.MSTRT,
.MEXTEND, or .MRAISE) bit to true.

 To close (stop, retract, lower) the device, set the .MOPEN (.MSTRT,
.MEXTEND, or .MRAISE) bit to false.

The OPEN/CLOSE (START/STOP, EXTEND/RETRACT, RAISE/LOWER)

commands have no effect in manual mode.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-23

Device Modes (continued)

Auto Mode A field device is in auto, or locked, mode whenever the .LOCKD bit is true. A
LOCK command places the device in auto mode if no manual-mode
conditions exist (page 6-23) and the device is interlocked (.NRDY is true).
After the device enters auto mode, it remains that way until any one of the
conditions that places the device in manual mode becomes true.

In auto mode, the state of a valve is controlled by the OPEN/CLOSE

commands. A motor is controlled by the START/STOP commands. A
cylinder is controlled by the EXTEND/RETRACT commands. A press is
controlled by the RAISE/LOWER commands.

Because the OPEN/CLOSE (START/STOP, EXTEND/RETRACT, and

RAISE/LOWER) commands are latched, it is not necessary to issue a
command continuously to keep a device in the desired state. If you issue
OPEN and CLOSE (START and STOP, EXTEND and RETRACT, RAISE
and LOWER) commands simultaneously, the command that takes the
device to its failed state takes precedence over the command that moves it
away from the failed state.

While a field device is in auto mode, the .MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, and
.MRAISE) bit follows the desired state. If the desired state is open (running,
extended, raised), .MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE) is forced to true;
otherwise, .MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE) is forced to false. While in
auto mode, the .MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE) bit cannot be changed
manually.

6-24 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Figure 6-4 shows the commands and dot extensions that determine the
mode of a device.

UNLOCK
Auto Mode
OPEN/CLOSE
(START/STOP) unit.ENABL = false
(EXTEND/RETRACT) (for unit-defined devices)
Manual Mode
(RAISE/LOWER)
.MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE)

.CMMD
.CMMD

.MOPEN (.MSTRT,
.MEXTEND, .MRAISE)
LOCK
.DSBLD = true

Figure 6-4 Manual and Auto Modes

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-25

Device Modes (continued)

Changing Modes When a field device is switched from manual mode to auto mode, the device
maintains the state that existed before the mode change. For example, if a
valve is open, it remains open to provide a bumpless transfer. If the valve is
in a traveling state, it remains in that state and continues toward the state
that was requested before the mode change.

If a LOCK command is issued at the same time that the manual-control

operation bit (.MOPEN/.MSTRT/.MEXTEND/.MRAISE) is toggled, the device
enters auto mode before the change is noticed. As a result, the device does
not change state; and the desired state is the same as it was before you
requested the mode change.

The way that the device behaves when switching from auto mode to manual
mode depends on how the .MOPEN/.MSTRT/.MEXTEND/.MRAISE bit is
controlled.

 If the bit is controlled from an operator station that does not

continuously write to the bit, switching from locked to manual mode is
identical to switching from manual to locked mode. (The device
maintains the state that existed before the mode change).

 If the bit is controlled directly by a switch or push button, the device

may begin traveling to a new state if the state indicated by the .MOPEN
(.MSTRT, .MEXTEND/.MRAISE) bit is not the same as the current state of
the device.

If an UNLOCK and an OPEN (START/EXTEND/RAISE) or a CLOSE

(STOP/RETRACT/LOWER) command are issued simultaneously, the device
enters manual mode before the open or close request is processed; as a
result, the device does not change state.

6-26 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Changing States There are two cases when a device can change state without operator action.

 If the .NRDY bit becomes true, the device is forced to the failed state
and the .MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE) bit shows the
corresponding failed-state value.

Commands or assignment statements that attempt to change the

.MOPEN (.MSTRT, .MEXTEND, .MRAISE) bit and move the device away
from its failed state are overridden while the .NRDY bit is true.

When .NRDY returns to false, the device remains in its failed state until
it receives a request to change.

 The second special case is when the power to the controller fails. In this
case, the device behaves exactly as if the .NRDY bit were true during
the power loss and returns to false when the power returns.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-27

6.3 Device Feedback

APT devices have feedback bits that indicate that the device has reached
the required state or position. A device has either no feedback bits (null
feedback, page 6-29), one feedback bit (single feedback, page 6-30), or two
feedback bits (dual feedback, page 6-32).

Override Bits Devices with feedback have override bits that allow you to ignore the
feedback status.

 Single-feedback devices have one override bit (.OVRD).

 Dual-feedback valves have two override bits (.OVRDO and .OVRDC).

 Batch values have two override bits (.OVRDH and .OVRDL).

 Reversible and two-speed motors each have two override bits

(.OVRDF/.OVRDR and .OVRDL/.OVRDH).

 Dual feedback cylinders have two override bits (.OVRDE and .OVRDR).

 Dual feedback presses have two override bits (.OVRDU and .OVRDD).

 Three-position presses have two overide bits (.OVRDH and .OVRDL).

If an override bit is true, the corresponding feedback bit is ignored. The

.TRVL bit operates like the null feedback device when the override bit is
true.

Reset Command The RESET command allows you to set all override bits to false. When the
SFC step or math section that contains this command is active, attempts to
change the override bits to true are ignored.

The RESET command also triggers the appropriate alarm timer to reset.
The .TRVL bit becomes true and the alarm time begins timing down. From
this point, the behavior of the device depends on the state of the override
bits.

6-28 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Null Feedback A null feedback device provides no indication that the device has actually
reached the desired state or position, but assumes the desired state has
been reached after the specified alarm time expires.

The desired position is determined by the .MOPEN (.MSTRT, MEXTEND,

.MRAISE) bit in manual mode or by the OPEN/CLOSE (START/STOP,
EXTEND/RETRACT, RAISE/LOWER) commands in auto mode.

Whenever the desired state of a null feedback device changes or the

controller returns from a power loss, the .TRVL bit for that device becomes
true and the alarm time begins timing down.

When the alarm time elapses, the .TRVL bit becomes false and the bit that
indicates the desired position becomes true: either .OPND or .CLSD
(correspondingly, either .RUNNG or STPPD, .EXTENDED or .RETRACTED, .UP
or .DOWN). That bit then remains true until either the desired state changes
or the controller loses power.

The logic for a null feedback device is shown in Appendix A.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-29

Device Feedback (continued)

Single Feedback A single-feedback device has one input that indicates whether or not the
device has actually reached the desired state, or position. Single-feedback
devices use the following feedback bits:

Device Feedback Bits

Energize-open Valve (O) .OLS
Energize-close Valve (C) .CLS
Motor .RUNIO
Energize-raise Press (R) .ULS
Energize-lower Press (L) .DLS

A feedback is expected to be true when the device is in its energized state;

otherwise, it is false.

Whenever the desired state of a single-feedback device changes or the

controller returns from a power loss, the .TRVL bit becomes true and the
alarm time begins timing down. From this point, the behavior of the device
depends on the state of the override (.OVRD) bit.

6-30 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 If .OVRD is false, the following actions occur.

 If the feedback bit indicates that the device is in the desired state, the
appropriate position or state bit listed below is true:

Device Position or State Bit

Valve .OPND .CLSD
Motor .RUNNG .STPPD
Press .UP .DOWN

 If the alarm time is expired and the feedback bit indicates that the
device is not in the desired state, the appropriate fail bit listed below is
true:

Device Fail Bit

Valve .FTO .FTC
Motor .FTR .FTS
Press .FTR .FTL

If the alarm time is not expired and the feedback bit is false, the .TRVL
bit is true.

If .OVRD is true, the feedback bit is ignored, and the device operates like a
null-feedback device.

When the step or math section that contains the RESET command is active,
the .OVRD bit is forced to false; attempts to change this bit to true are
overwritten.

When the step or math section that contains the RESET command becomes
inactive, the .OVRD bit remains false until changed by an operator station or
by the program.

The logic for a single-feedback device is shown in Appendix A.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-31

Device Feedback (continued)

Dual Feedback A dual-feedback device has two inputs that indicate whether or not the
device has actually reached the desired state or position. Dual-feedback
devices use the following feedback bits:

Device Feedback Bits

Valve .OLS .CLS
Batch Valve .HIO .LIO
Reversible Motor .FIO .RIO
Two-Speed Motor .LIO .HIO
Cylinder .ELS .RLS
Press .ULS .DLS
Three-Position Press .HIO .LIO

Whenever the desired state of a device changes or the controller returns

from a power loss, the .TRVL bit becomes true, and the alarm time begins
timing down. From this point, the behavior of the device depends on the
state of the following override bits:

Device Override Bits

Valve .OVRDO .OVRDC
Batch Valve .OVRDH .OVRDL
Reversible Motor .OVRDF .OVRDR
Two-Speed Motor .OVRDL .OVRDH
Cylinder .OVRDE .OVRDR
Press .OVRDU .OVRDD
Three-Position Press .OVRDH .OVRDL

Both override bits false. If both override bits are false, the following
actions occur.

 If the appropriate feedback input for the required position is true, the
corresponding position or state bit listed below is true:

Device Position or State Bit

Valve .OPND .CLSD
Batch Valve .OPNDH .OPNDL
Reversible Motor .RUNF .RUNR
Two-Speed Motor .RUNL .RUNH
Cylinder .EXTENDED .RETRACTED
Press .UP .DOWN
Three-Position Press .UPH .UPL

6-32 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

  If the alarm time is expired and the appropriate feedback input for the
desired position is false, the corresponding fail bit listed below is true:

Device Fail Bit

Valve .FTO .FTC
Batch Valve .FTOH .FTOL
Reversible Motor .FTRF .FTRR
Two-Speed Motor .FTRL .FTRH
Cylinder .FTE .FTR
Press .FTR .FTL
Three-Position Press .FTRH .FTRL

 If the alarm time is expired and both feedback bits are true, the .FAILD
bit is true.

 If the alarm time is not expired and neither feedback input is in the
desired state, the .TRVL bit is true.

Either override bit true. If either override bit is true, the state that is
overridden acts like a null-feedback device.

Both override bits true. If both override bits are true, the feedback bits
are ignored, and the device operates like a null-feedback device.

In switching the override bits between states, the position and fail bits
assume whatever status is correct for the current state of the command and
feedback bits.

When the SFC step or math section that contains the RESET command is
active, the override bits are forced to false; attempts to change these bits to
true are overwritten. When the SFC step or math section that contains the
RESET command becomes inactive, the override bits remain false until
changed by an operator station or by the program.

The logic for a dual-feedback device is shown in Appendix A.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-33

6.4 Device Power Fail Recovery

Power-Fail For Series 505 controllers, APT devices are based on non-retentive control
Recovery Logic for relays. However, the controller saves only the state of the retentive control
Series 505 relays during a power failure. For this reason, APT includes power-fail
recovery logic in the code for each device unless you select the
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) option in the Compiler Control file.
The power-fail recovery logic is represented by the .PFAIL control relays
shown in the figures of Appendix A, and provides a means of saving the
status of a device during a power failure.

APT executes the power-fail recovery logic for all APT devices during every
controller scan. For each device, the states of the device’s status control
relays are copied into a word in the Series 505 controller V-Memory.
V-Memory is one of the memory areas which is backed up by a battery when
there is no power to the controller. The APT designation for the V-Memory
location that stores device status is the .VFLAGS extension to the device.
After the recovery from a power failure, the device status data contained in
V-Memory is copied back into the appropriate control relays. All devices
then go to their safe-state positions.

NOTE: The device .VFLAGS extension, like the V-Flags used in the
controller’s analog alarm or loop code, is an integer word that stores status
information; the device .VFLAGS integer extension and the V-Flags for a loop
or analog alarm are not otherwise related.

APT does not generate power-fail recovery logic for user-defined devices. If
your process requires power-fail recovery logic, you can write code based on
the boolean extensions, status boolean array elements, or .VFLAGS integer
extension for your user-defined devices; see Section 6.5.

If you do select the UPS option in the Compile Control File, the states of the
device status control relays are not copied into V-Memory, and the .VFLAGS
extension does not contain meaningful information. After recovery from
power failure all devices enter the de-energized state and are unlocked. This
action is not controlled.

NOTE: The battery backup on your Series 505 controller must be enabled in
order for the controller to save data during a power failure.

6-34 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Power-Fail For S5 controllers, all memory used for APT devices is retentive.
Recovery Logic for Consequently, the power-fail recovery logic that writes the status of a device
S5 to the device’s .VFLAGS integer extension is not necessary. Also, APT does
not generate power-fail recovery logic for your devices if you have an S5
controller.

If your process requires power-fail recovery logic, you can write code based
on the boolean extensions or status boolean array elements of your devices;
see Section 6.5. For S5 controllers, the device .VFLAGS integer extension
does not exist.

After recovery from power failure, all S5 devices enter their de-energized
states and are unlocked. The devices must be unlocked and returned to
their desired position.

NOTE: The battery backup on your S5 controller must be enabled in order

for the controller to save data during a power failure.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-35

6.5 Device Status

You can monitor or change the status of a device by examining one of the
following memory locations.

 Device boolean extensions (read/write)

 Device status boolean array (read/write)

 Device .VFLAGS integer extension (read only) (Series 505 only)

NOTE: For S5 controllers, the device status boolean array is numbered

backwards from the Series 505. The examples in this section use the
Series 505 numbering. For example the MSS device .RUNNG extension maps
to .STATUS [1] for Series 505, and to .STATUS [16] for S5.

The boolean extension and the status boolean array represent two ways to
access the same memory location. For example, you can achieve the same
results by writing a value to a .DSBLD extension or by writing to the array
.STATUS [6].

You can do a bit test on the .VFLAGS extension of a device to examine the
status of the device. Because the .VFLAGS extension is read only, you cannot
change the status by writing to this extension.

The relationship of these different memory locations is shown for the APT
devices for Series 505 controllers in Figure 6-5 through Figure 6-8.

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

Boolean .FTR .LOCKD .TRVL

Extensions
.STPPD .FTS .DSBLD .OVRD

.RUNNG .NRDY .MSTRT

APT Motors MSN, MSS, MDS, MDN, MUD

Figure 6-5 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Motors

6-36 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 .STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]
Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9] .STATUS[13]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.OVRDR

Boolean .FTR .LOCKD .OVRDF .TRVL

Extensions
.STPPD .FTS .DSBLD .MREV .FAILD
.RUNNG .NRDY .MSTRT

APT Motors RM1, RM2

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9] .STATUS[13]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.OVRDL

Boolean .FTR .LOCKD .OVRDH .TRVL

Extensions
.STPPD .FTS .DSBLD .MHIGH .FAILD
.RUNNG .NRDY .MSTRT

APT Motors TS1, TS2

Figure 6-5 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Motors (continued)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-37

Device Status (continued)

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

Boolean .FTO .LOCKD .TRVL

Extensions
.CLSD .FTC .DSBLD .OVRD
.OPND .NRDY .MOPEN

APT Valves VSN, VSS, PSN, PSS

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.TRVL

Boolean .FTO .LOCKD .OVRDC .FAILD

Extensions
.CLSD .FTC .DSBLD .OVRDO
.OPND .NRDY .MOPEN

APT Valves VSD, VDD, VMD, VUD, VND

Figure 6-6 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Valves

6-38 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 .STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]
Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9] .STATUS[13]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.TRVL

Boolean .FTO .LOCKD .OVRDH .FAILD

Extensions
.CLSD .FTC .DSBLD .MHIGH .OVRDL
.OPND .NRDY .MOPEN

APT Valve BV1, BV2

Figure 6-6 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Valves (continued)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-39

Device Status (continued)

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.TRVL

Boolean .FTE .LOCKD .OVRDR .FAILD

Extensions
.RETRACTED .FTR .DSBLD .OVRDE
.EXTENDED .NRDY .MEXTEND

APT Cylinder CSD, CUD

Figure 6-7 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Cylinders

6-40 Device Definitions APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 .STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]
Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.FAILD

Boolean .FTR .LOCKD .OVRDD

Extensions
.DOWN .FTL .DSBLD .OVRDU .TRVL
.UP .NRDY .MRAISE

APT Presses PUD, PSD, PDD, PND, PMD

.STATUS[1] .STATUS[5] .STATUS[8] .STATUS[11]

Boolean
Array .STATUS[2] .STATUS[4] .STATUS[7] .STATUS[10] .STATUS[12]
Extensions
.STATUS[3] .STATUS[6] .STATUS[9] .STATUS[13]

.VFlags
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Extension
Bit Positions

.MHIGH .FAILD

Boolean .FTR .LOCKD .OVRDL

Extensions
.DOWN .FTL .DSBLD .OVRDH .TRVL
.UP .NRDY .MRAISE

APT Presses PS1, PS2

Figure 6-8 Memory Locations Showing Status for APT Presses

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Definitions 6-41

 Chapter 7
Device Types
7.1 Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2
Hand-Operated/Dual-Feedback Valve (VND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Valve (VSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Valve (VSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback Valve (VMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
User-defined Valve (VUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
7.2 Three-Position Valves with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Three-Position Valve/Type 1 (BV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Three-Position Valve/Type 2 (BV2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
7.3 Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Motor (MSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Motor (MSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Dual-Drive/Null-Feedback Motor (MDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-38
Dual-Drive/Single-Feedback Motor (MDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
User-defined Motor (MUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44
7.4 Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Reversible Motor/Type 1 (RM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Reversible Motor/Type 2 (RM2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
7.5 Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Two-Speed Motor/Type 1 (TS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56
Two-Speed Motor/Type 2 (TS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60
7.6 Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Cylinder (CSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
User-defined Cylinder (CUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68
7.7 Presses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Hand-Operated/Dual-Feedback Press (PND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72
Single-Drive/Null-Feedback Press (PSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Single-Drive/Single-Feedback Press (PSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-76
Single-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-80
Dual-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Motor-Drive/Dual-Feedback Press (PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-88
User-defined Press (PUD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-92
7.8 Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Three-Position Press/Type 1 (PS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Three-Position Press/Type 2 (PS2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
7.9 Stopwatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Using the Device Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-104
Timer (TMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-1

VND

7.1 Valves

Hand-Operated/ The VND device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by
Dual-Feedback two discrete feedback signals.
Valve (VND)
The two feedback signals consist of an open feedback signal (.OLS) and a
closed feedback signal (.CLS).

 The .OLS bit should be true when the valve is open and false when it is
closed.

 The .CLS bit should be true when the valve is closed and false when it
is open.

The .MOPEN extension shows the state of the valve.

 If the valve is open (.OLS=true), the control signal (.MOPEN) is set to

true.

 If the desired state is closed, (.CLS=true), the .MOPEN bit is set to false.

When you select VND in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:VND Hand Valve / dual feedback

Description:
Open limit switch: S
Close limit switch: S

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VND (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Open limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean or APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is open feedback signal.
Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean or APT flag variable, or device_name.CLS that is close feedback signal.

NOTE: The VND does not support the dual feedback logic. Refer to
Appendix A for the logic of a VND.

7-2 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VND

Table 7-1 lists the extensions and commands used with a VND device.

Table 7-1 VND Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean
.OPND opened
.CLSD closed
.OLS 1 open feedback
.CLS 2 closed feed back There are no commands.

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.MOPEN open/close status
.STATUS device status
1 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open
Limit Switch for energize-open valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.
2 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close
Limit Switch for energize-closed valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

Figure 7-1 shows how the input bits (on the left) affect the status bits
(across the bottom) and/or the output bits (on the right).

Commands and
.OLS operation bits
Open Limit determine outputs
Switch Input
Input, override, and .MOPEN
.CLS operation bits Open/Close
determine status Status
Close Limit
Switch Input

.OPND .FAILD
.CLSD

Figure 7-1 VND Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-3

VSN

Valves (continued)

Single-Drive/ The VSN device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by one
Null-Feedback discrete signal with no feedback. Two types of VSN devices are available:
Valve (VSN) energize-open (Type O) and energize-closed (Type C).

 If the desired state of an energize-open valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the field control signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

If the desired state is closed (.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

false.

 If the desired state of an energize-closed valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the control signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

If the desired state is closed (.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

true.

When you select VSN in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: VSN Valve single drive / null feedback

Description:
Energized state: O S Open
Open/Close command: S
Open/Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VSN (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: O indicates energize open; C indicates energize closed; default
is O.
Open/Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that opens and closes valve.
Open/Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates
number of seconds to allow valve to change states.
Table 7-2 lists the extensions and commands used with a VSN device.

7-4 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VSN

Table 7-2 VSN Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPND opened OPEN open valve
.CLSD closed CLOSE close valve
.TRVL traveling
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open/Close command.

Figure 7-2 shows how the operation bits (across the top) affect the status
bits (across the bottom) and/or the output bits (on the right).

OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK
.MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.DSBLD

Commands and
operation bits
determine outputs
.CMMD
Open/Close
Command
Output
Operation bit
determines status

.OPND .CLSD .TRVL

Figure 7-2 VSN Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-5

VSS

Valves (continued)

Single-Drive/ The VSS device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by a
Single-Feedback single discrete signal with one discrete feedback signal. Two types of VSS
Valve (VSS) devices are available: energize-open (Type O) and energize-closed (Type C).

 If the desired state of an energize-open valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the control signal (.CMMD) is set to true. If the desired state is closed
(.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to false.

The feedback signal for the energize-open valve (.OLS) should be true
when the valve is open and false when the valve is closed.

 If the desired state of an energize-close valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the control signal (.CMMD) is set to false. If the desired state is closed
(.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to true.

The feedback signal for the energize-close valve (.CLS) should be false
when the valve is open and true when the valve is closed.

 If the Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC option is selected, the .CMMD bit changes
to false when the .FTR becomes true. The .CMMD bit remains false until
a RESET command is issued.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

7-6 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VSS

When you select VSS in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: VSS Valve single drive / single feedback

Description:
Energized state: O S Open
Open/Close command: S
Open/Close limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC?: [ ]
Open/Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VSS (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: O indicates energize open; C indicates energize closed; default
is O.
Open/Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that opens and closes valve.
Open/Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is the feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g., open feedback is
false when the valve is opened.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC: the .CMMD bit becomes false when the .FTO or .FTC bit
becomes true.
Open/Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates
number of seconds to allow valve to change states.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-7

VSS

Valves (continued)

Table 7-3 lists the extensions and commands used with a VSS device.

Table 7-3 VSS Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPND opened OPEN open valve
.CLSD closed CLOSE close valve
.TRVL traveling RESET clear feedback override
.OLS 2 open feedback (O) and/or
d/ iissues open/close
/ l
command after .FTO or
.CLS 3 closed feedback (C) .FTC is true.
.FTO fail to open
.FTC fail to close
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRD override feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open/Close command.
2 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open
Limit Switch for energize-open valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.
3 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close
Limit Switch for energize-closed valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

7-8 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VSS

Figure 7-3 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK

.MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRD .DSBLD

.OLS Commands and

Open Limit operation bits
Switch Input determine outputs
(Type O) .CMMD
Input, override, and Open/Close
operation bits Command
.CLS Output
determine status
Close Limit
Switch Input
(Type C)

.OPND .CLSD .FTO .FTC .TRVL

Figure 7-3 VSS Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-9

VSD

Valves (continued)

Single-Drive/ The VSD device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by a
Dual-Feedback single discrete signal with two discrete feedback signals. Two types of VSD
Valve (VSD) devices are supported: energize-open (Type O) and energize-closed (Type C).

One control signal (.CMMD) determines the state of the valve.

 If the desired state of an energize-open valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the control signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

If the desired state is closed, (.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

false.

 If the desired state of an energize-closed valve is open (.MOPEN=true),

the control signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

If the desired state is closed, (.MOPEN=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

true.

 If the Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC option is selected, the .CMMD bit changes
to false when the .FTR becomes true. The .CMMD bit remains false until
a RESET command is issued.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

For both types of valves, the two feedback signals consist of an open
feedback signal (.OLS) and a closed feedback signal (.CLS).

 The .OLS bit should be true when the valve is open and false when it is
closed.

 The .CLS bit should be true when the valve is closed and false when it
is open.

7-10 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VSD

When you select VSD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:VSD Valve single drive / dual feedback

Description:
Energized state: O S Open
Open/Close command: S
Open limit switch: S
Close limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC?: [ ]
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VSD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: O indicates energize open; C indicates energize closed; default is
O.
Open/Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that opens and closes valve
Open limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is open feedback
signal.
Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.CLS that is close feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, open feedback is
false when the valve is opened.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC: the .CMMD bit becomes false when the .FTO or .FTC bit
becomes true.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to open.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to close.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-11

VSD

Valves (continued)

Table 7-4 lists the extensions and commands used with a VSD device.

Table 7-4 VSD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPND opened OPEN open valve
.CLSD closed CLOSE close valve
.TRVL traveling RESET clear feedback override
.OLS 2 open feedback (O) and/or
d/ iissue open/close
/ l
command after .FTO or
.CLS 3 closed feedback (C) .FTC is true.
.FTO fail to open
.FTC fail to close

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDO override open feedback
.OVRDC override closed feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open/Close command.
2 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open
Limit Switch for energize-open valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.
3 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close
Limit Switch for energize-closed valves. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

7-12 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VSD

Figure 7-4 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
.OLS operation bits
Open Limit determine outputs
Switch Input
(Type O)
Input, override, and .CMMD
operation bits Open/Close
.CLS determine status Command
Close Limit Output
Switch Input
(Type C)

.OPND .FTO .FAILD

.CLSD .FTC .TRVL

Figure 7-4 VSD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-13

VDD

Valves (continued)

Dual-Drive/ The VDD device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by two
Dual-Feedback discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.
Valve (VDD)
The two control signals consist of an open signal (.OPENC) and a close signal
(.CLSC), which are both normally false.

 If the desired state is open (.MOPEN=true), the .OPENC bit is set to true.
The .OPENC bit remains true until either the open feedback signal is
true or the open alarm time expires; then .OPENC is set to false.

 If the desired state is closed, the .CLSC bit is set to true to close the
valve. The .CLSC bit remains true until either the close feedback signal
is true or the close alarm time expires; then .CLSC is set to false.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an open feedback signal (.OLS) and a
closed feedback signal (.CLS).

 The .OLS bit should be true when the valve is open; otherwise, it should
be false.

 The .CLS bit should be true when the valve is closed; otherwise, it
should be false.

7-14 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VDD

When you select VDD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: VDD Valve dual drive / dual feedback

Description:
Open command: S
Close command: S
Open limit switch: S
Close limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VDD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Open command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.OPENC that opens valve.
Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CLSC that closes valve.
Open limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is open feedback
signal.
Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.CLS that is close feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, open feedback is
false when the valve is opened.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to open.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to close.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-15

VDD

Valves (continued)

Table 7-5 lists the extensions and commands used with a VDD device.

Table 7-5 VDD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPENC 1 open command OPEN open valve
.CLSC 2 close command CLOSE close valve
.OPND opened RESET clear feedback override
.CLSD closed
.TRVL traveling
.OLS 3 open feedback
.CLS 4 closed feedback
.FTO fail to open
.FTC fail to close

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.CLSTO close timeout
.OPNTO open timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDO override open feedback
.OVRDC override closed feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.OPENC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open command.
2 device_name.CLSC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Close command.
3 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-16 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VDD

Figure 7-5 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
.OLS operation bits .OPENC
Open Limit determine outputs Open
Switch Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.CLS operation bits .CLSC
Close Limit determine status
Close
Switch Input Command
Output

.OPND .FTO .FAILD

.CLSD .FTC .TRVL

Figure 7-5 VDD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-17

VMD

Valves (continued)

Motor-Drive/ The VMD device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by
Dual-Feedback two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.
Valve (VMD)
The two control signals consist of a start signal (.OPENC) and a stop signal
(.CLSC).

 If the desired state of the valve is open (.MOPEN=true), the .OPENC bit
is set to true until the open feedback is true or until the alarm time
expires; then .OPENC is set to false.

 If the desired state is closed (.MOPEN=false), the .CLSC bit is set to true
until closed feedback is true or until the alarm time expires; then .CLSC
is set to false.

 If the valve is stopped in mid-travel, the .TRVL bit remains true with
the open and close alarm times reset.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an open feedback signal (.OLS) and a
closed feedback signal (.CLS).

 The .OLS bit should be true when the valve is open; otherwise, it should
be false.

 The .CLS bit should be true when the valve is closed; otherwise, it
should be false.

The VMD valve can be stopped at any point of its travel by setting the .RTS
extension to true.

7-18 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VMD

When you select VMD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: VMD Valve motor drive / dual feedback

Description:
Open command: S
Close command: S
Open limit switch: S
Close limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor-driven valve (12 characters maximum)
Type: VMD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Open command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.OPENC that opens motor valve.
Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CLSC that closes motor valve.
Open limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is open feedback
signal.
Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.CLS that is close feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, open feedback is
false when the valve is opened.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to open; also indicates maximum time to keep open signal
true.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to close; also indicates maximum time to keep close signal
true.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-19

VMD

Valves (continued)

Table 7-6 lists the extensions and commands used with a VMD device.

Table 7-6 VMD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPENC 1 open command OPEN open valve
.CLSC 2 close command CLOSE close valve
.OPND opened RESET clear feedback override
.CLSD closed
.TRVL traveling
.OLS 3 open feedback
.CLS 4 closed feedback
.FTO fail to open
.FTC fail to close
.FAILD failed (both feedback bits are true)
.CLSTO close timeout
.OPNTO open timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDO override open feedback
.OVRDC override closed feedback
.STATUS device status
.RTS stop travel
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.OPENC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open command.
2 device_name.CLSC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close command.
3 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open Limit Switch. If feedback is
not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close Limit Switch. If feedback is
not a DI, this is read/write.

7-20 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VMD

Figure 7-6 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
.OLS operation bits .OPENC
Open Limit determine outputs Open
Switch Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.CLS operation bits .CLSC
Close Limit determine status
Close
Switch Input Command
Output

.OPND .FTO .FAILD

.CLSD .FTC .TRVL

Figure 7-6 VMD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-21

VUD

Valves (continued)

User-defined Valve The VUD device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by two
(VUD) discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The VUD is essentially the shell of a VDD device. The code which defines
the VDD has been reduced to a minimum, and extensions have been
provided to allow you to create your own customized valve and translate it
for OSx (PCS).

The VUD has two alarm timers. When the .ORESET (.CRESET) bit
transitions from false to true, the alarm timer starts. When the timer times
out, the .OPNTO (.CLSTO) bit becomes true, and remains true until the
.ORESET (.CRESET) bit becomes false.

7-22 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VUD

When you select VUD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: VUD Valve user defined

Description:
Open command: S
Close command: S
Open limit switch: S
Close limit switch: S
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: VUD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Open command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.OPENC that opens valve.
Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CLSC that closes valve.
Open limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.OLS that is open feedback
signal.
Close limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.CLS that is close feedback
signal.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to open.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to close.

Table 7-7 lists the extensions and commands used with a VUD device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-23

VUD

Valves (continued)

Table 7-7 VUD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands

Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode

.CMMD open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.OPENC 1 open command OPEN open valve
.CLSC 2 close command CLOSE close valve
.OPNDx 3 opened RESET clear feedback override
.CLSD closed OPENA open with option A
.TRVL traveling OPENB open with option B
.OLS 4 open feedback OPENH open high
.CLS 5 closed feedback OPENL open low
.FTO fail to open
.FTC fail to close
.FAILD failed (both feedback bits are true)
.OPNTO open alarm timer time out
.CLSTO close alarm timer time out
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDO override open feedback
.OVRDC override closed feedback
.ORESET open alarm timer reset
.CRESET close alarm timer reset
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.OPENC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open command.
2 device_name.CLSC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close command.
3 The extension is .OPNDx where x= A, x = B, x = H, or x = L.
4 device_name.OLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open Limit Switch. If feedback is
not a DI, this is read/write.
5 device_name.CLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close Limit Switch. If feedback is
not a DI, this is read/write.

7-24 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 VUD

Figure 7-7 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET OPEN/CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
.OLS operation bits .OPENC
Open Limit determine outputs Open
Switch Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.CLS operation bits .CLSC
Close Limit determine status
Close
Switch Input Command
Output

.OPNDx .FTO .FAILD

.CLSD .FTC .TRVL

.OPNDA when x = A
.OPNDB when x = B
.OPNDH when x = H
.OPNDL when x = L

Figure 7-7 VUD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-25

BV1

7.2 Three-Position Valves with Dual Feedback

Three-Position The BV1 device is a three-position valve (high, low, and closed) and is
Valve/Type 1 (BV1) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a low signal (.SLOW) and a high
signal (.SHIGH). The two signals cannot both be true at the same time.

 If the desired state of the valve is open at high position (.MOPEN=true

and .MHIGH=true), the .SHIGH bit is set to true (energized) to open the
valve at high position.

 If the desired state of the valve is open at low position (.MOPEN=true

and .MHIGH=false), the .SLOW bit is set to true (energized) to open the
valve at low position.

 If the desired state is closed (.MOPEN=false), the currently energized

signal (.SHIGH or .SLOW) is set to false.

 The valve, when receiving an open signal, starts opening and keeps
opening until the currently energized signal becomes false.

 You can change the position of a three-position valve without closing it.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an open-low feedback signal (.LIO) and
an open-high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the valve is open at the low position;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO bit should be true when the valve is open at the high position;
otherwise, it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.SLOW/.SHIGH) are set to the appropriate

state based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MOPEN bits, which you
manipulate from an operator station or from the program.

7-26 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BV1

In auto mode, the OPENL, OPENH, and CLOSE commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MOPEN bits are set to reflect
the last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if
the device changes modes.

When you select BV1 in the Device Definition Table, the form appears as
shown below.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: BV1 Three position valve / type 1

Description:
Low command: S
High command: S
Open/Verify low: S
Open/Verify high: S
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: BV1 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Low command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SLOW that opens valve at low position.
High command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SHIGH that opens valve a high position.
Open/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Open/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to change from closed to open.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to change from open to closed.

Table 7-8 lists the extensions and commands used with a BV1 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-27

BV1

Three-Positioned Valves with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-8 BV1 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.SLOW 1 open low UNLOCK place in manual mode
.SHIGH 2 open high OPENL open low
.OPND opened OPENH open high
.OPNDL opened low CLOSE close valve
.OPNDH opened high RESET clear feedback overrides
.CLSD closed
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTOL fail to open low
.FTOH fail to open high
.FTO 5 fail to open
.FTC fail to close
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.OPNTO open timeout
.CLSTO close timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.SLOW is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
low command.
2 device_name.SHIGH is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
high command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify low feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify high feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
5 The .FTO bit is set to true when either the .FTOL or .FTOH bit is true.

7-28 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BV1

Figure 7-8 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

OPENL/OPENH/
RESET CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .SLOW
Open/Verify determine outputs Open Low
Low Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .SHIGH
Open/Verify determine status
Open High
High Input Command
Output

.OPND .OPENL .FTO .FTOL .FAILD

.CLSD .OPENH .FTC .FTOH .TRVL

Figure 7-8 BV1 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-29

BV2

Three-Position Valves with Dual Feedback (continued)

Three-Position The BV2 device is a three-position valve (high, low, and closed) and is
Valve/Type 2 (BV2) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of an open/close signal (.DRV) and a
position signal (.POS) that determines whether the valve opens at high or
low position.

 If the desired state of the valve is open high (.MOPEN=true and

.MHIGH=true), the .DRV and .POS bits are both set to true.

 If the desired state is open low (.MOPEN=true and .MHIGH=false), the

.DRV bit is set to true and the .POS bit is set to false.

 If the desired state is closed (.MOPEN=false), the .DRV bit is set to false
to close the valve.

 The valve, when receiving an open signal, starts opening and keeps
opening until .DRV becomes false.

 You can change the position of a three-position valve without closing it.

 The RESET command issues an OPEN/CLOSE command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The OPEN/CLOSE alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an open low feedback signal (.LIO) and
an open high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the valve is open at low position;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO should be true when the valve is open at high position;
otherwise it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.DRV/.POS) are set to the appropriate state
based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MOPEN bits, which you
manipulate from an operator station or from the program.

7-30 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BV2

In auto mode, the OPENL, OPENH, and CLOSE commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MOPEN bits are set to reflect
the last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if
the device changes modes.

When you select BV2 in the Device Definition Table, the form appears as
shown below.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: BV2 Three position valve / type 2

Description:
Open/Close command: S
Position command: S
Open/Verify low: S
Open/Verify high: S
Open alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Close alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: BV2 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Open/Close command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DRV that opens and closes valve.
Position command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.POS that indicates the position signal.
Open/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Open/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Open alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to change from closed to open.
Close alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow valve to change from open to closed.

Table 7-9 lists the extensions and commands used with a BV2 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-31

BV2

Three-Positioned Valves with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-9 BV2 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.DRV 1 open/close command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.POS 2 position OPENL open low
.OPND opened OPENH open high
.OPNDL opened low CLOSE close valve
.OPNDH opened high RESET clear feedback overrides
.CLSD closed
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTOL fail to open low
.FTOH fail to open high
.FTO 5 fail to open
.FTC fail to close
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.OPNTO open timeout
.CLSTO close timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MOPEN manual open
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.OTCP open timer/counter preset
.OTCC open timer/counter current
.CTCP close timer/counter preset
.CTCC close timer/counter current
1 device_name.DRV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
open/close command.
2 device_name.POS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
position command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open/Verify low feedback signal.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Open/Verify high feedback signal.
5 The .FTO bit is set to true when either the .FTOL or .FTOH bit is true.

7-32 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BV2

Figure 7-9 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

OPENL/OPENH/
RESET CLOSE LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MOPEN .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .DRV
Open/Verify determine outputs Open/Close
Low Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .POS
Open/Verify determine status
Position
High Input Command
Output

.OPND .OPENL .FTO .FTOL .FAILD

.CLSD .OPENH .FTC .FTOH .TRVL

Figure 7-9 BV2 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-33

MSN

7.3 Motor

Single-Drive/ The MSN device is a two-state motor (running and stopped) and is
Null-Feedback controlled by a single discrete signal with no feedback.
Motor (MSN)
 If the desired state of the motor is running (.MSTRT=true), the control
signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

 If the desired state is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

false.

When you select MSN in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: MSN Motor single drive / null feedback

Description:
Start/Stop command: S
Start/Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: MSN (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start/Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that starts and stops motor.
Start/Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates
number of seconds to allow motor to change states.

Table 7-10 lists the extensions and commands used with an MSN device.

7-34 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MSN

Table 7-10 MSN Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.RUNNG running START start motor
.STPPD stopped STOP stop motor
.TRVL traveling
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Start/Stop command.

Figure 7-10 shows the operation bits (across the top) affect the status bits
(across the bottom) and/or the output bits (on the right).

START/ STOP LOCK/UNLOCK

.MSTRT .NRDY .DSBLD .LOCKD

Commands and
operation bits
determine outputs
.CMMD
Operation bit determines Start/Stop
status Command
Output

.RUNNG .STPPD .TRVL

Figure 7-10 MSN Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-35

MSS

Motor (continued)

Single-Drive/ The MSS device is a two-state motor (running and stopped) and is
Single-Feedback controlled by a single discrete signal with a single discrete feedback signal.
Motor (MSS)
 If the desired state of the motor is running (.MSTRT=true), the control
signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

 If the desired state of the motor is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the control

signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

 The feedback signal (.RUNIO) should be true when the motor is running
and false when the motor is stopped.

 If the Latch the FTR extension option is selected, the .CMMD bit will
change to false when the .FTR bit becomes true. The .CMMD bit remains
false until a RESET command is issued.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

When you select MSS in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: MSS Motor single drive / single feedback

Description:
Start/Stop command: S
Run/Verify: S
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Latch the FTR extension?: [ ]
Start/Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: MSS (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start/Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that starts and stops motor.
Run/Verify: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag, boolean
variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RUNIO that is feedback signal.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Latch the FTR extension: the .CMMD bit becomes false when the .FTR bit becomes
true, and the .RUNNG bit has the .FTR bit latched.
Start/Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates
number of seconds to allow motor to change states.
Table 7-11 lists the extensions and commands used with an MSS device.

7-36 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MSS

Table 7-11 MSS Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.RUNNG running START start motor
.STPPD stopped STOP stop motor
.TRVL traveling
RESET clear feedback override,
override and/or issue
.RUNIO 2 run feedback start/stop
p command after .FTR or .FTS
.FTR fail to run i ttrue.
is
.FTS fail to stop
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.OVRD override feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Start/Stop command.
2 device_name.RUNIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Run/Verify feedback signal.
If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

Figure 7-11 shows how the input bit (left) and the operation bits (top) affect
the status bits (bottom) and/or the output bits (right).

RESET START/ STOP LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRD .MSTRT .NRDY .DSBLD .LOCKD

Commands and
operation bits
Input, override, and determine outputs
.RUNIO operation bits .CMMD
Run/Verify determine status
Feedback
Input Start/Stop
Command
Output
.RUNNG .STPPD .FTR .FTS .TRVL

Figure 7-11 MSS Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-37

MDN

Motors (continued)

Dual-Drive/ The MDN device is a two-state motor (running and stopped) and is
Null-Feedback controlled by two discrete signals with no feedback.
Motor (MDN)
The two discrete control signals consist of a start signal (.STRTC) and a stop
signal (.STOPC).

 If the desired state of the motor is running (.MSTRT=true), the .STRTC

bit is set to true to start the motor. The .STRTC bit remains true until
the start alarm time expires; then .STRTC is set to false.

 If the desired state of the motor is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the .STOPC

is set to true to stop the motor. The .STOPC bit remains true until the
stop alarm time expires; then .STOPC is set to false.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

When you select MDN in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: MDN Motor single drive / null feedback

Description:
Start command: S
Stop command: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: MDN (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STRTC that starts motor.
Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STOPC that stops motor.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped.
Table 7-12 lists the extensions and commands used with an MDN device.

7-38 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MDN

Table 7-12 MDN Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.STRTC 1 start command START start motor
.STOPC 2 stop command STOP stop motor
.RUNNG running
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.STRTC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Start command.
2 device_name.STOPC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Stop command.

Figure 7-12 shows how the operation bits (across the top) affect the status
bits (across the bottom) and/or the output bits (on the right).

START/ STOP LOCK/UNLOCK

.MSTRT .NRDY .DSBLD .LOCKD

Commands and .STRTC

operation bits Start
determine outputs Command
Operation bit determines Output
status
.STOPC
Stop
Command
Output
.RUNNG .STPPD .TRVL

Figure 7-12 MDN Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-39

MDS

Motor (continued)

Dual-Drive/ The MDS device is a two state motor (running and stopped) and is
Single-Feedback controlled by two discrete signals with a single discrete feedback signal.
Motor (MDS)
The two discrete control signals consist of a start signal (.STRTC) and a stop
signal (.STOPC).

 If the desired state of the motor is running (.MSTRT=true), the .STRTC bit
is set to true to start the motor. The .STRTC bit remains true until either
.RUNNG=true or the start alarm time expires; then .STRTC is set to false.

 If the desired state of the motor is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the .STOPC bit
is set to true to stop the motor. The .STOPC bit remains true until either
.STPPD=true or the stop alarm time expires; then .STOPC is set to false.

 It is not necessary to keep either of the control signals on once the

motor is in the desired state.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down when
the RESET bit goes false.

The feedback signal (.RUNIO) should be true when the motor is running and
false when the motor is stopped.

7-40 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MDS

When you select MDS in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: MDS Motor dual drive / single feedback

Description:
Start command: S
Stop command: S
Run/Verify: S
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: MDS (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STRTC that starts motor.
Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STOPC that stops motor.
Run/Verify: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag, boolean
variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RUNIO that is feedback signal.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running; also indicates maximum
time to keep start signal true.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped; also indicates maximum
time to keep stop signal true.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-41

MDS

Motor (continued)

Table 7-13 lists the extensions and commands used with an MDS device.

Table 7-13 MDS Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.STRTC 1 start command START start motor
.STOPC 2 stop command STOP stop motor
.RUNNG running RESET clear feedback override
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.RUNIO 3 run feedback
.FTR fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.STPTO stop timeout
.STRTO start timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.OVRD override feedback
.STATUS device status (505 only)
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.STRTC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Start command.
2 device_name.STOPC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Stop command.
3 device_name.RUNIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-42 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MDS

Figure 7-13 shows how the input bit (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET START/ STOP LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
operation bits .STRTC
determine outputs Start
Command
Output
.RUNIO Input, override, and
Run Feedback operation bits .STOPC
Input determine status
Stop
Command
Output

.RUNNG .FTR .TRVL

.STPPD .FTS

Figure 7-13 MDS Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-43

MUD

Motor (continued)

User-defined Motor The MUD device is a two-state motor (running and stopped) and is
(MUD) controlled by two discrete signals with a single discrete feedback signal.

The MUD is essentially the shell of a MDS device. The code which defines
the MDS has been reduced to a minimum, and extensions have been
provided to allow you to create your own customized motor and translate it
for OSx (PCS).

The MUD has two alarm timers. When the .SRESET (.RRESET) bit transitions
from false to true, the alarm timer starts. When the timer times out, the
.STRTO (.STPTO) bit becomes true, and remains true until the .SRESET (.RRESET)
bit becomes false.

7-44 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MUD

When you select MUD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: MUD Motor user defined

Description:
Start command: S
Stop command: S
Run/Verify: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: MUD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STRTC that starts motor.
Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.STOPC that stops motor.
Run/Verify: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag, boolean
variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RUNIO that is feedback signal.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running; also indicates maximum
time to keep start signal true.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped; also indicates maximum
time to keep stop signal true.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-45

MUD

Motors (continued)

Table 7-14 lists the extensions and commands used with an MUD device.

Table 7-14 MUD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.STRTC 1 start command START start motor
.STOPC 2 stop command STOP stop motor
.RUNNG running RESET clear feedback override
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.RUNIO 3 run feedback
.FTR fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.STRTO start alarm timer time out
.STPTO stop alarm timer time out
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.OVRD override feedback
.RRESET start alarm timer reset
.SRESET stop alarm timer reset
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.STRTC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Start command.
2 device_name.STOPC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Stop command.
3 device_name.RUNIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-46 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 MUD

Figure 7-14 shows how the input bit (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET START/ STOP LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDC .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDO .DSBLD

Commands and
operation bits .STRTC
determine outputs Start
Command
Output
.RUNIO Input, override, and
Run Feedback operation bits .STOPC
Input determine status
Stop
Command
Output

.RUNNG .FTR .TRVL

.STPPD .FTS

Figure 7-14 MUD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-47

RM1

7.4 Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback

Reversible Motor/ The RM1 device is a three-state motor (forward, reverse, and stopped) and
Type 1 (RM1) is controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a forward signal (.SFWRD) and a
reverse signal (.SREV). The two signals cannot both be true at the same time.

 If the desired state of the motor is running forward (.MSTRT=true and

.MREV=false), the .SFWRD bit is set to true (energized) to start the motor
in a forward direction.

 If the desired state of the motor is running reverse (.MSTRT=true and

.MREV=true), the .SREV bit is set to true (energized) to start the motor in
a reverse direction.

 If the desired state of the motor is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the currently

energized signal (.SFRWD or .SREV) is set to false.

 The motor, when receiving a start signal, starts running and keeps
running until the currently energized signal becomes false.

 If you request a change in direction while the motor is running, the

.DRV bit is set to false, and the motor must stop before the direction is
changed. After the motor stops, the .DRV bit is set to true to start the
motor in the new direction.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down when
the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of a running-forward feedback signal (.FIO)

and a running-reverse feedback signal (.RIO).

 The .FIO bit should be true when the motor is running in a forward
direction; otherwise it should be false.

 The .RIO bit should be true when the motor is running in a reverse
direction; otherwise it should be false.

In manual mode, the forward and reverse signals (.SFWRD/.SREV) are set to
the appropriate state based on the status of the .MREV and the .MSTRT bits,
which you manipulate from an operator station or from the program.

7-48 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RM1

In auto mode, the STARTF, STARTR, and STOP commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MREV and .MSTRT bits are set to reflect the
last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if the
device changes modes.

The logic for the reversible motor is shown in Appendix A, “Device RLL
Code.”

When you select RM1 in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: RM1 Reversible motor / type 1

Description:
Forward command: S
Reverse command: S
Run/Verify forward: S
Run/Verify reverse: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: RM1 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Forward command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SFWRD that starts motor in forward direction.
Reverse command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SREV that starts motor in reverse direction.
Run/Verify forward: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.FIO that is forward feedback
signal.
Run/Verify reverse: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, boolean
variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RIO that is reverse feedback signal.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped.

Table 7-15 lists the extensions and commands used with an RM1 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-49

RM1

Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-15 RM1 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.DRV forward/reverse command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.SFWRD 1 start forward STARTF start forward
.SREV 2 start reverse STARTR start reverse
.RUNNG running STOP stop motor
.RUNF running forward RESET clear feedback overrides
.RUNR running reverse
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.FIO 3 forward feedback
.RIO 4 reverse feedback
.FTRF fail to run forward
.FTRR fail to run reverse
.FTR 5 fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.STRTO start timeout
.STPTO stop timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.MREV manual reverse
.OVRDF override forward feedback
.OVRDR override reverse feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.SFWRD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Forward command.
2 device_name.SREV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Reverse command.
3 device_name.FIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify forward feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.RIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify reverse feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRF or .FTRR bit is true.

7-50 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RM1

Figure 7-15 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

STARTF/STARTR/
RESET STOP LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDR .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDF .MREV .DSBLD

Commands and
.FIO operation bits .SFWRD
Run/Verify determine outputs Forward
Forward Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.RIO operation bits .SREV
Run/Verify determine status
Reverse
Reverse Command
Input Output

.RUNNG .RUNF .FTR .FTRF .FAILD

.STPPD .RUNR .FTS .FTRR .TRVL

Figure 7-15 RM1 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-51

RM2

Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Reversible Motor/ The RM2 device is a three-state motor (forward, reverse, and stopped) and
Type 2 (RM2) is controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two control signals consist of a start/stop signal (.DRV) and a direction
signal (.DIR) that determines whether the motor runs forward or reverse.

 If the desired state is running forward (.MSTRT=true and .MREV=false),

the .DRV bit is set to true and the .DIR bit to false.

 If the desired state is running reverse (.MSTRT=true and .MREV=true), the

.DRV and .DIR bits are both set to true.

 If the desired state is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the .DRV bit is set to false
to stop the motor.

 The motor, when receiving a start signal, starts running and keeps
running until .DRV becomes false or .DIR changes state.

 If you request a change in direction while the motor is running, the

.DRV bit is set to false, and the motor must stop before the direction is
changed. After the motor stops, .DRV is set to true to start the motor in
the new direction.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down when
the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of a running-forward feedback signal (.FIO)

and a running-reverse feedback signal (.RIO).

 The .FIO bit should be true when the motor is running in a forward
direction; otherwise, it should be false.

 The .RIO bit should be true when the motor is running in a reverse
direction; otherwise, it should be false.

In manual mode, the control signals (.DRV/.DIR) are set to the appropriate
state based on the status of the .MREV and the .MSTRT bits, which you
manipulate from an operator station or from the program.

7-52 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RM2

In auto mode, the STARTF, STARTR, and STOP commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MREV and .MSTRT bits are set to reflect the
last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if the
device changes modes.

When you select RM2 in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: RM2 Reversible motor / type 2

Description:
Start/Stop command: S
Direction command: S
Run/Verify forward: S
Run/Verify reverse: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: RM2 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start/Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DRV that starts and stops motor.
Direction command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DIR that is direction signal.
Run/Verify forward: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.FIO that is forward feedback
signal.
Run/Verify reverse: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RIO that is reverse feedback
signal.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped.

Table 7-16 lists the extensions and commands used with an RM2 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-53

RM2

Reversible Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-16 RM2 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.DRV 1 start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.DIR 2 direction STARTF start forward
.RUNNG running STARTR start reverse
.RUNF running forward STOP stop motor
.RUNR running reverse RESET clear feedback overrides
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.FIO 3 forward feedback
.RIO 4 reverse feedback
.FTRF fail to run forward
.FTRR fail to run reverse
.FTR 5 fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.STRTO start timeout
.STPTO stop timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MSTRT manual start
.MREV manual reverse
.OVRDF override forward feedback
.OVRDR override reverse feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.DRV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
start/stop command.
2 device_name.DRV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
direction command.
3 device_name.FIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify forward feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.RIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify reverse feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRF or .FTRR bit is true.

7-54 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RM2

Figure 7-16 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

STARTF/STARTR/
RESET STOP LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDR .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDF .MREV .DSBLD

Commands and
.FIO operation bits .DRV
Run/Verify determine outputs Start/Stop
Forward Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.RIO operation bits .DIR
Run/Verify determine status
Direction
Reverse Command
Input Output

.RUNNG .RUNF .FTR .FTRF .FAILD

.STPPD .RUNR .FTS .FTRR .TRVL

Figure 7-16 RM2 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-55

TS1

7.5 Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback

Two-Speed Motor/ The TS1 device is a three-state motor (high, low, and stopped) and is
Type 1 (TS1) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a low signal (.SLOW) and a high
signal (.SHIGH). The two signals cannot both be true at the same time.

 If the desired state of the motor is running at high speed (.MSTRT=true

and .MHIGH=true), the .SHIGH bit is set to true (energized) to start the
motor at high speed.

 If the desired state of the motor is running at low speed (.MSTRT=true

and .MHIGH=false), the .SLOW bit is set to true (energized) to start the
motor at slow speed.

 If the desired state is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the currently energized

signal (.SHIGH or .SLOW) is set to false.

 The motor, when receiving a start signal, starts running and keeps
running until the currently energized signal becomes false.

 You can change the speed of a two-speed motor without stopping it.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down when
the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of a running-low feedback signal (.LIO) and
a running-high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the motor is running at low speed;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO bit should be true when the motor is running at high speed;
otherwise, it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.SLOW/.SHIGH) are set to the appropriate state
based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MSTRT bits, which you manipulate
from an operator station or from the program.

7-56 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TS1

In auto mode, the STARTL, STARTH, and STOP commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MSTRT bits are set to reflect the
last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if the
device changes modes.

When you select TS1 in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TS1 Two-Speed motor / type 1

Description:
Low command: S
High command: S
Run/Verify low: S
Run/Verify high: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: TS1 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Low command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SLOW that starts motor at low speed.
High command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SLOW that starts motor at high speed.
Run/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Run/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped.

Table 7-17 lists the extensions and commands used with a TS1 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-57

TS1

Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-17 TS1 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.SLOW 1 start low UNLOCK place in manual mode
.SHIGH 2 start high STARTL start low
.RUNNG running STARTH start high
.RUNL running low STOP stop motor
.RUNH running high RESET clear feedback overrides
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTRL fail to run low
.FTRH fail to run high
.FTR 5 fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.STRTO start timeout
.STPTO stop timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MSTRT manual start
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.SLOW is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
low command.
2 device_name.SHIGH is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
high command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify low feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify high feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRL or .FTRH bit is true.

7-58 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TS1

Figure 7-17 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

STARTL/STARTH/
RESET STOP LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .SLOW
Run/Verify Low determine outputs Start Low
Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .SHIGH
Run/Verify determine status
Start High
High Input Command
Output

.RUNNG .RUNL .FTR .FTRL .FAILD

.STPPD .RUNH .FTS .FTRH .TRVL

Figure 7-17 TS1 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-59

TS2

Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Two-Speed Motor/ The TS2 device is a three-state motor (high, low, and stopped) and is
Type 2 (TS2) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a start/stop signal (.DRV) and a
speed signal (.SPEED) that determines whether the motor runs at high or low
speed.

 If the desired state of the motor is running high (.MSTRT=true and

.MHIGH=true), the .DRV and .SPEED bits are both set to true.

 If the desired state is running low (.MSTRT=true and .MHIGH=false), the

.DRV bit is set to true and the .SPEED bit is set to false.

 If the desired state is stopped (.MSTRT=false), the .DRV bit is set to false
to stop the motor.

 The motor, when receiving a start signal, starts running and keeps
running until .DRV becomes false.

 You can change the speed of a two-speed motor without stopping it.

 The RESET command issues a START/STOP command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The START/STOP alarm timer starts counting down when
the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of a running-low feedback signal (.LIO) and
a running-high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the motor is running at low speed;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO should be true when the motor is running at high speed;
otherwise it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.DRV/.SPEED) are set to the appropriate state
based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MSTRT bits, which you manipulate
from an operator station or from the program.

7-60 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TS2

In auto mode, the STARTL, STARTH, and STOP commands set the state of
the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MSTRT bits are set to reflect the
last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if the
device changes modes.

When you select TS2 in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TS2 Two-Speed motor / type 2

Description:
Start/Stop command: S
Speed command: S
Run/Verify low: S
Run/Verify high: S
Start alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Stop alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor (12 characters maximum)

Type: TS2 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Start/Stop command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DRV that starts and stops motor.
Speed command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SPEED that indicates the speed signal.
Run/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Run/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Start alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from stopped to running.
Stop alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow motor to change from running to stopped.

Table 7-18 lists the extensions and commands used with a TS2 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-61

TS2

Two-Speed Motors with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-18 TS2 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.DRV 1 start/stop command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.SPEED 2 speed STARTL start low
.RUNNG running STARTH start high
.RUNL running low STOP stop motor
.RUNH running high RESET clear feedback overrides
.STPPD stopped
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTRL fail to run low
.FTRH fail to run high
.FTR 5 fail to run
.FTS fail to stop
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.STRTO start timeout
.STPTO stop timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MSTRT manual start
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.RTCP run timer/counter preset
.RTCC run timer/counter current
.STCP stop timer/counter preset
.STCC stop timer/counter current
1 device_name.DRV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
start/stop command.
2 device_name.SPEED is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
speed command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify low feedback signal.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Run/Verify high feedback signal.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRL or .FTRH bit is true.

7-62 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TS2

Figure 7-18 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

STARTL/STARTH/
RESET STOP LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MSTRT .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .DRV
Run/Verify Low determine outputs Start/Stop
Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .SPEED
Run/Verify determine status
Speed
High Input Command
Output

.RUNNG .RUNL .FTR .FTRL .FAILD

.STPPD .RUNH .FTS .FTRH .TRVL

Figure 7-18 TS2 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-63

CSD

7.6 Cylinder

Single-Drive/ The CSD device has two positions (extended and retracted) and is controlled
Dual-Feedback by a single discrete signal with two discrete feedback signals. Two types of
Cylinder (CSD) CSD devices are supported: energize-extend (Type E) and energize-retract
(Type R).

One control signal (.CMMD) determines the state of the cylinder.

 If the desired state of an energize-extend cylinder is extended

(.MEXTEND=true), the control signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

If the desired state is retracted, (.MEXTEND=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

false.

 If the desired state of an energize-retract cylinder is extended

(.MEXTEND=true), the control signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

If the desired state is retracted, (.MEXTEND=false), the .CMMD bit is set to

true.

 The RESET command issues an EXTEND/RETRACT command that

turns on the .TRVL bit. The EXTEND/RETRACT alarm timer starts
counting down when the RESET bit goes false.

For both types of cylinders, the two feedback signals consist of an extended
feedback signal (.ELS) and a retracted feedback signal (.RLS).

 The .ELS bit should be true when the piston is extended, and false when
it is retracted.

 The .RLS bit should be true when the piston is retracted and false when
it is extended.

7-64 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CSD

When you select CSD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:CSD Cylinder single drive / dual feedback

Description:
Energized state: E S
Extend/Retract command: S
Extended limit switch: S
Retracted limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTE/FTR: [ ]
Extend alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Retract alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies cylinder (12 characters maximum)

Type: CSD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: E indicates energize extend; R indicates energize retract; default
is E.
Extend/Retract command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that extends and retracts the piston.
Extended limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ELS that is extend feedback
signal..
Retracted limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RLS that is retract feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, extend feedback is
false when the piston is extended.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Clear CMMD on FTE/FTR: the CMMD bit becomes false when the FTE or the
FTR bit becomes true.
Extend alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow cylinder to extend.
Retract alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow cylinder to retract.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-65

CSD

Cylinder (continued)

Table 7-19 lists the extensions and commands used with a CSD device.

Table 7-19 CSD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 extend/retract command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.EXTENDED extended EXTEND extend piston
.RETRACTED retracted RETRACT retract piston
.TRVL traveling RESET clear feedback override
.ELS 2 extended feedback (E)
.RLS 3 retracted feedback (R)
.FTE fail to extend
.FTR fail to retract

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits are
true)
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MEXTEND manual extend
.OVRDE override extend feedback
.OVRDR override retract feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.ETCP extend timer/counter preset
.ETCC extend timer/counter current
.RTCP retract timer/counter preset
.RTCC retract timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Extend/Retract command.
2 device_name.ELS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Extended Limit Switch for energize-extend cylinders. If feedback is not a DI,
this is read/write.
3 device_name.RLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Retracted Limit Switch for energize-retract cylinders. If feedback is not a DI,
this is read/write.

7-66 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CSD

Figure 7-19 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET EXTEND/RETRACT LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDR .MEXTEND .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDE .DSBLD

Commands and
.ELS operation bits
Extend Limit determine outputs
Switch Input
(Type E)
Input, override, and .CMMD
operation bits Extend/Retract
.RLS determine status Command
Output
Retract Limit
Switch Input
(Type R)

.EXTENDED .FTE .FAILD

.RETRACTED .FTR .TRVL

Figure 7-19 CSD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-67

CUD

Cylinder (continued)

User-defined The CUD device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by two
Cylinder (CUD) discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The CUD is essentially the shell of a CSD device. The code that defines the
CSD has been reduced to a minimum, and extensions are provided to allow
you to create your own customized cylinder and translate it for OSx (PCS).

The CUD has two alarm timers. When the .ERESET (.RRESET) bit transitions
from false to true, the alarm timer starts. When the timer times out, the
.EXTTO (.RETTO) bit becomes true, and remains true until the .ERESET (.RRESET)
bit becomes false.

7-68 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CUD

When you select CUD in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:CUD Cylinder user defined

Description:
Extend command: S
Retract command: S
Extended limit switch: S
Retracted limit switch: S
Extend alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Retract alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies cylinder (12 characters maximum)

Type: CUD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Extend command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.EXTC that extends the piston.
Retract command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.RETC that retracts the piston.
Extended limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ELS that is extend feedback
signal..
Retracted limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.RLS that is retract feedback
signal.
Extend alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow the piston to be extended.
Retract alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow the piston to be retracted.

Table 7-20 lists the extensions and commands used with a CUD device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-69

CUD

Cylinder (continued)

Table 7-20 CUD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD extend/retract command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.EXTC 1 extend command EXTEND extend piston
.RETC 2 retract command RETRACT retract piston
.EXTENDED extended RESET clear feedback override
.RETRACTED retracted
.TRVL traveling
.ELS 3 extended feedback
.RLS 4 retracted feedback
.FTE fail to extend
.FTR fail to retract

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits are
true)
.EXTTO extend alarm timer time out
.RETTO retract alarm timer time out
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MEXTEND manual extend
.OVRDE override extend feedback
.OVRDR override retract feedback
.ERESET extend alarm timer reset
.RRESET retract alarm timer reset
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.ETCP extend timer/counter preset
.ETCC extend timer/counter current
.RTCP retract timer/counter preset
.RTCC retract timer/counter current
1 device_name.EXTC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Extend command.
2 device_name.RETC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Retract command.
3 device_name.ELS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Open
Limit Switch for energize-open valves. If feedback is not DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.RLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Close
Limit Switch for energize-closed valves. If feedback is not DI, this is
read/write.

7-70 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CUD

Figure 7-20 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET EXTEND/RETRACT LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDR .MEXTEND .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDE .DSBLD

Commands and
.ELS operation bits .EXTC
Extend Limit determine outputs Extend
Switch Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.RLS operation bits
determine status .RETC
Retract Limit
Switch Input Retract
Command
Output

.EXTENDED .FTE .FAILD

.RETRACTED .FTR .TRVL

Figure 7-20 CUD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-71

PND

7.7 Presses

Hand-Operated/ The PND device has two positions (open and closed) and is controlled by
Dual-Feedback two discrete feedback signals.
Press (PND)
The two feedback signals consist of an up feedback signal (.ULS) and a down
feedback signal (.DLS).

 The .ULS bit should be true when the press is up and false when it is
down.

 The .DLS bit should be true when the press is down and false when it is
up.

The .MRAISE extension shows the state of the press.

 If the press is up (.ULS=true), the control signal (.MRAISE) is set to true.

 If the desired state is down, (.DLS=true), the .MRAISE bit is set to false.

When you select PND in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:PND Hand Press / dual feedback

Description:
Up limit switch: S
Down limit switch: S

Name: unique name that identifies valve (12 characters maximum)

Type: PND (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Up limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean or APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is up feedback signal.
Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean or APT flag variable, or device_name.DLS that is down feedback signal.

NOTE: The PND does not support the dual feedback logic. Refer to
Appendix A for the logic of a PND.

7-72 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PND

Table 7-21 lists the extensions and commands used with a PND device.

Table 7-21 PND Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean
.UP press is up
.DOWN press is down
.ULS 1 up feedback
.DLS 2 down feedback There are no commands.

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.MRAISE up/down status
.STATUS device status
1 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Up
Limit Switch for energize-open presses. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.
2 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch for energize-closed presses. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

Figure 7-21 shows how the input bits (on the left) affect the status bits
(across the bottom) and/or the output bits (on the right).

Commands and
.ULS operation bits
Up Limit determine outputs
Switch Input
Input, override, and .MRAISE
.DLS operation bits Up/Down
determine status Status
Down Limit
Switch Input

.UP .FAILD
.DOWN

Figure 7-21 PND Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-73

PSN

Presses (continued)

Single-Drive/ The PSN device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by one
Null-Feedback discrete signal with no feedback. Two types of PSN devices are available:
Press (PSN) energize-raise (Type R) and energize-lower (Type L).

 If the desired state of an energize-raise press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

field control signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to false.

 If the desired state of an energize-lower press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

control signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to true.

When you select PSN in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PSN Press single drive / null feedback

Description:
Energized state: R S Raised/Up
Up/Down command: S
Up/Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PSN (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: R indicates energize raise; L indicates energize lower; default
is R.
Up/Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that raises and lowers the press.
Up/Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number
of seconds to allow press to change states.

Table 7-22 lists the extensions and commands used with a PSN device.

7-74 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PSN

Table 7-22 PSN Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UP up RAISE raise press
.DOWN down LOWER lower press
.TRVL traveling
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise/Lower command.

Figure 7-22 shows how the operation bits (across the top) affect the status
bits (across the bottom and/or the output bits (on the right).

RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK
.MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.DSBLD

Commands and
operation bits
determine outputs
.CMMD
Raise/Lower
Command
Output
Operation bit
determines status

.UP .DOWN .TRVL

Figure 7-22 PSN Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-75

PSS

Presses (continued)

Single-Drive/ The PSS device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by a
Single-Feedback single discrete signal with one discrete feedback signal. Two types of PSS
Press (PSS) devices are available: energize-raise (Type R) and energize-lower (Type L).

 If the desired state of an energize-raise press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

field control signal (.CMMD) is set to true. If the desired state is down
(.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to false.

 The feedback signal for the energize-raise press (.ULS) should be true
when the press is up and false when the press is down.

 If the desired state of an energize-lower press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

control signal (.CMMD) is set to false. If the desired state is down
(.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to true.

 The feedback signal for the energize-lower press (.DLS) should be false
when the press is up and true when the press is down.

 If the Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL option is selected, the .CMMD bit will change
to false when the .FTR bit becomes true. The .CMMD bit will remain false
until a RESET command is issued.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The UP/DOWN alarm timer will start counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

7-76 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PSS

When you select PSS in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PSS Press single drive / single feedback

Description:
Energized state: R S Raised/Up
Up/Down command: S
Up/Down limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL?: [ ]
Up/Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PSS (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: R indicates energize raise; L indicates energize lower; default
is R.
Up/Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that raises and lowers press.
Up/Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital
flag, boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is the feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, up feedback is false
when the press is up.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL: the .CMMD bit becomes false when the .FTR or .FTL bit
becomes true.
Up/Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number
of seconds to allow press to change states.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-77

PSS

Presses (continued)

Table 7-23 lists the extensions and commands used with a PSS device.

Table 7-23 PSS Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UP up RAISE raise press
.DOWN down LOWER lower press
.TRVL traveling RESET clear feedback override
.ULS 2 up feedback (R) and/or
d/ iissues raise/lower
i /l
command after .FTR or .FTL
.DLS 3 down feedback (L) is true.
.FTR fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRD override feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise/Lower command.
2 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Up Limit Switch for energize-raise presses. If feedback is not a DI, this
is read/write.
3 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch for energize-lower presses. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

7-78 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PSS

Figure 7-23 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK

.MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRD .DSBLD

.ULS Commands and

Up Limit operation bits
Switch Input determine outputs
(Type R) .CMMD
Input, override, and Raise/Lower
operation bits Command
.DLS Output
determine status
Down Limit
Switch Input
(Type L)

.UP .DOWN .FTR .FTL .TRVL

Figure 7-23 PSS Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-79

PSD

Presses (continued)

Single-Drive/ The PSD device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by a
Dual-Feedback single discrete signal with two discrete feedback signals. Two types of PSD
Press (PSD) devices are supported: energize-raise (Type R) and energize-lower (Type L).

One control signal (.CMMD) determines the state of the press.

 If the desired state of an energize-raise press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

control signal (.CMMD) is set to true.

If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to false.

 If the desired state of an energize-lower press is up (.MRAISE=true), the

control signal (.CMMD) is set to false.

If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .CMMD bit is set to true.

 If the Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL option is selected, the .CMMD bit will change
to false when the .FTR bit becomes true. The .CMMD bit will remain false
until a RESET command is issued.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The UP/DOWN alarm timer will start counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

For both types of presses, the two feedback signals consist of an up feedback
signal (.ULS) and a down feedback signal (.DLS).

 The .ULS bit should be true when the press is up and false when it is
down.

 The .DLS bit should be true when the press is down and false when it is
up.

7-80 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PSD

When you select PSD in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type:PSD Press single drive / dual feedback

Description:
Energized state: L S Lowered/Down
Up/Down command: S
Up limit switch: S
Down limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL?: [ ]
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PSD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Energized state: R indicates energize raise; L indicates energize lower; default is
R.
Up/Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.CMMD that raises and lowers press.
Up limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is up feedback signal.
Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.DLS that is down feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, up feedback is false
when the press is up.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL: the .CMMD bit becomes false when the .FTR or .FTL bit
becomes true.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to raise.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to lower.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-81

PSD

Presses (continued)

Table 7-24 lists the extensions and commands used with a PSD device.

Table 7-24 PSD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD 1 up/down command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UP up RAISE raise press
.DOWN down LOWER lower press
.TRVL traveling RESET clear feedback override
.ULS 2 up feedback (R) and/or
d/ iissues raise/lower
i /l
command after .FTR or .FTL
.DLS 3 down feedback (L) is true.
.FTR fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDU override up feedback
.OVRDD override down feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.CMMD is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise/Lower command.
2 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Up
Limit Switch for energize-raise presses. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.
3 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch for energize-lower presses. If feedback is not a DI, this is
read/write.

7-82 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PSD

Figure 7-24 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDD .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDU .DSBLD

Commands and
.ULS operation bits
Up Limit determine outputs
Switch Input
(Type R)
Input, override, and .CMMD
operation bits Raise/Lower
.DLS determine status Command
Down Limit Output
Switch Input
(Type L)

.UP .FTR .FAILD

.DOWN .FTL .TRVL

Figure 7-24 PSD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-83

PDD

Presses (continued)

Dual-Drive/ The PDD device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by two
Dual-Feedback discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.
Press (PDD)
The two control signals consist of an up signal (.UPC) and a down signal
(.DOWNC), which are both normally false.

 If the desired state is up (.MRAISE=true), the .UPC bit is set to true. The
.UPC bit remains true until either the up feedback signal is true or the
up alarm time expires; then .UPC is set to false.

 If the desired state is down, the .DOWNC bit is set to true to lower the
press. The .DOWNC bit remains true until either the down feedback
signal is true or the down alarm time expires; then .DOWNC is set to
false.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The UP/DOWN alarm timer will start counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an up feedback signal (.ULS) and a down
feedback signal (.DLS).

 The .ULS bit should be true when the press is up; otherwise, it should be
false.

 The .DLS bit should be true when the press is down; otherwise, it should
be false.

7-84 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PDD

When you select PDD in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PDD Press dual drive / dual feedback

Description:
Up command: S
Down command: S
Up limit switch: S
Down limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PDD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Up command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.UPC that raises press.
Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DOWNC that lowers press.
Up limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is up feedback signal.
Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.DLS that is down feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, up feedback is false
when the press is up.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to raise.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to lower.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-85

PDD

Presses (continued)

Table 7-25 lists the extensions and commands used with a PDD device.

Table 7-25 PDD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UPC 1 up command RAISE raise press
.DOWNC 2 lower command LOWER lower press
.UP up RESET clear feedback override
.DOWN down
.TRVL traveling
.ULS 3 up feedback
.DLS 4 down feedback
.FTR fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.UPTO up timeout
.DOWNTO down timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDU override up feedback
.OVRDD override down feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.UPC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise command.
2 device_name.DOWNC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Lower command.
3 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Up
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-86 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PDD

Figure 7-25 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDD .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDU .DSBLD

Commands and .UPC

.ULS operation bits
Up Limit Raise
determine outputs Command
Switch Input
Output
Input, override, and
.DLS operation bits .DOWNC
Down Limit determine status Lower
Switch Input Command
Output

.UP .FTR .FAILD

.DOWN .FTL .TRVL

Figure 7-25 PDD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-87

PMD

Presses (continued)

Motor-Drive/ The PMD device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by two
Dual-Feedback discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.
Press (PMD)
The two control signals consist of a raise signal (.UPC) and a lower signal
(.DOWNC).

 If the desired state of the press is up (.MRAISE=true), the .UPC bit is set to
true until the up feedback is true or until the alarm time expires; then
.UPC is set to false.

 If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .DOWNC bit is set to true
until down feedback is true or until the alarm time expires; then
.DOWNC is set to false.

 If the press is stopped in mid-travel, the .TRVL bit remains true with the
up and down alarm times reset.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The UP/DOWN alarm timer will start counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an up feedback signal (.ULS) and a down
feedback signal (.DLS).

 The .ULS bit should be true when the press is up; otherwise, it should be
false.

 The .DLS bit should be true when the press is down; otherwise, it should
be false.

The PMD press can be stopped at any point of its travel by setting the .RTS
extension to true.

7-88 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PMD

When you select PMD in the Device Definition Table, the form appears as
shown below.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PMD Press motor drive / dual feedback

Description:
Up command: S
Down command: S
Up limit switch: S
Down limit switch: S
Normally open feedback?: [ ]
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies motor-driven press (12 characters maximum)
Type: PMD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Up command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.UPC that raises motor press.
Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DOWNC that lowers motor press.
Up limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is up feedback signal.
Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.DLS that is down feedback
signal.
Normally open feedback: feedback response is inverted, e.g, up feedback is false
when the press is up.
Ignore feedback override: Override feedback bit is ignored.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to raise; also indicates maximum time to keep up signal true.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to lower; also indicates maximum time to keep down signal
true.

Table 7-26 lists the extensions and commands used with a PMD device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-89

PMD

Presses (continued)

Table 7-26 PMD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UPC 1 up command RAISE raise press
.DOWNC 2 lower command LOWER lower press
.UP up RESET clear feedback override
.DOWN down
.TRVL traveling
.ULS 3 up feedback
.DLS 4 down feedback
.FTR fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.UPTO up timeout
.DOWNTO down timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDU override up feedback
.OVRDD override down feedback
.STATUS device status
.RTS stop travel
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.UPC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise command.
2 device_name.DOWNC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Lower command.
3 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Up
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-90 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PMD

Figure 7-26 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDD .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDU .DSBLD

Commands and .UPC

.ULS operation bits
Up Limit Raise
determine outputs Command
Switch Input
Output
Input, override, and
.DLS operation bits .DOWNC
Down Limit determine status Lower
Switch Input Command
Output

.UP .FTR .FAILD

.DOWN .FTL .TRVL

Figure 7-26 PMD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-91

PUD

Presses (continued)

User-defined Press The PUD device has two positions (up and down) and is controlled by two
(PUD) discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The PUD is essentially the shell of a PDD device. The code which defines
the PDD has been reduced to a minimum, and extensions have been
provided to allow you to create your own customized press and translate it
for OSx (PCS).

The PUD has two alarm timers. When the .URESET (.DRESET) bit transitions
from false to true, the alarm timer starts. When the timer times out, the
.UPTO (.DOWNTO) bit becomes true, and remains true until the .URESET (.DRESET)
bit becomes false.

7-92 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PUD

When you select PUD in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PUD Press user defined

Description:
Up command: S
Down command: S
Up limit switch: S
Down limit switch: S
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PUD (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Up command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.UPx (where x = A, B, or C) that raises press.
Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DOWNC that lowers press.
Up limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.ULS that is up feedback signal.
Down limit switch: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.DLS that is down feedback
signal.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to raise.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to lower.

Table 7-27 lists the extensions and commands used with a PUD device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-93

PUD

Presses (continued)

Table 7-27 PUD Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.CMMD raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.UPx 1 raise command RAISE raise press
.DOWNC 2 lower command LOWER lower press
.UP up RESET clear feedback override
.DOWN down RAISEA raise with option A
.TRVL traveling RAISEB raise with option B
.ULS 3 up feedback RAISEH raise high
.DLS 4 down feedback RAISEL raise low
.FTR fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower

.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.UPTO up alarm timer time out
.DOWNTO down alarm timer time out
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDU override up feedback
.OVRDD override down feedback
.URESET up alarm timer reset
.DRESET down alarm timer reset
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.UPx is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raise command. The extension is .UPA when x = A, .UPB when x = B, etc.
2 device_name.DOWNC is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Lower command.
3 device_name.ULS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Up
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.DLS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as Down
Limit Switch. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.

7-94 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PUD

Figure 7-27 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RESET RAISE/LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK

.OVRDD .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDU .DSBLD

Commands and .UPx

.ULS operation bits
Up Limit Raise
determine outputs Command
Switch Input
Output
Input, override, and
.DLS operation bits .DOWNC
Down Limit determine status Lower
Switch Input Command
Output

.UPx .FTR .FAILD

.DOWN .FTL .TRVL
.UPA when x = A
.UPB when x = B
.UPC when x = C
.UPH when x = H
.UPL when x = L

Figure 7-27 PUD Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-95

PS1

7.8 Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback

Three-Position The PS1 device is a three-position press (high, low, and down) and is
Press/Type 1 (PS1) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a low signal (.SLOW) and a high
signal (.SHIGH). The two signals cannot both be true at the same time.

 If the desired state of the press is up at high position (.MRAISE=true and

.MHIGH=true), the .SHIGH bit is set to true (energized) to raise the press
at high position.

 If the desired state of the press is up at low position (.MRAISE=true and

.MHIGH=false), the .SLOW bit is set to true (energized) to raise the press
at low position.

 If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the currently energized

signal (.SHIGH or .SLOW) is set to false.

 The press, when receiving an up signal, starts raising and keeps

raising until the currently energized signal becomes false.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command which turns

on the .TRVL bit. The RAISE/LOWER alarm timer will start counting
down when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an raise-low feedback signal (.LIO) and
an raise-high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the press is up at the low position;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO bit should be true when the press is up at the high position;
otherwise, it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.SLOW/.SHIGH) are set to the appropriate state
based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MRAISE bits, which you manipulate
from an operator station or from the program.

7-96 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PS1

In auto mode, the RAISEL, RAISEH, and LOWER commands set the state
of the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MRAISE are set to reflect the
last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if the
device changes modes.

When you select PS1 in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PS1 Three position press / type 1

Description:
Low command: S
High command: S
Up/Verify low: S
Up/Verify high: S
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PS1 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Low command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SLOW that raises press at low position.
High command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.SHIGH that raises press at high position.
Up/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Up/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to change from down to up.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to change from up to down.

Table 7-28 lists the extensions and commands used with a PS1 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-97

PS1

Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-28 PS1 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.SLOW 1 raise low UNLOCK place in manual mode
.SHIGH 2 raise high RAISEL raise low
.UP up RAISEH raise high
.UPL up low LOWER lower press
.UPH up high RESET clear feedback overrides
.DOWN down
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTRL fail to raise low
.FTRH fail to raise high
.FTR 5 fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits
are true)
.UPTO up timeout
.DOWNTO down timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.SLOW is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
low command.
2 device_name.SHIGH is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
high command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raised/Verify low feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raised/Verify high feedback signal. If feedback is not a DI, this is read/write.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRL or .FTRH bit is true.

7-98 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PS1

Figure 7-28 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RAISEL/RAISEH/
RESET LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .SLOW
Raised/Verify determine outputs Raise Low
Low Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .SHIGH
Raised/Verify determine status
Raise High
High Input Command
Output

.UP .UPL .FTR .FTRL .FAILD

.DOWN .UPH .FTL .FTRH .TRVL

Figure 7-28 PS1 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-99

PS2

Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback (continued)

Three-Position The PS2 device is a three-position press (high, low, and down) and is
Press/Type 2 (PS2) controlled by two discrete signals with two discrete feedback signals.

The two discrete control signals consist of a raise/lower signal (.DRV) and a
position signal (.POS) that determines whether the press raises at high or
low position.

 If the desired state of the press is raise high (.MRAISE=true and

.MHIGH=true), the .DRV and .POS bits are both set to true.

 If the desired state is raise low (.MRAISE=true and .MHIGH=false), the

.DRV bit is set to true and the .POS bit is set to false.

 If the desired state is down (.MRAISE=false), the .DRV bit is set to false to
lower the press.

 The press, when receiving a raise signal, starts raising and keeps
raising until .DRV becomes false.

 The RESET command issues a RAISE/LOWER command that turns on

the .TRVL bit. The RAISE/LOWER alarm timer will start counting down
when the RESET bit goes false.

The two feedback signals consist of an raise-low feedback signal (.LIO) and a
raise-high feedback signal (.HIO).

 The .LIO bit should be true when the press is up at low position;
otherwise, it should be false.

 The .HIO should be true when the press is up at high position; otherwise
it should be false.

In manual mode, the outputs (.DRV/.POS) are set to the appropriate state
based on the status of the .MHIGH and the .MRAISE bits, which you manipulate
from an operator station or from the program.

7-100 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PS2

In auto mode, the RAISEL, RAISEH, and LOWER commands set the state
of the output bits. In this mode, the .MHIGH and .MRAISE bits are set to reflect
the last requested state. This is done to provide for a bumpless transfer if
the device changes modes.

When you select PS2 in the Device Definition Table, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: PS2 Three position press / type 2

Description:
Up/Down command: S
Position command: S
Up/Verify low: S
Up/Verify high: S
Up alarm time: 1.0 seconds
Down alarm time: 1.0 seconds

Name: unique name that identifies press (12 characters maximum)

Type: PS2 (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Up/Down command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.DRV that raises and lowers press.
Position command: symbolic name of discrete output, boolean variable, or
device_name.POS that indicates the position signal.
Up/Verify low: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.LIO that is low feedback signal.
Up/Verify high: symbolic name of discrete input, discrete output, digital flag,
boolean variable, APT flag variable, or device_name.HIO that is high feedback signal.
Up alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to change from down to up.
Down alarm time: real number between 0.1 and 3276.7 that indicates number of
seconds to allow press to change from up to down

Table 7-29 lists the extensions and commands used with a PS2 device.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-101

PS2

Three-Position Press with Dual Feedback (continued)

Table 7-29 PS2 Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean LOCK place in auto mode
.DRV 1 raise/lower command UNLOCK place in manual mode
.POS 2 position RAISEL raise low
.UP up RAISEH raise high
.UPL raised low LOWER lower press
.UPH raised high RESET clear feedback overrides
.DOWN down
.TRVL traveling
.LIO 3 low feedback
.HIO 4 high feedback
.FTRL fail to raise low
.FTRH fail to raise high
.FTR 5 fail to raise
.FTL fail to lower
.FAILD
failed (both feedback bits are
true)
.UPTO up timeout
.DOWNTO down timeout
Read/Write Boolean
.DSBLD forced to manual mode
.LOCKD locked (auto mode)
.NRDY not ready
.MHIGH manual high
.MRAISE manual raise
.OVRDL override low feedback
.OVRDH override high feedback
.STATUS device status
Read-only Integer
.VFLAGS device status (505 only)
Read/Write Integer
.UTCP up timer/counter preset
.UTCC up timer/counter current
.DTCP down timer/counter preset
.DTCC down timer/counter current
1 device_name.DRV is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
up/down command.
2 device_name.POS is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
position command.
3 device_name.LIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raised/Verify low feedback signal.
4 device_name.HIO is interchangeable with symbolic name configured as
Raised/Verify high feedback signal.
5 The .FTR bit is set to true when either the .FTRL or .FTRH bit is true.

7-102 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PS2

Figure 7-29 shows how the input bits (on the left) and the operation bits
(across the top) affect the status bits (across the bottom) and/or the output
bits (on the right).

RAISEL/RAISEH/
RESET LOWER LOCK/UNLOCK
.OVRDH .MRAISE .NRDY .LOCKD
.OVRDL .MHIGH .DSBLD

Commands and
.LIO operation bits .DRV
Raised/Verify determine outputs Raise/Lower
Low Input Command
Output
Input, override, and
.HIO operation bits .POS
Raised/Verify determine status
Position
High Input Command
Output

.UP .UPL .FTR .FTRL .FAILD

.DOWN .UPH .FTL .FTRH .TRVL

Figure 7-29 PS2 Extensions and Commands

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-103

TMR

7.9 Stopwatch

Using the Device The TMR device is a three-state device (running, stopped, and hold). The
Timer timer can be controlled by commands in an SFC step or math statement or
by assigning values in math statements.

Five commands allow you to manipulate the timer device from an SFC step
or math block that generates RLL code.

 The START command starts the timer by setting the current value
(.CUR) to 0 and the .RUNNG bit to true.

Each time the tick-rate value elapses, the .CUR value is increased by 1.

 The STOP command stops the timer by setting the .RUNNG bit to false.
The .TOUT extension also becomes false. The STOP command has no
effect on the current value.

 The HOLD command sets the .HOLD bit to true to stop the timer
temporarily. This command freezes the current value and the current
tick-rate position. The .HOLD bit is automatically set to true if there is a
controller power failure, and the Uninterruptible Power Supply option
has not been selected in the compile control file.

 The CONTINUE command sets the .HOLD bit to false and continues
timing from the point at which it was frozen by the HOLD command.

 The RESET command sets the .CUR value to 0. If the timer is frozen
with a HOLD command, the RESET command unfreezes it by setting
the .HOLD bit to false.

The .CUR value is normally a read-only integer; however, it is possible to

write to the .CUR variable in a math statement. The .PSET value is an integer
variable that contains the preset value of the timer.

NOTE: Because the TMR device stores data temporarily by using internal
memory locations, avoid using timers in user-defined subroutines.

NOTE: If you write to the current value (.CUR) while the timer is running,
the timer continues to count from the new current value.

7-104 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TMR

Some timer commands take precedence over the other commands:

 RESET works at any time.

 STOP takes precedence over START, HOLD, and CONTINUE.

 CONTINUE and RESET take precedence over HOLD.

The tick rate of the timer can be changed by writing to the integer variable,
device_name.RATE.

 If the timer is a slow timer (Type S), the value should be the number of
tenths of seconds in each tick.

 If the timer is a fast timer (Type F), the value should be the number of
milliseconds in each tick.

 If you change the tick rate while the timer is running, the change does
not take effect until the current tick is completed.

Timer (TMR) When you select TMR in the Device Definition Table, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TMR Stopwatch

Description:
Timer mode: S Slow
Time out preset: ticks
Tick rate: seconds

Name: unique name that identifies timer (12 characters maximum)

Type: TMR (3-letter code for device)
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional)
Timer mode: F indicates fast timer (minimum rate of .001 second);
S indicates slow timer (minimum rate of .1 second). For S5 controllers, only the slow
timer is available.
Time out preset: real number between 0.0 and 32767.0 that indicates number of
ticks between starting and stopping.
Tick rate: real number between 0.0 and 3276.7 seconds in 0.1 second increments
for a slow timer; the range for a fast timer is 0.0 to 32.767 seconds in 0.001 second
increments.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device Types 7-105

TMR

Stopwatch (continued)

Table 7-30 lists the extensions and commands used with a TMR device.

Table 7-30 TMR Extensions and Commands

Extension Commands
Read-only Boolean START start timer
.TOUT time out (.CUR ∫ .PSET) STOP stop timer
.GT time when .CUR > .PSET HOLD hold current time
.EQ 1 value when .CUR = .PSET CONT continue counting
.MAXC maximum value (32767) reached RESET clear current count
.HOLD holding
Read/Write Boolean
.RUNNG running
Read/Write Integer
.PSET preset
.RATE 2 tick rate of timer
.CUR current timer count
1 device_name.EQ may never come true for timers with very small tick rates
(less than 100 milliseconds). The program cannot access the timer fast enough
to catch the current value equal to the preset; the current value may appear
to jump from less than .PSET to greater than .PSET.
2 For a slow timer, device_name.RATE = 10 ⌠ tick rate that you enter in the form.
For a fast timer, device_name.RATE = 1000 ⌠ tick rate that you enter in the
form.

7-106 Device Types APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Chapter 8
APT Declarations
8.1 Declaring Constants and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Declaration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Entering Constants and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.2 Single-Value Declaration Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Integer (I) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Scaled Integer (SI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Boolean (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Real (R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
APT Flag (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Text (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8.3 Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Using Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Integer Array (IA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Boolean Array (BA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
DI10 Array (IX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
DO10 Array (DX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Real Array (RA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Sequence Array (SA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Shift Register Array (SR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Text Array (TA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
8.4 Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Using Counters (CT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
8.5 Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Using Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
Fast Timer (FT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Slow Timer (ST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-1

8.1 Declaring Constants and Variables

Overview To use constants and variables in your APT program, you must specify the
names for these values in the Declaration Table. The Declaration Table
Editor allows you to define constants and variables that can be used
throughout the program. Constants have an unchanging assigned value.
Variables can be assigned an initial value that can change during the
execution of the program.

You can declare these constants and variables in the Declaration Definition
Table at either the Program Content Level or the Unit Content Level. A
constant or variable defined at the Program Content Level can be used in
that program and in any unit within that program; a constant or variable
defined at the Unit Content Level can be used only from in that unit.

Availability The Declaration Table is available for both Series 505 and S5 controllers.

8-2 APT Declarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Declaration Types APT provides seventeen types of declarations. Figure 8-1 shows the
completion aid (S) for these types with the appropriate letter code for each.
These declaration types fall into three general categories: single values,
arrays, and timers.

P1 DECLARE Declaration Table

Declaration Table Editor

(Unnamed) New Declaration

Integer I
Real R
Boolean B
Flag F
Text T
Declaration Table Editor PTs ESC
Scaled Integer SI F3
Integer Array IA
Name: Type: S Real Array RA
Boolean Array BA
DI10 Array IX
DO10 Array DX
Sequence Array SA
Shift Register Array SR
Text Array TA
Counter CT
Fast Timer FT
Slow Timer ST

Figure 8-1 Declaration Types

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-3

Declaring Constants and Variables (continued)

Entering Constants When you declare constants and variables, you enter information in the
and Variables following fields, which can vary for declaration types.

Name: The name of the variable or constant can be from 1 to 12 characters

long and can consist of any combination of letters, digits, and/or
underscores. At least one of the characters must be a letter. The name must
be unique within the current program or unit. It cannot be the same as the
name of any other object within its scope.

Type: The code represents the type of value that you are declaring.

Description: The description is optional and cannot exceed 30 characters

in length.

Constant: Put an X between the brackets to indicate that the declaration is

a constant value. Leave the field blank if the declaration is a variable.

Value: The numeric value must agree with the specified type. The default is
zero. If you are defining a constant, the entry in this field represents an
unchanging value and is a read-only value. If you are defining a variable,
the entry in this field is the initial value, which can be overwritten in an
assignment statement.

You can enter the name of a constant declaration for the initial value of a
variable that can be overwritten in an assignment statement.

Engineering Units: Optional documentation field to describe the

measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).

Create Unique Status: Put an X between the brackets to indicate that a

separate integer will be translated for an OSx (PCS) status attribute. You
must also write code in a Math block that changes values of the status by
writing to the .STATUS extension.

Create Status Word: Put an X between the brackets to indicate that a

status word will be created for OSx (PCS). Refer to “Create Unique Status”
for more information.

8-4 APT Declarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 PLC Address: There are three controller addressing choices:

 Automatic — APT automatically assigns the controller address.

Automatic addressing is the default.

 User Assigned — Allows the user to specify a controller address.

Selecting this option brings up the Reserved Address field.

 None — No controller address is assigned. This is primarily intended

for support of OSx (PCS) non-networked tags.

Reserved Address: Enter the controller address in this field if you choose
to assign the declaration address yourself. For Series 505 controllers, specify
the address in standard direct controller addressing, using this format:
%Annnn. The % indicates that this is a direct address, A is a memory type (C
for boolean, V for real or integer numbers), and nnnn is the address location.
For S5 controllers, use the format %Annn.n for booleans, %AWnnn for
integers, and %ADnnn for real numbers. The % indicates that this is a direct
address, A is a memory type (F for flag memory, DBnn:D for data memory),
and nnn.n or nnn is the address location. Do not use a “ . ” character for real
numbers. For an array, define only the first element in the array.

If you use this option, the address must be in the reserved memory area,
which you specify in the Compiler Control File. For Series 505 controllers,
G, VMM, and VME memory types cannot be reserved. For more information
about using reserved memory, see the appendix on Direct Memory
Addressing in the SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Graphics/Math)
Manual.

You cannot edit certain fields if you have already marked a declaration for
OSx (PCS) tag translation. These fields are listed in Table 8-1 on page 8-6.
When you mark objects for translation for S5 controllers, you cannot assign
the S5 memory types FW, FD, S, SW, SD, or RS to objects that must be
translated.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-5

Declaring Constants and Variables (continued)

Table 8-1 OSx (PCS) Translation and Declaration Fields That Do Not Change

Declaration Fields
Declaration Type
(Cannot be edited after marked for translation)
Integer (I) Name, Type, Constant, Unique Status, PLC Address
Real (R) Name, Type, Constant, Unique Status, PLC Address
Boolean (B) Name, Type, Retentive, Unique Status, PLC Address
Flag (F) Name, Type, Retentive, PLC Address
Text (T) Name, Type, Number of Text Fields, Constant, PLC Address
Scaled Integer (SI) Name, Type, Low Range, High Range, Unique Status, PLC Address
Integer Array (IA) Name, Type, Constant, Number in Array, PLC Address
Real Array (RA) Name, Type, Constant, Number in Array, PLC Address
Boolean Array (BA) Name, Type, Retentive, Number in Array, PLC Address
DI10 (IX) Name, Type, Retentive, PLC Address
DO10 Array (DX) Name, Type, Retentive, PLC Address
Sequence Array (SA) Name, Type, Number in Array, PLC Address
Shift Register Array(SR) Name, Type, Number in Array, PLC Address
Text Array (TA) Name, Type, Constant, Number in Array, PLC Address
Counter (CT) Name, Type, PLC Address
Fast Timer (FT) Name, Type, PLC Address
Slow Timer (ST) Name, Type, PLC Address

8-6 APT Declarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 I

8.2 Single-Value Declaration Types

Integer (I) An integer value is a positive or negative number and cannot contain a
decimal point. When you select I as the declaration type, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: I S Integer

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Value: 0
Eng. Units:
Create unique status?: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: I (code for Integer).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: X indicates value is a constant; blank field indicates value is a
variable.
Value: integer between --32768 and +32767; specifies value of constant or
initial value of variable.
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe the
measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).
Create unique status: X indicates that a separate integer will be
translated for an OSx (PCS) status attribute.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily
intended for support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, or %FW19 or
%DBn:DW19 for S5. The types of Series 505 memory available for variable
declarations are %V, %VMM, %VMS, %G, %Gx (where x is the application
ID), %G; for constant declarations: %K, and %STW. The types of S5 memory
available for variable declarations are %FW, %SW, %DBn:DW, and
%DXn:DW; for constant declarations: %FW, %SW, %DBn:DW, %DXn:DW
(where n is the block number), and %RSW.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-7

I

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Table 8-2 lists the extensions and commands for an integer declaration. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL code for Series 505 controllers, or STL code for S5
controllers. Integer declarations and extensions can be used in a transition,
in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language statements in a
CFB.

Table 8-2 Integer Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
INCREMENT
(INC)* Adds 1 to the current
Integer value that will be translated to an OSx value of the variable.
.STATUS (PCS) status attribute. You must also write code in a DECREMENT
Math block that changes the value of this extension. (DEC)* Subtracts 1 from the
current value of the
variable.
* These integer commands execute only once each time that the program enters the step. These commands
work only on variables defined as an integer in the Declaration Table. For Series 505 controllers, note that
the INCREMENT and DECREMENT commands use less memory and execute faster than a math
statement (i=i+1 or i=i--1). For S5 controllers, execution time and memory used are the same. However,
for Series 505, the math step or CFB must be RLL code only.

Figure 8-2 illustrates the use of variables (int_1, int_2, int_3) in an SFC
step and transition.

int_1 := 10;
INCREMENT int_3;
MATH
BEGIN
INIT
int_2 := int_3;
S1 BODY
int_2 := int_2 * 6;

T1 int_3 >0

Figure 8-2 Using Integer Declarations in SFC Steps

8-8 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SI

Scaled Integer (SI) A scaled integer value has the same properties as a normal integer with one
exception: when marked for translation, a scaled integer is translated to an
OSx (PCS) analog output. The high and low range, and engineering units
are sent to OSx. In OSx, the value is converted to a real number. In APT, it
stays an integer.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: SI S Scaled Integer

Description:
Sub type: ZS Zero bias
Eng. Units:
Low Range: 0.0
High Range: 1.0
Value: 0
Create unique status?: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: SI (code for Scaled Integer).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Sub type: code (B, T, or Z) that represents the type of output to the field as
listed below. Zero bias (Z) is the default.

(Series 505)
B (Bipolar): --32000 to +32000
T (Twenty-percent offset): +6400 to +32000
Z (Zero bias): 0 to +32000

(S5)
B (Bipolar): --1024 to +1024
Z (Zero bias): 0 to 1024
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe the
measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-9

SI

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Low Range: real number that indicates low range of output in engineering
units. Value must be less than high range.
High Range: real number that indicates high range of output in
engineering units. Value must be greater than low range.
Value: integer between --32768 and +32767; specifies initial value of
variable.
Create unique status: X indicates that a separate integer will be
translated for an OSx (PCS) status attribute.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. Automatic addressing is the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily
intended for support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, and %FW19 or
%DBn:DW19 for S5. The types of Series 505 memory available for this
declaration are %V, %VMM, %VMS, %G, or %Gx (where x is the application
ID). The types of S5 memory available for this declaration are %FW, %SW,
%DBn:DW, and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number).

8-10 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SI

Table 8-3 lists the extensions and commands for the scaled integer. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL code for Series 505 controllers, or STL code for S5
controllers. The scaled integer and extensions can be used in a transition, in
the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language statements in a CFB.

Table 8-3 Scaled Integer Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
INCREMENT
Integer value that will be (INC)* Adds 1 to the current
translated to an OSx (PCS) value of the variable.
status attribute
attribute. You must
.STATUS DECREMENT
also write code in a Math
(DEC)* Subtracts 1 from the
block that changes the value
current value of the
of this extension.
variable.
* These integer commands execute only once each time that the program enters
the step. These commands work only on variables defined as an integer in the
Declaration Table. Note that the INCREMENT and DECREMENT commands use
less memory and execute faster than a math statement (i=i+1 or i=i--1). However,
for Series 505, the math step or CFB must be RLL code only.

Figure 8-3 illustrates the use of variables (int_1, int_2, int_3) in an SFC
step and transition.

int_1 := 10;
INCREMENT int_3;
MATH
S1 BEGIN
INIT
int_2 := int_3;
BODY
T1 int_3 >0 int_2 := int_2 * 6;

Figure 8-3 Using Scaled Integer Declarations in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-11

B

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Boolean (B) A boolean value is either true (1) or false (0). When you select B as the
declaration type, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: B S Boolean

Description:
Retentive: [ ]
Value: 0 (True -- 1, False -- 0)
Create unique status?: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: B (code for boolean).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Retentive: For Series 505 controllers, X indicates that variable retains
previous value in event of power failure; blank field indicates value is forced
to false on return from a power failure. For S5 controllers, leave this field
blank. All S5 boolean memory is retentive.
Value: 1 (true) or 0 (false); specifies initial value of variable.
Create unique status: X indicates that a separate integer will be
translated for an OSx (PCS) status attribute.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%C100 for a Series 505 controller, and %F100.1 or %DBn:D100.1 for S5. The
type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is %C. The types of
S5 memory available for this declaration are %F, %S, %DBn:D, and
%DXn:D (where n is the block number).
For Series 505 controllers, the retentive range is in the upper quarter of
each 1024 bits of C-Memory. All S5 boolean memory is retentive.

8-12 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 B

Table 8-4 lists the extension for boolean variables. There are no commands
associated with boolean variables. A boolean variable and its extension can
be used in a transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math
Language statements in a CFB.

Table 8-4 Boolean Extensions

Extensions Command
Integer value that will be translated
to an OSx (PCS) status attribute. You
.STATUS must also write code in a Math block There are no commands.
that changes the value of this
extension.

Figure 8-4 illustrates the use of variables (bool_1, bool_2, and bool_3) in an
SFC step and transition.

bool_1 := true;
bool_2 := false;
S1 bool_3:= bool_1 OR bool_2;

T1 bool_3

Figure 8-4 Using Boolean Declarations in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-13

R

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Real (R) A real value is a floating point number that can contain a decimal point
(3.0) or that can be expressed in scientific notation (1E12 or 1.0E12). When
you select R as the declaration type, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: R S Real

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Value: 0.0
Eng. units:
Create status word?: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: R (code for Real).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: X indicates that the value is a constant; blank field indicates
that value is a variable.
Value: real number that specifies constant or initial value of variable; valid
range for a real number for Series 505 controllers is --9.223372 E +18 to
+9.223372 E +18 ; any value except 0.0 that falls between --2.710501 E --20
and +5.421011 E --20 generates a controller error. Valid range for a real
number for S5 controllers is --1.701412 E +38 to +1.701412 E +38 ; any value
except 0.0 that falls between --1.469368 E --39 and +1.469368 E --39 generates
a controller error.
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe the
measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).
Create status word: X indicates that a status word will be created for OSx
(PCS).
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, and %FW19 or
%DBn:DW19 for S5. The types of Series 505 memory available for this
declaration are %V, %VMM, %VMS, %G, and %Gx (where x is the
application ID), and %K. The types of S5 memory available for this
declaration are %FD, %SD, %DBn:DD, and %DXn:DD (where n is the block
number).

8-14 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 R

NOTE: Do not enter the “.” after the %V19 for Series 505 controllers, even
though real numbers are expressed that way in the controller. %V19
automatically reserves %V19 and %V20. Be sure to reserve two V-Memory
locations in the Compiler Control File for each real number.

Do not enter the “.” after the %FD19 for S5 controllers since the “D”
indicates that the number is real. If you are using flag memory, reserve four
flag bytes for each real number. If you are using data word memory, reserve
two data words for each real number.

Table 8-5 lists the extensions for real declarations. There are no commands
for a real declaration. Real declarations and extensions can be used in a
transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language
statements in a CFB.

Table 8-5 Real Extensions

Extensions Command
Integer value that will be translated
to a OSx (PCS) status attribute. You
.STATUS must also write code in a Math block There are no commands.
that changes the value of this
extension.

Figure 8-5 illustrates the use of variables (real_1, real_2, and real_3) in an
SFC step.

real_1 := 10.0;
MATH
BEGIN
INIT
real_2 := real_3;
BODY
S1 real_3 := real_3 *10.0;
bool_1 := real_3 > 250.0;

T1 bool_1

Figure 8-5 Using Real Declarations in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-15

F

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

APT Flag (F) An APT flag value is either on (1 or true) or off (0 or false). When you select
F as the declaration type, the form below appears.

APT flags differ from boolean variables. All references to an APT flag are
logically connected, and the APT flag state is set in one place in the
compiled program. References to a boolean variable can appear any number
of places in the compiled code.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: F S Flag

Description: _______________________
Retentive: [ ]
Value: 0 1 (On--1, Off--0)
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: F (code for APT Flag).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Retentive: For Series 505 controllers, X indicates that variable retains
previous value in event of power failure; blank field indicates value is set to
false on return from a power failure. All APT flags for S5 controllers are
retentive; leave this field blank.
Value: 1 (on) or 0 (off); specifies initial value of variable.
PLC Address: there are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and
User Assigned. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is the
default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
(There is no None option for APT flags.)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%C100 for a Series 505 controller, and %F100.1 or %DBn:D100.0 for S5. The
type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is %C. The types of
S5 memory available for this declaration are %F, %S, %DBn:D, and
%DXn:D (where n is the block number).
For Series 505 controllers, the retentive range is in the upper quarter of
each 1024 bits of C-Memory. All S5 boolean memory is retentive.

8-16 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 F

Table 8-6 lists the commands for the APT declaration flags. These
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL or STL code. APT flags can be used in a
transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language
statements in a CFB. When used in an assignment statement, APT flags
can only be used on the right side of the assignment.

Table 8-6 Flag Commands

Command Action
Sets APT flag value to on (true) when the SFC step is active
LATCH or the CFB is enabled. Flag remains on, even if the step or
CFB is disabled, until a CLEAR sets it to off (false).
Sets APT flag value to on (true) only as long as the SFC step
is active or the CFB is enabled; flag value is off (false) when
ON
the step or CFB is disabled. ON should not be used in
Sampled or Event CFBs.
Sets APT flag value to off (false) when the SFC step or CFB
is enabled. Flag remains off, even if the step or CFB is
CLEAR
disabled, until a LATCH or ON sets it to on. CLEAR takes
precedence over ON or LATCH.

The APT flag commands are identical to the Math procedures LATCH, ON,
and CLEAR.

For Series 505 controllers, APT flag procedures are RLL-only and cannot be
used in the associated math text for CFBs such as the PID or Analog Alarm.
S5 controllers can use APT flag procedures in associated math.

 Do not assign an initial value to an APT flag when you intend to use
the APT flag only with an ON procedure. The value of the APT flag is
always zero outside the step or CFB in which the ON procedure is
located.

 Do not use the ON procedure in sampled or event Math CFBs because

the APT flag is on for only one controller scan.

An example of how APT flags are used in a program is shown in Figure 8-6.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-17

F

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Figure 8-6 shows the values and use of APT flag variables (flag_1 and
flag_2) in SFC steps and transitions.

ON (flag_1); {flag_1 is true}

S1 LATCH (flag_2);

T1 flag_1

{flag_1 is false}
S2 {flag_2 is true}

T2 flag_2

LATCH (flag_1); {flag_1 is true}

S3 {flag_2 is true}

T3 flag_1

{flag_1 is true}
S4 {flag_2 is true}

T4 flag_2

S5 CLEAR (flag_1);{flag_1 is false}

bool_1 := flag_1;
{bool_1 is a boolean variable}
{flag_1 is on the right side
of the assignment statement}
CLEAR (flag_2);
{flag_2 set false in a Math block}

Figure 8-6 Using APT Flag Declarations in SFC Steps

8-18 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 T

Text (T) A text variable is a string variable that can contain characters. The text
variable can be 1, 2, or 3 fields long. Each field can handle up to 30
characters: the longest text variable can contain 90 characters. Each field
requires 15 memory locations.

The text variable exists primarily for OSx (PCS), so that APT can have a
match with the OSx text tags. When you select text as the declaration type,
the following form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: T S Text

Description: _______________________
Number of Text Fields: 3
Text1:
Text2:
Text3:
Constant: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: T (code for Text).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Number of Text Fields: Indicates number of 30-character fields (1, 2, or 3
fields; default is 1).
Text1, Text2, Text3: Actual text is entered here. Any printable character is
allowed (30 characters maximum per field).
Constant: X indicates that the text is constant; a blank field indicates that
the text is variable.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-19

T

Single-Value Declaration Types (continued)

Reserved address: controller address you specify for the declaration, e.g.,
%V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, or %DBn:DW19 for
S5. For each text field, you must allocate 15 memory locations in the
Compiler Control File if Series 505 V- or K-Memory is used. You must
allocate 30 memory locations for each text field if S5 flag memory is used.
The types of Series 505 memory available for this declaration are %V,
%VMM, %VMS, %G, %Gx (where x is the application ID), and %K. The
types of S5 memory available for this declarations are %DBn:DW, and
%DXn:DW(where n is the block number).
Table 8-7 lists the extensions available for the text declaration. The text
declaration and its extensions can be used in the Math section of an SFC
step or in Math language statements in a CFB, but not in a transition.

Table 8-7 Text Extensions

Extensions Command
.TEXT1 30 characters of text
.TEXT2 30 characters of text There are no commands.
.TEXT3 30 characters of text
Note: The .status extension is not available for text tags.

The text variable exists in APT so that you can configure an OSx (PCS) text
tag. Only simple assignments can be done with text variables.

 You can assign character strings to text variables only by using the
declaration table.

NOTE: You cannot assign a text variable to a string that is enclosed in

quotes. A statement such as alarm_1 := ”High alarm”; is not allowed. You
must assign the string either in the declaration table or in an assignment
statement to another text variable that was created in the declaration table.

8-20 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 T

 You can reassign one text variable to another text variable if they have
the same number of text fields. A statement such as alarm_1 := alarm_2;
is permitted, as long as alarm_1 and alarm_2 have the same number of
text fields assigned to them.

 You can use the value 1, 2, or 3 in brackets to specify a particular text

field, or you can specify the text field by using the proper extension:

alarm_1[1] := alarm_2[2];

or

alarm_1.text1 := alarm_2.text2;

NOTE: You cannot use expressions as indices for text fields. To specify a
text field, use either the appropriate integer value, enclosed in brackets, or
else the correct extension, as shown above.

Figure 8-7 illustrates the use of text variables (alarm_1, alarm_2, alarm_3)
in an SFC step. Notice that you can either assign the entire text variable to
another text variable, or else assign individual fields selectively.

T1 high_alarm
alarm_2 := alarm_1;
alarm_3.text1 := alarm_2.text2;
S1 alarm_3[2] := alarm_1[3];

Figure 8-7 Using Text Declarations in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-21

ARRAYS

8.3 Arrays

Using Arrays An array is an indexed collection of values that you can reference as a whole
or as individual elements.

To assign the value of all elements in an array to the corresponding

elements of another array, use the array names in an assignment
statement: array_1 := array_2;. The two arrays must be the same size.

Use an integer in brackets following the array name to specify an element

in the array. To assign values to a single element, use an assignment
statement such as array_1[1] := 10;

For Series 505 controllers, the index in a boolean array can be either a
literal value or an integer variable. For S5 controllers, the index in a
boolean array can only be a literal value. Some Series 505 controllers
support indexing arrays with expressions. S5 controllers do not support
indexing boolean arrays with expressions. For Series 505 controllers, you
can index a boolean element with an expression or an integer variable, such
as [I42], only in SFPGM and only if the controller release supports this
SFPGM operation. Refer to Table 1-9, in Chapter 1, for features specific to
the controller release.

For both Series 505 and S5 controllers, the index in a real or integer array
can be a literal value, an expression or an integer variable. For Series 505
controllers, if you use an expression or integer variable for the index of a
real or integer array, then calculations on the array are done in SFPGM or
RLL, based on the firmware of the controller. Refer to Table 1-9, in
Chapter 1, for features specific to the controller release.

The index in a text array must be a literal value (1,2,3, etc.). A text array
cannot use an integer variable or an expression as an index.

Arrays can be used in assignment statements in the parallel section of an

SFC step or in the Math section of an SFC step or CFB. Figure 8-8
illustrates the use of integer arrays (iarr_1 and iarr_2) in an SFC step and
transition.

When you create user-defined subroutines, do not use an expression for the
index of an array as a parameter; use a variable instead. For Series 505
controllers, you can store the intermediate results of an expression in a
controller T-Memory location before calling the subroutine (%Tx, where
x = 10--16). For S5 controllers, you can store the intermediate result of an
expression in a temporary variable before calling the subroutine.

Another alternative to using an expression for the index of an array is to

use a variable instead. Refer to Table 1-9, in Chapter 1, for APT features
supported by controller models.

8-22 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 ARRAYS

Figure 8-8 illustrates the use of an array (iarr_1) in an SFC step and
transition.

Integer array

iarr_1[1] = 0

iarr_1[2] = 4 iarr_1[1] := 10;

iarr_2 := iarr_1;
iarr_1[3] = 62 MATH
INTEGER: index;
iarr_1[4] = 18 BEGIN
INIT
iarr_1[5] = 101 index := 1;
BODY
iarr_2[2] := iarr_1[5]+10;
S1 iarr_1[index] := iarr_2[index+2];

T1 iarr_1[1] = 10

Figure 8-8 Using Arrays in SFC Steps

! WARNING
Programs generated by APT do not check the upper/lower limits of an array. It is
possible to index an array out of its configured boundaries.
Indexing outside the boundaries of an array may cause your application to
execute in an unpredictable manner that could result in death or serious injury
and/or property damage.
Take care to design your APT program in a manner that makes it impossible to
index outside of array boundaries.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-23

IA

Arrays (continued)

Integer Array (IA) An integer array is an indexed collection of integers. When you select IA as
the declaration type, the form below appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: IA S Integer Array

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Number in Array: 1
Eng. Units:
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: IA (code for Integer Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: X indicates that each value is a constant; blank field indicates
that each value is a variable.
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
For Series 505 controllers: integer arrays can have up to 32767 elements.
For S5 controllers: integer arrays can have up to 256 elements.
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe the
measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, or
%DBn:DW19 for S5. You must reserve sufficient memory, based on the
array size, in the Compiler Control File. The types of Series 505 memory
available for this declaration are %V, %VMM, %VMS, %G, %Gx (where x is
the application ID), and %K. The types of S5 memory available for this
declaration are %DBn:DW and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number).

8-24 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 IA

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specify 7 as the number of
elements in the array, the dialogue window below appears:

Integer Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0

Index: location of value in array

Value: integer between --32768 and 32767 for both Series 505 and S5
controllers; specifies constant value or initial value of array element; default
is 0.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-25

BA

Arrays (continued)

Boolean Array (BA) A boolean array is an indexed collection of boolean values that are either
true or false. When you select BA as the declaration type, the form below
appears:

Declaration Table ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: BA S Boolean Array

Description:
Retentive: [ ]
Number in Array: 1
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: BA (code for Boolean Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Retentive: For Series 505 controllers, X indicates that each element retains
its previous value in the event of power failure; a blank field indicates each
value is forced to false on return from a power failure. All booleans are
retentive in S5 controllers; leave this field blank.
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
For Series 505 controllers, retentive boolean arrays can have 256 elements;
non-retentive arrays can have 1024 elements. For S5 controllers, boolean
arrays can have 4096 elements.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %C100 for a Series 505 controller, or %F100.1 for S5. You
must reserve enough memory for the size of the array in the Compiler
Control File. For S5 controllers, recall that D memory holds 16 booleans per
word, and F and S memory hold 8 booleans per word. The type of Series 505
memory available for this declaration is %C memory. The types of S5
memory available for this declaration are %F, %DBn:D, %DXn:D (where n is
the block number), and %S.

8-26 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 BA

Reserved address, continued: For Series 505 controllers, if you have a

non-retentive boolean array larger than 768 elements on the 560T, 565P,
545, 555, or 575, then you must use the extended local C-Memory that
starts at memory location %C10241. In order to use extended (local)
C-Memory, you must reserve all the lower non-retentive memory plus the
size of the array in the Compiler Control File.

For instance, if you have a boolean array of 1024 elements, you need to
reserve (768*8) + 1024 = 7168 for the 545, 555, and the 575. For the 560T
and the 565P, you need to reserve (768*(number of RCC cards*2)) + 1024. In
this case, your reserved C-Memory address would be %C10241.

Refer to the Control Relays Permitted table in the SIMATIC TI505

Programming Reference User Manual for C-Memory ranges.

On the 560 and 565, non-retentive boolean arrays larger than 768 cannot be
given a reserved address, but an automatic address can be assigned, which
will be given an overflow C-Memory address.

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specified 6 as the number
of elements in the array, the dialogue window below would appear:

Boolean Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0

Index: location of value in array.

Value: 0 (false) or 1 (true); specifies value of element in the array;
default is 0.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-27

IX

Arrays (continued)

DI10 Array (IX) A DI10 array is a boolean array with a length of ten that is translated to
OSx (PCS) as a DI10 tag type.

Declaration Table ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: IX S DI10 Boolean Array of Size 10

Description:
Retentive: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: IX (code for DI10 Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Retentive: For Series 505 controllers, X indicates that each element retains
its previous value in the event of power failure; a blank field indicates each
value is forced to false on return from a power failure. All booleans are
retentive in S5 controllers; leave this field blank.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %C100 for a Series 505 controller, or %F100.1 for S5. You
must reserve 10 C locations in the Compiler Control File for Series 505
controllers, or 2 flag bytes for S5 controllers. The type of Series 505 memory
available for this declaration is %C memory. The types of S5 memory
available for this declaration are %F, %DBn:D, %DXn:D (where n is the
block number), and %S.

8-28 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 IX

To specify values in the array, press F10 and the dialogue window below
appears:

DI10 Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
8 0
9 0
10 0

Index: location of value in array

Value: 0 (false) or 1 (true); specifies value of element in the array;
default is 0.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-29

DX

Arrays (continued)

DO10 Array (DX) A DO10 array is a boolean array with a length of ten that is translated to
OSx (PCS) as a DO10 tag type.

Declaration Table ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: DX S DO10 Boolean Array of Size 10

Description:
Retentive: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: DX (code for DO10 Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Retentive: For Series 505, X indicates that each element retains its
previous value in the event of power failure; a blank field indicates each
value is forced to false on return from a power failure. All booleans are
retentive in S5 controllers.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %C100 for a Series 505 controller, or %F100.1 for S5. You
must reserve 10 C locations in the Compiler Control File for Series 505
controllers, or 2 flag bytes for S5 controllers. The type of Series 505 memory
available for this declaration is %C memory. The types of S5 memory
available for this declaration are %F, %DBn:D, %DXn:D, and %S (where n is
the block number).

8-30 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 DX

To specify values in the array, press F10 and the dialogue window below
appears:

DO10 Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0
8 0
9 0
10 0

Index: location of value in array

Value: 0 (false) or 1 (true); specifies value of element in the array;
default is 0.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-31

RA

Arrays (continued)

Real Array (RA) A real array is an indexed collection of real, or floating point, values. When
you select RA as the declaration type, the form below appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: RA S Real Array

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Number in Array: 1
Eng. Units:
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: RA (code for Real Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: X indicates that each value is a constant; blank field indicates
that each value is a variable.
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
For Series 505 controllers: real arrays can have up to 16382 elements. For
S5 controllers: real arrays can have up to 128 elements.
Engineering Units: optional documentation field to describe the
measurement units, such as kg, liter, or psi (8 characters maximum).
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %V19 (if variable) or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505
controller, or %DBn:DD19 for S5. You must reserve enough memory in the
Compiler Control File for the size of the array. The types of Series 505
memory available for this declaration are %V, %VMM, %VMS, %G, %Gx
(where x is the application ID), and %K. The types of S5 memory available
for this declaration are %DBn:DD, and %DXn:DD (where n is the block
number).

8-32 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 RA

NOTE: For Series 505 controllers, do not enter the “.” after the %V19, even
though real numbers are expressed that way in the controller. %V19 will
reserve %V19 and %V20. Be sure to reserve two V locations in the Compiler
Control File for each real number.

Do not enter the “.” after the %DD19 (although MAITT and Debug require it
when you use these utilities). %DBn:DD19 reserves %DW19 and %DW20.
Be sure to reserve two data words in the Compiler Control File for each real
number.

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specify 7 as the number of
elements in the array, the dialogue window below appears:

Real Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0.0
2 0.0
3 0.0
4 0.0
5 0.0
6 0.0
7 0.0

Index: location of value in array.

Value: real number that specifies constant or initial value of variable. For
Series 505 controllers, the valid range for a real number is --9.223372 E+18
to 9.223372 E+18. Any value except 0.0 that falls between --2.710501 E --20
and +5.421011 E --20 generates a controller error. For S5 controllers, the
valid range for a real number is --1.701412 E+38 to 1.701412 E+38. Any value
except 0.0 that falls between --1.469368 E --39 and +1.469368 E --39 generates
a controller error.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-33

SA

Arrays (continued)

Sequence Array A sequence array is a special array of integers that you can use for sequence
(SA) control. When you select SA as the declaration type, the form below
appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: SA S Sequence Array

Description:
Number in Array: 1
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: SA (code for Sequence Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
Both Series 505 and S5 controllers can have up to 256 elements.
PLC Address: there are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and
User Assigned. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is the
default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
(There is no None option for sequence arrays.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %V19 for a Series 505 controller, or %DBn:DW19 for S5.
You must reserve enough memory for the size of the array in the Compiler
Control File. The type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is
%V memory. The types of S5 memory available for this declaration are
%DBn:DW and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number).

8-34 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SA

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specify 7 as the number of
elements in the array, the dialogue window below appears:

Sequence Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0

Index: location of value in array

Value: integer between --32768 and 32767 for both Series 505 and S5
controllers; specifies initial value of array element; default is 0.

NOTE: For Series 505 controllers, ensure that the end of your sequence
array does not exceed memory location V32767, whether the address is
automatic or user-assigned. The controller generates an error with the RLL
MWFT instruction when you use V-memory locations greater than 32767. If
you are using automatic addressing, switch to user-assigned addressing and
reserve enough V-memory to store the sequence array. If you are using
user-assigned addressing, put your sequence array in lower V-memory.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-35

SA

Arrays (continued)

Table 8-8 lists the extensions and commands for the sequence array. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL or STL code. Elements can be used in a transition,
in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language statements in a
CFB.

Table 8-8 SA Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
Integer value that indicates current RESET1 Sets pointer to
.PTR
position in the array. zero.
Integer value that indicates one ADVANCE1 Moves pointer to
.PNTR greater than the current position in next element and
the array. puts value in .IOUT.
.IOUT Integer value advanced from array.
Boolean that indicates that the
.EMPTY pointer has reached last element in
the array.
1 These sequence array commands execute only once each time that the
program enters the step. These commands work only on variables defined as
a sequence array in the Declaration Table.

After a reset, the .PNTR extension contains the value of the starting address
of the array. After each advance of the array, this variable is incremented by
one. You can change the value of the .PNTR extension as long as the value
remains inside the correct range of addresses allocated for the array. The
value of the .PNTR extension is one greater than the value of the .PTR
extension.

An example of how to use a sequence array in an SFC is shown in

Figure 8-9.

8-36 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SA

Figure 8-9 illustrates the use of a sequence array (sarr_1) in SFC steps and
transitions. Only one ADVANCE command should be placed in any one step,
and ADVANCE commands should not appear in consecutive steps. In order
to advance in subsequent steps, you must put steps between each advance
step.

Sequence array
sarr_1[1] = 20
sarr_1[2] = 14
sarr_1[3] = 6
RESET sarr_1; {sarr_1.ptr = 0}
S1 {sarr_1.empty = false}
T1 sarr_1.ptr = 0

S2 ADVANCE sarr_1; {sarr_1.ptr = 1}

{sarr_1.iout = 20}
T2 true

S3

T3 true
ADVANCE sarr_1; {sarr_1.ptr = 2}
S4 {sarr_1.iout = 14}
T4 true

S5

T5 true
ADVANCE sarr_1; {sarr_1.ptr = 3}
S6 {sarr_1.iout = 6}
{sarr_1.empty = true}
T6 true

S7

T7 sarr_1.empty = true

S8 RESET sarr_1; {sarr_1.ptr = 0}

{sarr_1.iout = 6}
{sarr_1.empty = false}

Figure 8-9 Using Sequence Arrays in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-37

SR

Arrays (continued)

Shift Register Array A shift register array is a special array of integers that you can use to shift
(SR) the values in the array down 1 element and insert a value into the first
element. When you select SR as the declaration type, the form below
appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: SR S Shift Register Array

Description:
Number in Array: 1
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: SR (code for Shift Register Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
For Series 505 controllers: shift register arrays can have up to 1023
elements. For S5 controllers: shift register arrays can have up to 256
elements.
PLC Address: there are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and
User Assigned. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is the
default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
(There is no None option for shift register arrays.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %V19 for a Series 505 controller, or %DBn:DW19 for S5.
You must reserve enough memory in the Compiler Control File for the size
of the array. The type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is
%V. The types of S5 memory available for this declaration are %DBn:DW
and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number).

8-38 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SR

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specify 7 as the number of
elements in the array, the dialogue window below appears.

Shift Register Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1 0
2 0
3 0
4 0
5 0
6 0
7 0

Index: location of value in array.

Value: integer between --32768 and 32767 for both Series 505 and S5
controllers; specifies initial value of array element; default is 0.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-39

SR

Arrays (continued)

Table 8-9 lists the extensions and commands for the shift register array. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL or STL code. Elements can be used in a transition,
in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language statements in a
CFB. An example of how to use a shift register array in an SFC is shown in
Figure 8-10.

Table 8-9 SR Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
SHIFT1 Shift the values in the
Integer value that gets inserted in the first
array down 1 element and
.PV element in the array after a SHIFT (read-only
insert the .PV value into
integer).
the first element.
Becomes false to clear the shift register data.
The .RESET extension becomes true to indicate SET_RESET1 Ready the shift register.
.RESET 2 that the shift register array can be activated if CLEAR_RESET1 Clear the shift register
the .ENABL extension is set to true. (read/write data.
boolean).
Indicates the shift register array has been ENABLE1 Enable the shift register.
.ENABL
ENABL
activated (read/write boolean). DISABLE1 Disable the shift register.
1 These shift register array commands execute only once each time that the program enters the step.
These commands work only on variables defined as a shift register array in the Declaration Table.
2 The shift register needs to be set and enabled before it can shift data, i.e., .RESET extension and .ENABL
extension must be set to true with the SET_RESET and ENABLE commands.

8-40 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 SR

Figure 8-10 illustrates the use of a shift register array (sarr_1) in SFC steps
and transitions. Only one SHIFT command should be placed in any one
step, and SHIFT commands should not appear in consecutive steps.

When you are finished with the shift register, you can clear it, using the
CLEAR_RESET shift_register_name command. This sets all values in the
shift register array to zero.

Shift register array

sarr_1[1] = 20
sarr_1[2] = 14
sarr_1[3] = 6
SET_RESET sarr_1;
S1 ENABLE sarr_1;
sarr_1.PV := 10;
T1 sarr_1[1] = 20

S2 SHIFT sarr_1;

T2 sarr_1[1] = 10

S3

T3 true
SHIFT sarr_1;
S4 sarr_1.PV := 5;
T4 sarr_1[3] = 20

S5
Shift register array
sarr_1[1] = 5
sarr_1[2] = 10
sarr_1[3] = 20

Figure 8-10 Using Shift Register Arrays in SFC Steps

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-41

TA

Arrays (continued)

Text Array (TA) A text array is an array of text variables. Text variables contain up to 30
characters. Each element in the text array is 30 characters long and
requires 15 integer memory locations.

Text arrays are primarily for OSx (PCS) tag translate. When you select TA
as the declaration type, the form below appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: TA S Text Array

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Number in Array: 1
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned None
Reserved Address:
Press F10 to edit array values

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: TA (code for Text Array).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: X indicates that the text is constant; blank field indicates that
the text is variable.
Number in Array: indicates number of elements in the array; default is 1.
For Series 505 controllers: text arrays can have up to 2184 elements. For S5
controllers: text arrays can have up to 17 elements.
PLC Address: there are three controller addressing choices: Automatic,
User Assigned, and None. (See descriptions below.) Automatic addressing is
the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
None: No controller address is assigned. (This is primarily intended for
support of OSx non-networked tags.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %V19 or %K19 (if constant) for a Series 505 controller, or
%DBn:DW19 for S5. You must reserve enough memory in the Compiler
Control File for the size of the array. For example, to reserve V locations in a
Series 505 controller, the number of V locations = 15 x (number of elements
in the array). For S5, the reserved number of data words = 15 x (number of
elements in the array). The type of Series 505 memory available for this
declaration is %V. The types of S5 memory available for this declaration are
%DBn:DW, and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number).

8-42 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TA

To specify values in the array, press F10 . If you specify 6 as the number of
elements in the array, the dialogue window below appears.

Text Array ? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Index Value
1
2
3
4
5
6

Index: location of value in array.

Value: actual text for text array is entered here. Each field can be up to 30
characters long. Any printable character is allowed. The default is empty.

The text array is primarily used to configure OSx (PCS) text tags. Several
rules apply when you use text arrays in APT:

 You can assign the character string to the text variable either on the
declaration form or through an assignment statement in a Math
section.

NOTE: You cannot assign an element in the text array to a string that is
enclosed in quotes, as in alarm [1] := ”High Alarm”. You must assign the string
either in the declaration table or in an assignment statement to another
text array.

 You can reassign a text array to another text array if they have the
same number of array elements. A statement such as alarm_1:=alarm_2;
is allowed as long as alarm_1 and alarm_2 have the same number of
array elements.

 You can only index an element in a text array by using a literal value,
such as:

alarm_1[1] := alarm_2[4];

NOTE: You cannot use an integer variable or an expression to index an

element in a text array. You must use the appropriate integer value.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-43

CT

8.4 Counters

Using Counters You can use a counter inside an SFC step or in the Math section of an SFC
(CT) step or CFB. The counter counts up from 0 to a preset value every time the
input boolean goes from false to true. The preset value can be assigned from
the program or when you define the counter in the Declaration Table.

A counter can be controlled with the .INPUT and .ENABL extensions from
Math assignment statements in an SFC step or in a Math or interlock CFB.

 To start the counter counting, the .ENABL bit must be true.

 When the .INPUT bit transitions from false to true, the current counter
count (.TCC) is incremented by one.

 When the .TCC count equals the .TCP count, the .COUT becomes true.

 To reset the counter, set the .ENABL bit to false. The .COUT becomes
false, and the .TCC resets to zero.

Because a declared counter in Series 505 controllers stores data temporarily

in internal memory locations, you must not use counters in user-defined
subroutines. You can use counters in user-defined subroutines in S5
controllers.

NOTE: APT counter operation is different from that of S5 counters. APT

counters count up from 0 to a preset value. When the count equals the
preset, the .COUT becomes true. When you use the APT Declaration Table to
declare a counter for your S5 controller, the counter that is generated
operates as an APT counter.

8-44 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CT

When you select CT as the declaration type, the form below appears.

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: CT S Counter

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Counter preset: 0 counts
{Series 505 only} PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: CT (code for Counter).
Constant: (Series 505 only) X indicates protected counter; blank field
indicates preset can be changed. For S5 controllers, leave this field blank.
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Counter preset: integer between 0 and 32767; specifies preset value of
counter.
PLC Address: Automatic addressing is the default. If you have a Series
505 controller, you also get the User Assigned option.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: allows the user to specify a Series 505 controller
address.
(There is no None option for counters.)

Reserved address: (Series 505 only) starting controller address you specify
for the declaration, e.g., %TC2. The type of Series 505 memory available for
this declaration is %TC.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-45

CT

Counters (continued)

Table 8-10 lists the extensions for the counter. Extensions can be used in a
transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language
statements in a CFB.

Table 8-10 CT Extensions

Extensions Command
.TCC Current counter count (read-only integer).
.TCP Preset counter count (read/write integer).
.ENABL Indicates counter has been activated (read/write boolean).

.INPUT
Variable that increments the current counter count every There are no commands.
time the value goes from false to true (read/write boolean).
Becomes true when the current count equals the preset.
.COUT The .COUT extension is false when the current count does
not equal the preset (read-only boolean).

8-46 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 CT

Figure 8-11 shows examples that illustrate how to use counter commands
and extensions.

SFC

S1 counter .TCP:= 1000;

T1 true

S2 counter.ENABL := true;

counter.INPUT := pulse_input;
T2 counter.COUT

INTERLOCK CFB This interlock CFB monitors

an alarm condition, which
increments a counter every
counter.ENABL := true; time the alarm condition is
counter.INPUT := edge(alarm_cond); true. If the alarm condition
alarm := counter.COUT; triggers for the preset count,
an alarm is set.

ALARM_TIMER

Figure 8-11 Using Counters in SFCs or CFBs

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-47

TIMERS

8.5 Timers

Using Timers The fast and slow timers allow you to set up a delay time inside an SFC step
or in the Math section of an SFC step or CFB. The timers count down to 0
from a preset value. The preset value can be assigned from the program or
when you define the timer in the Declaration Table.

A timer can be started with the DELAY command.

 The DELAY command causes the timer to begin counting down as soon
as the SFC step becomes active. The timer automatically resets the
current value to the preset value and sets .TOUT to false when the
program exits that step, or the Math section stops executing.

 DELAY commands for the same timer should not be placed in

consecutive SFC steps because there is not enough time for the timer to
be reset.

 The DELAY command can also be used in a CFB that is RLL only.

A timer can also be controlled with the .RESET and .ENABL extensions from
Math assignment statements in an SFC step or in a Math or interlock CFB

 To start or restart the timer, set both the .RESET and .ENABL bits to
true.

 To pause the timer, keep the .RESET bit true and change the .ENABL bit
to false. To resume timing, set the .ENABL bit back to true.

 To reset the timer, set the .RESET bit to false. It does not matter which
state the .ENABL bit is in.

Because a declared timer in Series 505 controllers store data temporarily in

internal memory locations, you must not use timers in user-defined
subroutines. You can use timers in user-defined subroutines in S5
controllers.

NOTE: For S5 controllers, APT uses the S5 timers T0--T255. They operate
as On Delay timers.

8-48 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 TIMERS

Figure 8-12 shows examples that illustrate how to use timer commands and
extensions.

SFC

S1 timer_1 .TCP:= 1000;

T1 true

S2 DELAY timer_1;

timer_2.TCP := 2000;
T2 timer_1.TOUT

S3 timer_2.ENABL := true;
timer_2.RESET := NOT(timer_2.TOUT);

T3 timer_2.TOUT

This interlock CFB monitors

INTERLOCK CFB
an alarm condition, which sets
a timer. If the alarm condition
timer_3.ENABL := alarm_cond AND enabl_timers; exists for the timed period, an
timer_3.RESET := alarm_cond; alarm is set.
alarm := timer_3.TOUT;

if (alarm_cond4)then
delay timer4;
endif;
alarm4 := timer4.TOUT;

ALARM_TIMER

Figure 8-12 Using Timers in SFCs or CFBs

NOTE: Be consistent when you access a timer; that is, do not use the
DELAY command and write to .ENABL and .RESET for the same timer.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-49

FT

Timers (continued)

Fast Timer (FT) The fast timer counts down from the preset to 0 at a rate of .001 seconds.
When you select FT as the declaration type, the form below appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: FT S Fast Timer

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Time out preset: 0 msec
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: FT (code for Fast Timer).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: (Series 505 only) X indicates protected timer; blank field
indicates preset can be changed.
Time out preset: integer between 0 and 32767; specifies preset value of
timer multiplied by .001 seconds.
PLC Address: there are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and
User Assigned. Automatic addressing is the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
(There is no None option for fast timers.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %TC2 for a Series 505 controller, or %TMR2 for S5. The
type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is %TC. The type of
S5 memory available for this declaration is %TMR.

NOTE: For S5 controllers, the APT fast timer uses a 10-millisecond ON

DELAY timer. Consequently, while the APT preset and current values are
expressed in milliseconds, the accuracy for S5 timers is increments of 10
milliseconds.

8-50 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 FT

Table 8-11 lists the extensions and commands for the fast timer. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL or STL code. Extensions can be used in a
transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language
statements in a CFB.

Table 8-11 FT Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
.TCC Current timer count (read-only integer). DELAY* Starts timer.
.TCP Preset counter time: 0.001 ⌠ value (read/write integer).
.ENABL Indicates timer has been activated (read/write boolean).
Becomes false to indicate that the current count has been
.RESET
reset to the preset value. The .RESET extension becomes
true to indicate that the timer can be activated if the
.ENABL extension is set to true (read/write boolean).
Becomes true when the current count equals zero. The
.TOUT .TOUT extension is false when the current count does not
equal zero (read-only boolean).
* This timer command executes only once each time that the program enters the step. This command
works only on variables defined as a timer in the Declaration Table.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-51

ST

Timers (continued)

Slow Timer (ST) The slow timer counts down from the preset to 0 at a rate of .1 seconds.
When you select ST as the declaration type, the form below appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Type: ST S Slow Timer

Description:
Constant: [ ]
Time out preset: 0 * 0.1 sec
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Type: ST (code for Slow Timer).
Description: optional (30 characters maximum).
Constant: (Series 505 only) X indicates protected timer; blank field
indicates preset can be changed.
Time out preset: integer between 0 and 32767; specifies preset value of
timer multiplied by .1 seconds.
PLC Address: there are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and
User Assigned. Automatic addressing is the default.
Automatic: APT automatically assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows the user to specify a controller address.
(There is no None option for slow timers.)

Reserved address: starting controller address you specify for the

declaration, e.g., %TC2 for a Series 505 controller, or %TMR2 for S5. The
type of Series 505 memory available for this declaration is %TC. The type of
S5 memory available for this declaration is %TMR.

8-52 APT Delcarations APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 ST

Table 8-12 lists the extensions and commands for the slow timer. The
commands can be used in the parallel section of an SFC step or a Math
block that generates RLL or STL code. Extensions can be used in a
transition, in the Math section of an SFC step, or in Math Language
statements in a CFB.

Table 8-12 ST Extensions and Commands

Extensions Command
.TCC Current timer count (read-only integer). DELAY* Starts timer.
.TCP Preset counter time: 0.1 ⌠ value (read/write integer).
.ENABL Indicates timer has been activated (read/write boolean).
Becomes false to indicate that the current count has been
.RESET
reset to the preset value. The .RESET extension becomes
true to indicate that the timer can be activated if the
.ENABL extension is set to true. (read/write boolean).
Becomes true when the current count equals zero. The
.TOUT .TOUT extension is false when the current count does not
equal zero (read-only boolean).
* This timer command executes only once each time that the program enters the step. This command
works only on variables defined as a timer in the Declaration Table.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) APT Declarations 8-53

 Chapter 9
Recipes
9.1 Understanding Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Recipe Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Recipe Usage Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Defining Recipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Downloading from OSx (PCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Selecting a Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Using Recipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Recipe Extensions and Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3 Recipe Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Creating a Recipe Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Editing a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4 Program and Unit Recipe Usage Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Creating a Program or Unit Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Editing Recipe Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
9.5 Implementing Recipes in APT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-1

9.1 Understanding Recipes

Overview An APT recipe serves as a storage place for a set of related values that have
different data types. You develop an APT recipe in two basic steps:

 The first step is to add a Recipe Template at the Program Content

Level. Each template contains a list of elements and corresponding
data types that make up a recipe.

 The second step is to create a recipe and specify the associated

template in the Recipe Usage Table. This can be done at either the
Program Content Level or at the Unit Content Level. You can use this
Recipe Usage Table to assign initial values (or quantities) to the recipe
elements.

Recipe Template The recipe template contains the master list of all ingredients and control
information that you need to make a set of similar products. Because a
Recipe Template is a master list, you can include all of the ingredients for
making variations of a similar product in one template.

For example, in the WASH_DEM program, all the parameters for

controlling the wash cycle are included in one template, as shown in
Figure 9-1. Another template could be created that contains the parameters
for controlling a drying cycle.

Recipe Usage Table A recipe that you name in the Recipe Usage Table automatically contains
the same elements as the template that you specify. The default values of
these elements is zero. You can edit the recipe and assign initial values to
each element; elements can be assigned a value of zero.

For example, the recipe for a normal wash cycle shown in Figure 9-1 assigns
a value of warm for temperature setpoint, 1.5 minutes for wash time,
1 minute for rinse time, etc. The recipe for the P_Press wash cycle assigns a
value of cold for temperature setpoint, 0.75 minutes for wash time, and
1.0 minutes for rinse time.

9-2 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Program Content
COMPILE
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
MODULE [ ] Module definition table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SUBROUTINE [ ] Subroutine table
UNITS
WASHER [ ] Washing machine unit
WSIM [ ] Washer simulation
RECIPE TEMPLATES
SEQUENCE [ ] Sequence recipe step define
OP_PARMS [ ] Operational parameters
SFCs
CFCs
SAVED REPORTS

Program Level
OP_PARMS Recipe Template
Template Editor
NUM_RUNS I Number of load to wash
FILL_SP I fill cycle setpoint high/low
TEMP_SETPT I wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint hot/cold
WASH_TIME1 R agitator wash time period min
RINSE_TIME1 R agitator rinse time period min
W_SPIN_TIME1 R wash cycle spin time min
R_SPIN_TIME1 R rinse cycle spin time min
W_SOAK_TIME1 R wash cycle soak time min

Program Level
Recipe Usage Table
Recipe Editor
D D_DICT data definitions
BR OP_PARMS parameters for wash
P_PRESS OP_PARMS permanent press recipe
NORM_CYCLE OP_PARMS normal wash cycle

Wash Parameters: Normal Cycle

Recipe Elements
VALUE ENG. UNITS ELEMENT NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE
1 NUM_RUNS NUMBER OF LOAD TO WASH I
MED_LEVEL high/low FILL_SP filll cycle setpoint I
WARM hot/cold TEMP_SETPT wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint I
1.5 min WASH_TIME1 agitator wash time period R
1 min RINSE_TIME1 agitator rinse time period R

Figure 9-1 Recipe Usage Table

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-3

9.2 Defining Recipes

Overview APT provides two methods for using recipes in a program:

 You can define recipe elements at the Program Level, reserve a space
for the recipe at the Unit Level, and then use a command in an SFC
step to move the values defined at the Program Level into the unit
recipe.

 You can edit a recipe at the Unit Level and access the recipe elements
with no additional steps. This allows you to store a set of values for use
in a process that does not change.

Downloading from The UNLOCK or CLEAR command makes the recipe available for data. The
OSx (PCS) SELECT command moves the data into the recipe. Figure 9-2 shows how to
use the handshaking bits in APT. First, use the CLEAR command to clear
the recipe; this sets the extensions to zero. Then, use the SELECT command
to select a recipe and download it to the controller. When the download is
complete, the .INUSE extension automatically goes to true, indicating that
the recipe is in the controller and is ready to process.

APT provides the following extensions that are specifically designed to work
with the OSx (PCS) recipe package to enable the handshaking and allow
recipes to be downloaded from OSx to APT.

 The .INUSE extension indicates when the recipe is available. OSx can
only download a recipe when the recipe is not in use, and
.INUSE = false.

 The .DSTBL extension indicates that a recipe is in the process of being

downloaded. While OSx is downloading a recipe, .DSTBL = false.

 The recipe data is ready when the .DRDY extension is true. The .INUSE
extension must also equal true, indicating that the recipe is in use, and
.DSTBL must be true, indicating that the data is stable. See Figure 9-2.

9-4 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 .INUSE

.DSTBL

.DRDY Processing
recipe
OSx can Recipe data is
download downloading to
recipe controller from
OSx
Clear Recipe Clear Recipe Second download
.DRDY is true when is complete
download is complete
Select Recipe Select new recipe
OSx processing OSx initiates new
initiates recipe recipe
download

Figure 9-2 OSx (PCS) Handshaking with APT

APT also provides the ability to scale recipes from OSx (PCS), select a
specific recipe from OSx, and to put a recipe on hold indefinitely from OSx.

APT recipes can be used as recipes or data structures. APT recipes can
handle different data types with a common name. Data structures can be
marked for tag translate, but they do not get the recipe extensions for OSx
handshaking.

Selecting a Recipe APT allows you to move recipes from one area of the hierarchy to another.
For example, you can copy a Program Level recipe to the Unit Level, from
one Program Level recipe to another, or from a Unit Level recipe to the
Program Level.

To select a recipe, use SELECT destination_recipe source_recipe; in the

parallel section of an SFC step or a math block that generates RLL code.

The destination_recipe is the name of the recipe that you want to use in
your program. The source_recipe is the name of the recipe that you want to
copy.

To copy recipes in a Math block, use the syntax shown below.

recipe1 := recipe2;

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-5

Defining Recipes (continued)

Using Recipe You can reference the elements of the recipe in an assignment statement in
Elements either the parallel or math section of an SFC step, or in the math section of
a CFB. You can also use a recipe element as the input to a CFB.

To access values of elements in the recipe, you use the recipe name with the
element as an extension. For example, if the unit recipe name is WR (for
Working Recipe) and the elements are Num_runs, Fill_sp, and Wash_time1,
you reference these elements by: WR.num_runs, WR.fill_sp, and
WR.wash_time1.

You can assign values to recipe elements, or assign these elements to other
variables, or to extensions of other objects that you defined in the
Declaration Table:

WR.num_runs := 5;
Timer_Set := WR.wash_time1;

NOTE: For more efficient code assignments, use integers or real numbers
instead of boolean values in recipes.

9-6 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Recipe Extensions Table 9-1 shows the extensions and commands used with recipes.
and Commands Remember that data structures do not use extensions or commands, and
that constant recipes do not use the commands.

Table 9-1 Recipe Extensions and Commands

Extensions
Command
(Read/Write Boolean)
.RTU Request to unlock. (F)1 UNLOCK/CLEAR Makes the recipe available for data.
SELECT Makes data from one recipe available to
.INUSE Data is in use.
another.
.DSTBL Data is stable.
.DRDY Data is ready for use.
.STATUS Recipe status.2
1 This boolean is an APT flag that is manipulated by the Math Procedures Latch, Clear, and On.
2 The boolean extension .INUSE and element 1 of the status boolean array .STATUS[1] are equivalent. The
boolean extension .DSTBL and element 2 of the status boolean array .STATUS[2] are also equivalent. For
example, you achieve the same results by changing the state of the .INUSE extension, or by writing to
.STATUS[1].

Example Figure 9-3 illustrates how recipes can be handled within an SFC. In this
example, you are waiting for the master recipe to receive the recipe data
from the operator station. When the recipe data is received, it sets the
master recipe .DRDY to true. APT then moves the master recipe into the
slave recipe and clears the master recipe (which sets master recipe .DRDY
to false, as is shown in Figure 9-2).

.. mster_recipe.DRDY
. {mster_recipe.INUSE and mster_recipe.DSTBL are set true by the
S5 operator station. APT sets mster_recipe.DRDY to true.}

T5 SELECT slave_recipe mster_recipe;

{when recipe is stable, move master recipe into working
recipe area}
S6
.. clear mster_recipe;
{set Recipe Usage Table to “ready for download”}
.

Figure 9-3 Using Recipes

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-7

9.3 Recipe Templates

Creating a Recipe Recipe Templates reside at the Program Content level of the hierarchy.
Template Each APT program can have more than one Recipe Template, as is shown in
Figure 9-4.

A Recipe Template is the source for all Program Content and Unit Content
recipes because it contains the master list of all elements necessary for
making a specific product. The list can include the names of ingredients as
well as other processing information such as time, temperature, etc.

The first step in defining a template is to add a template to the hierarchy at

the Program Content Level.

Program Directory
RECIPE TEMPLATES
SEQUENCE [ ] Sequence recipe step define
OP_PARMS [ ] Operational parameters

1. Add template to
Program Directory.
2. Edit template and
define elements.

2
Program Level
SEQUENCE Recipe Template
Template Editor
STEP1 I first step
STEP2 I second step
STEP3 I
2
STEP4 I
STEP5 I Program Level
OP_PARMS Recipe Template
Template Editor
NUM_RUNS I Number of load to wash
FILL_SP I fill cycle setpoint high/low
TEMP_SETPT I wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint hot/cold
WASH_TIME1 R agitator wash time period min
RINSE_TIME1 R agitator rinse time period min

Figure 9-4 Creating a Template

9-8 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Editing a Template The next step is to edit the template and define the ingredients and/or
process for the recipe. When you edit a Recipe Template, this form appears:

WASH_DEM OP_PARMS Operational parameters

Template Editor
NUM_RUNS I NUMBER OF LOAD TO WASH
FILL_SP I fill cycle setpoint high/low
TEMP_SETPT I wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint hot/cold
WASH_TIME1 R agitator wash time period min
RINSE_TIME1 R agitator rinse time period min
W_SPIN_TIME1 R wash cycle spin time min
R_SPIN_TIME1 R runse cycle spin time min
W_SOAK_TIME1 R wash cycle soak time min
R_SOAK_TIME1 R rinse cycle soak time min
(Unlimited) ------New Template Element------

? CTLs OPTs ESC

NUM_RUNS F1 F2 F3

ELEMENT NAME TYPE DESCRIPTION ENG. UNITS

NUM_RUNS I NUMBER OF LOAD TO WASH
End of Form

Element Name: symbolic name that identifies the element (12 characters
maximum). Do not use the following extension names, which are created by APT for
recipe control: .INUSE, .STATUS, .DRDY, .RTU, and .DSTBL.
Type: code that represents one of the following: B (boolean), R (real), I (integer), BA
(boolean array), IA (integer array), or RA (real array).
Description: optional description of the template element (30 characters
maximum).
Engineering units: unit of measurement associated with the element (optional, for
description only in APT).

NOTE: The maximum number of elements in a recipe for a Series 505

controller is determined by the amount of V-memory you have available.
The maximum number of elements in a recipe for an S5 controller is 256
words.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-9

9.4 Program and Unit Recipe Usage Tables

Creating a Program A Recipe Usage Table is available at both the Program Content Level and
or Unit Recipe the Unit Content Level of the hierarchy. The Recipe Usage Tables contain
names of recipes and values for the elements defined in the template.

Recipes in the Recipe Usage Table can have the same or different template
names, e.g., OP_PARMS, shown in Figure 9-5, and OP_PARMS and
SEQUENCE in Figure 9-6. Each recipe in the Unit Content Recipe Usage
Table can have either the same or a different recipe name, e.g., WR and SR,
shown in Figure 9-6. The same names are possible because they are in
different units.

Program Level
Recipe Usage Table
Recipe Editor
D D_DICT data definitions
BR OP_PARMS parameters for wash
P_PRESS OP_PARMS permanent press recipe
NORM_CYCLE OP_PARMS normal wash cycle

Wash Parameters: Buffer

Recipe Elements
VALUE ENG. UNITS ELEMENT NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE
0 NUM_RUNS NUMBER OF LOADS TO WASH I
HIGH_LEVEL high/low FILL_SP filll cycle setpoint I
HOT hot/cold TEMP_SETPT wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint I
1.5 min WASH_TIME1 agitator wash time period R
1.0 min RINSE_TIME1 agitator rinse time period R

Figure 9-5 Program Recipe Usage Table

9-10 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Program Directory
COMPILE
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
MODULE [ ] Module definition table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SUBROUTINE [ ] Subroutine table Unit Level
UNITS
WASHER [ ] Washing machine unit Washer Directory
WSIM [ ] Washer simulation
RECIPE TEMPLATES TABLES
SEQUENCE [ ] Sequence recipe step define IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
OP_PARMS [ ] Operational parameters DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
SFCs DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
CFCs RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SAVED REPORTS SFCs
CFCs
SAVED REPORTS

Recipe Usage Table

Recipe Editor
WR OP_PARMS Washer working recipe
SR SEQUENCE Sequence of steps

Unit Level
WSIM Directory
TABLES
IO [ ] I/O symbolic name table
DEVICE [ ] Device definition table
DECLARE [ ] Declaration table
RECIPE [ ] Recipe usage table
SFCs
CFCs
SAVED REPORTS

Recipe Usage Table

Recipe Editor
WR OP_PARMS Washer working recipe
SR SEQUENCE Sequence of steps

Figure 9-6 Unit Recipe Usage Table

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-11

Program and Unit Recipe Usage Tables (continued)

Editing Recipe You must define a Recipe Template before you define a recipe in the Recipe
Elements Usage Table. When you edit the Recipe Usage Table, specify the name of a
recipe and the name of a template, and choose whether the recipe is
constant or a data structure only. The scaling parameters, scale factor, hold
request, and the controller request are primarily for OSx (PCS) use.

Then, edit the recipe elements in order to assign initial values in the Recipe
Usage Table. You can also assign values to recipe elements with math
blocks, as is described on page 9-6.

When you select or create a recipe, this form appears:

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

Name: Template: S
Description:
Constant: [ ]
Data Structure Only: [ ]
Scale Factor: 1.0
Scale Low: 0.0
Scale High: 100.0
Create Unique Scale Factor: [ ]
Create Unique Hold Request: [ ]
Create Unique PLC Request: [ ]
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address:

Name: unique, symbolic name (12 characters maximum).

Template: Valid template name.
Description: 30 characters maximum (optional).
Constant: X indicates recipe is constant. A constant recipe can have
boolean elements in it, but you cannot hold Series 505 C-memory locations
or S5 flag and data memory constant. A constant recipe does not use the
commands for APT recipes, but it can use the handshaking bits
(extensions).
Data Structure Only: X means that the recipe is only a data structure
and that it does not use the commands and extensions for APT recipes.
Scale Factor: A positive scale factor can be entered to scale the recipe
that is downloaded from OSx (PCS). You can enter fractions or whole
numbers between 0.0 -- 999.0. Default is 1.0.
Scale Low: The lowest scale factor allowed. It must be a positive number
between 0.0 and 999.0.

9-12 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Scale High: The highest scale factor allowed. It must be a positive
number between 1.0 -- 999.0. Default is 100.0.
Create Unique Scale Factor: X allocates a real variable called
recipe_name.SCALE so that you can dynamically change the scale factor. The
recipe_name.SCALE variable must be a positive number between 0.0 -- 999.0.
Create Unique Hold Request: X allocates a bit called
recipe-name.HOLDREQ so that you can dynamically put a recipe on hold
indefinitely. When downloading a recipe from OSx (PCS), you can transfer a
recipe a block at a time. The HOLDREQ bit can stop OSx from downloading
the next block of the recipe. The recipe is on hold when the bit is set true
and downloading resumes when the bit is set to false. Hold request
eliminates the OSx maximum time to wait for the next step.
Create Unique PLC Request: X allocates an integer variable called
recipe-name.RECREQ so that a recipe can be requested by number. If your
recipe in OSx were named R32767, you would download R32767 into
recipe-name by setting recipe-name.RECREQ equal to 32767.

.RECREQ must always contain a value.

--1 cancels the download that is in progress from OSx.
--2 illustrates waiting for the next recipe selection (this is the
default).
--3 requests the last selected recipe on OSx.
0 to 32767 are valid integer recipe numbers.
PLC Address: Refers to controller address allocation for the declaration
as listed below.
Automatic addressing is the default: APT automatically
assigns the controller address.
User Assigned: Allows user to specify a controller address.
Reserved address: controller starting address specified for the recipe, e.g.,
%V19 and %K19 (if constant) for Series 505 controllers or %DBn:DW19 for
S5 controllers. The types of Series 505 memory available for a recipe are V
and K memory. The types of S5 memory available for a recipe are
%DBn:DW and %DXn:DW (where n is the block number). A recipe with a
user-assigned starting address cannot have any boolean elements because of
data type mix (V-memory and C-memory for Series 505). You cannot have
an all-boolean recipe with user-assigned addressing. You must carefully
calculate the amount of memory to reserve because of the mix of reals and
integers.
Refer to the SIMATIC PCS 7 OSx Recipe Manual for more information.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-13

Program and Unit Recipe Usage Tables (continued)

When you edit the recipe elements, the table appears as shown in
Figure 9-7. All the information that you specified in the template is
automatically placed in the recipe, and you can specify the appropriate
values for each element. Note that you can only change the initial value in
the Value field if you have already marked the recipe for OSx (PCS) tag
translation.

The value that you assign must correspond to the engineering units, value
type, and range for each element. If the value is a boolean value, you must
specify a 1 for true or a 0 for false.

The value can be a variable name, although it must be declared a

CONSTANT variable. APT does not allow the recipe elements to be
indirectly changed. You can change the recipe elements in a math
statement, as shown in “Using Recipe Elements” on page 9-6, by setting a
numeric value equal to the recipe_name.recipe_element. You cannot,
however, set the value equal to a variable, then change that variable in
APT, and have the recipe updated. The variable changes, but the
recipe_name.recipe_element keeps the same initial value. You cannot enter a
setpoint, a process variable, or an output into the value field, although you
can set a recipe element equal to any of these variables in a math
statement.

WASH_DEM WASHER RECIPE Recipe usage table

Recipe Editor
WR OP_PARMS Washer working recipe
SR SEQUENCE sequence of steps
(Unnamed) ----New Recipe----

? CTLs OPTs ESC

F1 F2 F3

VALUE ENG. UNITS ELEMENT NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE

1 NUM_RUNS NUMBER OF LOADS TO WASH I
MED_LEVEL high/low FILL_SP filll cycle setpoint I
WARM hot/cold TEMP_SETPT wash/rinse cycle temp setpoint I
1.5 min WASH_TIME1 agitator wash time period R

Figure 9-7 Editing Recipe Elements

9-14 Recipes APT Programming Reference (Tables)

9.5 Implementing Recipes in APT

Recipes are first loaded with their values, and then implemented in APT to
produce the desired product.

Values can be loaded into the recipe by either downloading the recipes from
an operator station, such as OSx (PCS), or by loading the values directly
from APT. Loading the values directly from APT can be done in math blocks
in CFCs or SFCs, or by filling in the values in the recipe usage table.
Downloading from OSx is accomplished by manipulating the handshaking
bits, as is shown in Figure 9-2.

Once the recipes are in place, they are implemented in the controller by
using either SFCs or sequence arrays. To use an SFC or a sequence array,
you invoke the recipe step-by-step. First, you load the recipe_elements into
the appropriate places (that is, in setpoints, timer and counter presets, etc.)
using math statements. Then, you wait for a condition to come true before
you move to the next step. You continue to sequence through the steps until
your process is complete. These techniques are discussed in the SIMATIC
APT Applications Manual.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Recipes 9-15

 Chapter 10
User Subroutines
10.1 User-defined and System-activated Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10.2 Creating a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using the Subroutine Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Using Parameters in a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Math in a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
RLL-only Subroutine (Series 505 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
SFPGM-only Subroutine (Series 505 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Avoiding Temporary Variables in SFPGM-only Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Example of a User-defined Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10.3 Creating a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Subroutine Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Programming in a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Design Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Accessing an FB from a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Using Math Statements in a System-activated Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-1

10.1 User-defined and System-activated Subroutines

Overview The SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual

introduces the concept of math procedures. The procedure, a pre-defined
operation that does a single mathematical task, is used as a single
statement in a math block. You can expand the list of APT-provided
procedures by custom-designing your own procedure as a subroutine. You
can use subroutines for code that is repeated where only the inputs and
outputs change. When the subroutine needs to be executed, use the
subroutine name in a math statement, just as you do for any APT
procedure.

APT provides two types of subroutines.

 User-defined subroutines Subroutines written in the Math

language that can pass up to five parameters. See Section 10.2.

 System-activated subroutines Subroutines used to program the

interrupt organization blocks (OB1 through OB39) for S5 controllers.
See Section 10.3.

Availability The user-defined subroutines are available for both controller families; the
system-activated subroutines are only available for S5 controllers.

Prerequisites Before you attempt to write a subroutine, you must be familiar with the
APT Math language rules. If you have a Series 505 controller, you must
know the differences between RLL- and SF program-generated code. If you
have an S5 controller, read the STL syntax information provided in the
appendix on “Inline Assembly Code for S5,” located in the SIMATIC APT
Programming Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual.

10-2 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

User-defined You create a user-defined subroutine from the Subroutine Table Editor,
Subroutine using the Math language. You can pass a maximum of five parameters to
the subroutine when it is called for execution. These parameters can be
single values or arrays. You can call a user-defined subroutine from SFC
math, CFB math, or from the associated math of a PID loop or an analog
alarm.

The parameters of a user-defined subroutine are both inputs and outputs.

That is, you can modify a parameter within the subroutine, and pass the
new value of the parameter back to the calling function when the
subroutine completes its execution.

System-activated If you have an S5 controller, you can create a subroutine, using the
Subroutine Subroutine Table Editor, that programs an OB between OB1--OB39. You can
only program one OB per subroutine, and the subroutine must contain the
complete code for the OB; you cannot access one OB from several
subroutines. To write the code for your interrupt OB, you can use either the
Math language or STL. If you use STL, you are only permitted to issue a
jump command to an FB that is written in STL and downloaded with
STEP 5.

System-activated subroutines do not pass parameters. They are not called

from within APT; instead, they are executed when the OB interrupt or event
occurs.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-3

10.2 Creating a User-defined Subroutine

Using the When you create a user-defined subroutine, use the form shown in
Subroutine Form Figure 10-1. The parameters for a user-defined subroutine are optional. You
can pass parameters as input-only, output-only, or input/output.

NOTE: APT treats all subroutine parameters as input/output. You must

ensure that your subroutine does not write to parameters that are intended
to be input-only.

SUBROUTINE
? CTLs OPTs ESC
F1 F2 F3

Name: XXXXXX Type: PRO

Description:
{If S5} PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
{If S5} Reserved Address: ___________________
Optional Parameters
Parm: Name Type Description
____S
____S
____S
____S
____S
Press F10 to edit math

Figure 10-1 Subroutine Form for User-defined Subroutines

Name: Unique name that identifies the subroutine (8 characters, maximum).

Type: PRO (procedure).

Description: Description of the subroutine (30 characters, maximum).

PLC Address: There are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and User
Assigned. Automatic addressing is the default.

Automatic: Use Automatic to create a user-defined subroutine.

User Assigned: (S5 only) Use the User Assigned field to create a
system-activated subroutine. The system-activated subroutine is described in
Section 10.3.

Reserved Address: (S5 only) Used when creating a system-activated subroutine.

Parameter Name: Name of the parameter referenced in the math section; must be
unique within the subroutine (12 characters, maximum).

Parameter Type: Type of parameter: Integer (I), Real (R), Boolean (B), APT Flag
(F), Integer Array (IA), Real Array (RA), Boolean Array (BA).

Parameter Description: Optional description of the parameter (30 characters,

maximum).

10-4 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Using Parameters The user-defined subroutine supports up to five parameters. The parameter
in a User-defined names are local and can only be referenced within the subroutine. You can
Subroutine use the same names elsewhere in the program. If you use a parameter name
that is the same as an object name (e.g., Global Declaration Table variable),
the parameter is referenced, not the object. Parameter names are governed
by the same rules that apply to local declarations for Math language.

If you use an array as a parameter type in a user-defined subroutine, the

entire array is copied, both when the inputs are copied to the subroutine
and when the outputs are copied from the subroutine. You can pass one
element (for example, ARRAY1[1]) in an array as a parameter in the
subroutine.

NOTE: (Series 505 only) If your user-defined subroutine is SFPGM-only,

you cannot create a local variable or reference a global entity from within
the subroutine. You must use the parameter list to pass the variables to and
from APT.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-5

Creating a User-defined Subroutine (continued)

Math in a After entering the optional parameters, you are ready to write the math for
User-defined your user-defined subroutine. The math text is comprised of three sections:
Subroutine the optional code specifier (PRAGMA); declarations; and Math statements.
Figure 10-2 shows these three sections.

PRAGMA {(Series 505 only) Code specifier section; optional. }

.
.
.
{Declaration statements; optional.}
.
.
.

BEGIN {Marks beginning of executable section. }

.
. {Math statements. Do not separate into Init and Body sections.}
.

Figure 10-2 Math Structure for User-defined Subroutine

The structure of the user-defined subroutine is the same as for any math
block, except that there can be no Init or Body sections. PRAGMA, the
optional code specifier section, is only available for Series 505 controllers.

10-6 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Design Guidelines Follow these rules as you design your user-defined subroutine.

 The rules for Math language apply to subroutine math. However, the
subroutine cannot have an Init or Body section.

 Do not use any of the APT flag procedures (Latch, On, or Clear). Use
APT flags only on the right of an assignment statement or within an IF
expression.

 The local declarations for your subroutine follow the same rules as local
declarations in the Math language.

 You cannot use INCREMENT or DECREMENT in subroutines.

 You can nest subroutines up to four levels.

 A subroutine is not re-entrant and cannot call itself.

Your controller type also influences the way you must design a user-defined
subroutine. See the following pages for some Series 505-specific design
guidelines.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-7

Creating a User-defined Subroutine (continued)

For Series 505 controllers, the code that you enter in your user-defined
subroutine determines whether the subroutine can be called from RLL or
SFPGM math blocks. Code not specific to RLL or SF program blocks can be
called from both types of math blocks. For a discussion of RLL-specific and
SF program-specific math blocks, refer to the Math Language Overview
chapter in the SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Graphics/Math)
Manual. If you have an S5 controller, the considerations discussed below do
not apply, because APT compiles all of your code in STL.

RLL-only APT generates an RLL-only subroutine if you do any of the following in your
Subroutine (Series code:
505 only)
 Use RLL-only functions or procedures, and include the optional code
specifier PRAGMA (“RLL”).

 Base your code on integer math operations.

 Create local declarations.

 Reference global entities (variables, declarations, recipes, CFB

extensions, etc.) in the subroutine math.

Note that APT generates more overhead code for a subroutine that is RLL
specific. To handle the input/output parameters in an RLL subroutine, APT
generates code to do the following tasks:

 Copy input values to the subroutine parameters.

 Call the subroutine for execution.

 Copy the parameter values to the outputs.

SFPGM-only A user-defined subroutine can be generated in either RLL or SFPGM.

Subroutine However, the SFPGM subroutines do not allow local declarations or
(Series 505 only) references to global entities.

APT generates an SF program-only subroutine if the code:

 Uses SF program-functions or procedures, and includes the optional

code specifier PRAGMA (“SF”).

 Bases your code on real math operations.

 Uses indirect addressing in arrays, unless your controller performs

indirect addressing in RLL (e.g., 545 Rel. 2.x or greater, 555, or 575).
See Table 1-9 in Chapter 1.

10-8 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Avoiding As a normal part of its operation, a Series 505 controller can temporarily
Temporary suspend execution of a user-defined subroutine that has been compiled into
Variables in SFPGM code, in order to enable execution of another subroutine. When this
SFPGM-only happens, the controller allocates locations in V-Memory to be used as
Subroutines internal, temporary compiler variables for the subroutine that has been
suspended. It is possible for data to be lost under these circumstances, since
the temporary variables of the first subroutine may be overwritten during
execution of the subsequent subroutine.

To avoid the possibility of creating temporary variables that could be

overwritten when your first subroutine is interrupted, you need to observe
the following guidelines for math statements that you use in an
SFPGM-only user-defined subroutine.

 If a function or procedure can accept either a variable or an expression

as a parameter, only use variables. An expression causes temporary
variables to be allocated. If you need to use a value generated by an
expression, you can store the intermediate results of the expression in a
Series 505 controller T-Memory location before calling the subroutine
(%Tx, where x = 11--16).

 When you use the index of an array as a parameter, do not use an

expression for the index; use a variable instead. You can store the
intermediate results of an expression in a Series 505 controller
T-Memory location before calling the subroutine (%Tx, where
x = 11--16).

 Use the PTRUNC procedure instead of the TRUNC function.

 Use the PROUND procedure instead of the ROUND function.

 Avoid using the EDGE function, or device or declaration timers, since

they all use internal memory locations for the temporary storage of
data.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-9

Creating a User-defined Subroutine (continued)

Example of a The following example uses a user-defined subroutine to calculate the level
User-defined of liquid in a tank. If you had several tanks whose levels were being
Subroutine determined in a similar manner, then this subroutine would also allow you
to calculate the level of the liquid in each tank.

This example uses two pressure transmitters to calculate the level and the
density of the fluid in the tank.

The name of the example subroutine is TANK_LVL; it passes these five

parameters: LT_TANK_A, LT_TANK_C, CONSTNTS, SPEC_GRAV, and
LVL_TANK.

The first three parameters are inputs: LT_TANK_A and LT_TANK_C are
the two pressures that reflect the level of the fluid in the tank, and
CONSTNTS is an array of three. SPEC_GRAV and LVL_TANK are the
outputs from the subroutine.

Pressure transmitter 1 is represented by LT_TANK_A, which shows the

pressure at point A, located one inch above the bottom of the tank.

Pressure transmitter 2 is represented by LT_TANK_C, and is 50 inches

higher than the first transmitter. The total tank height is 100 inches.

The values 50, 1 and 100 are sent in the array called CNSTNTS, because
they are the constants for this tank.

10-10 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 The math of the user-defined subroutine example is shown in Figure 10-3.
For Series 505, this math is compiled in SFPGM, because the subroutine
uses the LIMIT math function. The PRAGMA statement shown in the
example is only for a Series 505 controller; an S5 does not need it.

PRAGMA (“SF”); {Use this statement if using a Series 505 controller}

BEGIN

{calculate specific gravity}

{subtract pressure at bottom of tank at point A from pressure at middle of
tank at point C and divide by the distance between the two probes}

SPEC_GRAV := (LT_TANK_A -- LT_TANK_C) / CONSTNTS[1];

{calculate tank level in inches}

{divide pressure at the bottom of tank by specific gravity and add
the height of the bottom transmitter}

LVL_TANK := 0.0;
IF (SPEC_GRAV > 0.0) THEN
LVL_TANK := (LT_TANK_A / SPEC_GRAV) + CONSTNTS[2];
ENDIF;

{convert level to percentage}

{divide tank level by total height of tank}

LVL_TANK := LVL_TANK / CONSTNTS[3] * 100.0 {%};

LIMIT (0.0,100.0,LVL_TANK,LVL_TANK);

Figure 10-3 Math Example for User-defined Subroutine

All of the variables are declared at the global level. A math block calls the
subroutine when it is enabled. The math block is as follows:

begin
TANK_LVL(LT_TANK_A, LT_TANK_C,CONSTNTS, SPEC_GRAV, LVL_TANK);

You can use the subroutine to calculate the density and level in several
tanks, instead of writing CFBs to do the same calculation.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-11

10.3 Creating a System-activated Subroutine

Subroutine Form System-activated subroutines are only available for S5 controllers. The
system-activated subroutine allows you to program the code for OB1--OB39.
You can use either the APT Math language or STL. The code executes when
the OB is called; in other words, when the interrupt or event occurs.

You can program only one OB in each subroutine, and the subroutine must
contain all the code for the given OB. For example, if you have several tasks
for OB13 (100msec interrupt) to perform, you must put all the tasks in the
same subroutine.

Figure 10-4 shows the form you use to program the system-activated
subroutine. To indicate that you wish the subroutine to be system-activated,
rather than user-defined, you select the User Assigned option. You also need
to place the number of the OB that your subroutine accesses in the
Reserved Address field. Since it is a reserved address, be sure to enter the
percent (%) sign before the OB number.

SUBROUTINE
? CTLs OPTs ESC
F1 F2 F3

Name: XXXXXX Type: PRO

Description: _____
PLC Address: Automatic User Assigned
Reserved Address: %OBnn
Optional Parameters

Parm: Name Type Description

{Parameters can only be passed in user-defined, not system-activated, subroutines.}

Press F10 to edit math

Figure 10-4 Subroutine Form for System-activated Subroutines

Name: Unique name that identifies the subroutine (8 characters, maximum).

Type: PRO (procedure).

Description: Description of the subroutine (30 characters, maximum).

PLC Address: There are two controller addressing choices: Automatic and User
Assigned. Automatic addressing is the default.

Automatic: Used to create a user-defined subroutine.

User Assigned: Use the User-Assigned field to create a system-activated
subroutine. You must enter the address of the OB that is accessed by your
subroutine in the Reserved Address field.

Reserved Address: Enter the address of the OB that is accessed by your

subroutine. The syntax is %OBn (where n is 1 through 39).

10-12 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

Programming in a The math text of the system-activated subroutine is comprised of two
System-activated sections: the declaration section, and the Math statement section.
Subroutine Figure 10-5 shows these two sections. The structure of the system-activated
subroutine is the same as for any math block, except that there can be no
Init or Body sections.

{Declaration statements; optional.}

.
.
.

BEGIN {Marks beginning of executable section. }

.
. {Math statements. Do not separate into Init and Body sections.}
. {You can use the IN_ASM Math statement in this section.}
.

Figure 10-5 Math Structure for System-activated Subroutine

You can program the OB that is used by your subroutine entirely in the APT
Math language; or, if you like, you can jump from the OB to an FB that you
have programmed from STEP 5 using STL code.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-13

Creating a System-activated Subroutine (continued)

Design Guidelines Follow these rules as you design your system-activated subroutine.

 The rules for Math language apply to subroutine math. However, the
subroutine cannot have an Init or Body section.

 Do not use any of the APT flag procedures (Latch, On, or Clear). Use
APT flags only on the right of an assignment statement or within an IF
expression.

 The local declarations for your subroutine follow the same rules as local
declarations in the Math language. However, if you want to use a local
declaration in an IN_ASM statement, you must reference it according
to the following syntax: Subroutine_name.NNL.Declaration_name

 All of the Math language statements, functions, and procedures are

available to you, except for the following procedures: SCALE,
UNSCALE, LOOKUP_TABLE, LEAD_LAG, or INTERPOLATE.

NOTE: APT generates an error if you try to use SCALE, UNSCALE,

LOOKUP_TABLE, LEAD_LAG, or INTERPOLATE in a system-activated
subroutine.

 You cannot call a user-defined subroutine from a system-activated

subroutine.

 You cannot call a system-activated subroutine from anywhere within

APT, including from a user-defined or system-activated subroutine.
System-activated subroutines are invoked when an interrupt event
occurs.

! WARNING
System-activated subroutines execute automatically when the interrupt
condition or event occurs.
Trying to call a system-activated subroutine from within your APT program
could cause the controller to behave unpredictably, which could result in death
or serious injury to personnel, and/or damage to equipment.
Do not call system-activated subroutines from within APT.

10-14 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 When you program a system-activated subroutine, APT generates much
more efficient code if you interrupt only on Block boundaries and not on
Operations boundaries. Select the Interrupt on Block Boundaries option
from the Compiler Control File.

When the interrupt occurs for the following OBs, the CPU executes the
interrupt and returns to the point in the code where it was before the
interrupt occurred.

CPU928B CPU948
OBs 2 through 19 OBs 2 through 19
OBs 23 through 27 OBs 23 through 34
OBs 29 through 35 OB 37

Any data that you manipulate from the OB program of your

system-activated subroutine during an interrupt takes on the new value
your OB assigns. For instance, you might have a global variable that counts
the number of cartons being manufactured in your factory, and design an
OB to reset the counter to zero. Each time there is an interrupt, when the
process resumes, the value of the counter variable is zero, regardless of
what it was prior to the interrupt. In this manner, you can purposefully
manipulate variables with a system-activated subroutine.

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-15

Creating a System-activated Subroutine (continued)

Accessing an FB If you want to access an FB in your system-activated subroutine, so that you

from a can program using STL, you must understand how to integrate external
System-activated blocks into APT, using the IN_ASM statement. See the appendix on “Inline
Subroutine Assembly Code for S5,” located in the SIMATIC APT Programming
Reference (Graphics/Math) Manual.

To bring the FB into your system-activated subroutine, follow these steps:

1. Program the FB from STEP 5.

2. Download the FB to the controller, using STEP 5.

3. Use an IN_ASM statement in the code of your system-activated APT

subroutine to invoke the FB.

Using Math When you program your OB exclusively in the APT Math language, the code
Statements in a is more readable, and the code is also automatically checked by the
System-activated compiler. You can program using all of the Math language statements,
Subroutine functions, and procedures with the exception of the procedures noted earlier
in this section, under “Design Guidelines”: INTERPOLATE,
LOOKUP_TABLE, LEAD_LAG, SCALE, and UNSCALE.

Programming your OB with APT Math language, and invoking an FB that

has been coded from STEP 5 in STL, are not mutually exclusive options; you
can do both in a single subroutine. Figure 10-6 shows an example of a
system-activated subroutine that performs operations in the APT Math
language and also calls out from the OB to an FB that has been
programmed with STL.

10-16 User Subroutines APT Programming Reference (Tables)

 Figure 10-6 shows an example of a system-activated subroutine called Sub1.

{Local declaration section}

INTEGER: INT5;

BEGIN

{Section for Math statements, including IN_ASM}

INT5 := 100;

{Math statements}
.
.
.
IN_ASM [*
{STL statements (L, JU, C, and A are permitted in IN_ASM)}
{This is where your OB invokes the FB you have programmed in STL}
.
.
.
{This STL statement references INT5, the local variable of the subroutine}
L SUB1.NNL.INT5
*];
{More Math statements, including more IN_ASM statements}
.
.
.

Figure 10-6 Math Example for System-activated Subroutine

Notice that the local declaration, INT1, is referenced within an IN_ASM

statement using the syntax that is outlined earlier in this section, under
“Design Guidelines.”

APT Programming Reference (Tables) User Subroutines 10-17

 Appendix A
Device RLL Code for Series 505
A.1 Device Extensions and Table Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
VND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
VSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
VSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
VSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
VDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8
VMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
BV1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
BV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
VUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
MSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
MSS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
MDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
MDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
MUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
RM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
RM2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17
TS1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
TS2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
CSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20
CUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22
A.2 RLL for Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-1
A.1 Device Extensions and Table Options

Availability If you have a Series 505 controller, your APT devices generate RLL code. If
you have an S5 controller, your APT devices generate STL code. The RLL
code presented in this appendix is for Series 505 only.

Section A.1 lists the various device extensions in tabular form, according to
the options that can be chosen in the device table. For each device option,
reference is made to the figure in Section A.2 that illustrates the
appropriate RLL code.

Table A-1 lists the options used in the tables of this section. Notice that the
definition is the same as the field label used in the device table. For
example, the code N.O. FDBK [X] means that an X was placed in the brackets
adjacent to the Normally open feedback field for a device.

Table A-1 Device Options Used in the RLL Code

Device Option Definition

EO Energized state: open

EC Energized state: closed
Valves
Clear CMMD on FTO/FTC?: [X]
Clear FTx [X]
(Selected)
Latch the FTR extension?: [X]
Motors Latch FTR [X]
(Selected)
EE Energized state: extend
Cylinders
ER Energized state: retract
ER Energized state: raised
EL Energized state: lowered
Presses
Clear CMMD on FTR/FTL?: [X]
Clear FTx [X]
(Selected)
Uninterruptible power supply
No UPS
not selected
Ignore feedback override?: [ ]
IGN FDBK OVRD [ ]
(Not selected)
All Devices
Ignore feedback override?: [X]
IGN FDBK OVRD [X]
(Selected)
Normally open feedback?: [X]
N.O. FDBK [X]
(Selected)

A-2 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 VND/VSN

For each example, the Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) option was not
selected in the compile control table. When the UPS option is selected, the
.PFAIL contact does not appear. The .PFAIL contact is triggered by the
pgm_name.PWRFL extension.

If the Ignore Feedback Override option is selected, the .OVRDx logic is not
generated.

VND The extensions and options for the VND device are listed in Table A-2 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table.

Table A-2 VND Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

OPND Figure A-1
CLSD Figure A-2
FAILD Figure A-3
MOPEN Figure A-4

VSN The extensions and options for the VSN device are listed in Table A-3 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-3 VSN Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
EO Figure A-7
CMMD
EC Figure A-8
EO Figure A-9
MOPEN
EC Figure A-10
EO Figure A-11
OPND
EC Figure A-12
EO Figure A-13
CLSD
EC Figure A-14
TRVL Figure A-15
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-3
VSS

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

VSS The extensions and options for the VSS device are listed in Table A-4 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-4 VSS Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRD IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-17
EO Figure A-18
OPENC
EC Figure A-19
EO Figure A-20
MOPEN
EC Figure A-21
EO Figure A-22
Open Time Expired
EC Figure A-23
EO Figure A-24
Closed Time Expired
EC Figure A-25
EO Figure A-26
EC Figure A-27
EO, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-28
EC, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-29
EO, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-30
OPND EC, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-31
EO, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-32
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-33
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X],
Figure A-34
Clear FTx [X]
EC, N.O. FDBK [X],IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-35
EO Figure A-36
EC Figure A-37
EO, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-38
EC, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-39
EO, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-40
CLSD EC, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-41
EC, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-42
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-43
EC, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-44
EC, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X], Clear
Figure A-45
FTx [X]

A-4 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 VSS

Table A-4 VSS Extensions and Options (continued)

Extension Option Figure

EO Figure A-46
TRVL
EC Figure A-47
FTO Figure A-48
FTC Figure A-49
EO/EC Figure A-50
CMMD EO, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-51
EC, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-52
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-5
VSD

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

VSD The extensions and options for the VSD device are listed in Table A-5 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-5 VSD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDO IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-53
OVRDC IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-54
EO Figure A-18
OPENC
EC Figure A-19
EO Figure A-20
MOPEN
EC Figure A-21
EO Figure A-22
Open Time Expired
EC Figure A-23
EO Figure A-24
Closed Time Expired
EC Figure A-25
EO Figure A-55
EC Figure A-56
EO, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-57
EC, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-58
EO, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-59
EC, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-60
OPND
EO, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-61
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK
Figure A-62
OVRD [X]
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK
Figure A-63
OVRD [X], Clear FTx [X]
EC, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK
Figure A-64
OVRD [X]

A-6 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 VSD

Table A-5 VSD Extensions and Options (continued)

Extension Option Figure

EO Figure A-65
EC Figure A-66
EO, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-67
EC, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-68
EO, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-69
CLSD EC, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-70
EC, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-71
EO, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-72
EC, N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-73
EC, N.O. FDBK [X],
Figure A-74
IGN FDBK OVRD [X], Clear FTx [X]
EO Figure A-46
TRVL
EC Figure A-47
FAILD Figure A-75
Figure A-76
FTO
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-77
Figure A-78
FTC
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-79
EO/EC Figure A-80
CMMD EO, Clear FTx [X] Figure A-81
EC,Clear FTx [X] Figure A-82
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-7
VDD

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

VDD The extensions and options for the VDD device are listed in Table A-6 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-6 VDD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDO IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-53
OVRDC IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-54
CMMD Figure A-83
OPENC Figure A-84
CLSC Figure A-85
MOPEN Figure A-9
OPNTO Figure A-86
CLSTO Figure A-87
Figure A-88
N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-89
OPND IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-90
N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD
Figure A-91
[X]
Figure A-92
N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-93
CLSD IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-94
N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD
Figure A-95
[X]
TRVL Figure A-96
FTO Figure A-97
FTC Figure A-98
FAILD Figure A-99
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

A-8 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 VMD

VMD The extensions and options for the VMD device are listed in Table A-7 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-7 VMD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image
from NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDO IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-53
OVRDC IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-54
CMMD Figure A-83
STOP Figure A-100
OPENC Figure A-101
CLSC Figure A-102
MOPEN Figure A-9
OPNTO Figure A-103
CLSTO Figure A-104
Figure A-88
N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-89
OPND
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-90
N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-91
Figure A-92
N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-93
CLSD
IGN OVRD [X] Figure A-94
N.O. FDBK [X], IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-95
TRVL Figure A-96
FTO Figure A-97
FTC Figure A-98
FAILD Figure A-99
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-9
BV1

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

BV1 The extensions and options for the BV1 device are listed in Table A-8 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-8 BV1 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image
from NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDL IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-105
OVRDH IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-106
SLOW Figure A-107
SHIGH Figure A-108
MOPEN Figure A-109
MHIGH Figure A-110
OPNTO Figure A-111
CLSTO Figure A-112
OPNDL Figure A-113
OPNDH Figure A-114
OPND Figure A-115
CLSD Figure A-116
TRVL Figure A-117
FTOL Figure A-118
FTOH Figure A-119
FTO Figure A-120
FTC Figure A-121
FAILD Figure A-99
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

A-10 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 BV2

BV2 The extensions and options for the BV2 device are listed in Table A-9 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-9 BV2 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image
from NO UPS Figure A-5
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDL IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-105
OVRDH IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-106
DRV Figure A-122
POS Figure A-123
MOPEN Figure A-124
MHIGH Figure A-110
OPNTO Figure A-125
CLSTO Figure A-126
OPNDL Figure A-113
OPNDH Figure A-114
OPND Figure A-115
CLSD Figure A-116
TRVL Figure A-127
FTOL Figure A-118
FTOH Figure A-119
FTO Figure A-120
FTC Figure A-121
FAILD Figure A-99
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-16
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-11
VUD/MSN

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

VUD The extensions and options for the VUD device are listed in Table A-10 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table.

Table A-10 VUD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

OPNTO Figure A-128
CLSTO Figure A-129

MSN The extensions and options for the MSN device are listed in Table A-11 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-11 MSN Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
CMMD Figure A-131
MSTRT Figure A-132
RUNNG Figure A-133
STPPD Figure A-134
TRVL Figure A-135
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

A-12 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 MSS

MSS The extensions and options for the MSS device are listed in Table A-12 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-12 MSS Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRD IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-17
STRTC Figure A-137
MSTRT Figure A-138
Running Time Expired Figure A-139
Stopped Time Expired Figure A-140
Figure A-141
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-142
RUNNG LATCH FTR [X] Figure A-143
IGN FDBK OVRD [X], LATCH FTR
Figure A-144
[X]
Figure A-145
STPPD
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-146
TRVL Figure A-147
FTR Figure A-148
FTS Figure A-149
Figure A-150
CMMD
LATCH FTR [X] Figure A-151
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-13
MDN

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

MDN The extensions and options for the MDN device are listed in Table A-13 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-13 MDN Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
CMMD Figure A-152
STRTC Figure A-153
STOPC Figure A-154
MSTRT Figure A-132
RUNNG Figure A-133
STPPD Figure A-134
TRVL Figure A-135
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

A-14 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 MDS/MUD

MDS The extensions and options for the MDS device are listed in Table A-14 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-14 MDS Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRD IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-17
CMMD Figure A-152
STRTC Figure A-155
STOPC Figure A-156
MSTRT Figure A-132
STRTO Figure A-157
STPTO Figure A-158
Figure A-159
RUNNG
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-160
Figure A-161
STPPD
IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-162
TRVL Figure A-163
FTR Figure A-164
FTS Figure A-165
Move image to
NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

MUD The extensions and options for the MUD device are listed in Table A-15 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table.

Table A-15 MUD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

STRTO Figure A-166
STPTO Figure A-167

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-15
RM1

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

RM1 The extensions and options for the RM1 device are listed in Table A-16 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-16 RM1 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDF IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-168
OVRDR IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-169
FWRD Figure A-170
SFWRD Figure A-171
REV Figure A-172
SREV Figure A-173
MSTRT Figure A-174
MREV Figure A-175
STRTO Figure A-176
STPTO Figure A-177
RUNF Figure A-178
RUNR Figure A-179
RUNNG Figure A-180
STPPD Figure A-181
TRVL Figure A-182
FTRF Figure A-183
FTRR Figure A-184
FTR Figure A-185
FTS Figure A-186
FAILD Figure A-187
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

A-16 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 RM2

RM2 The extensions and options for the RM2 device are listed in Table A-17 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-17 RM2 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDF IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-168
OVRDR IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-169
FWRD Figure A-170
SFWRD Figure A-171
DRV Figure A-188
DIR Figure A-189
MSTRT Figure A-190
MREV Figure A-191
STRTO Figure A-176
STPTO Figure A-177
RUNF Figure A-178
RUNR Figure A-179
RUNNG Figure A-180
STPPD Figure A-181
TRVL Figure A-182
FTRF Figure A-183
FTRR Figure A-184
FTR Figure A-185
FTS Figure A-186
FAILD Figure A-187
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-17
TS1

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

TS1 The extensions and options for the TS1 device are listed in Table A-18 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-18 TS1 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDL IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-192
OVRDH IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-193
SLOW Figure A-194
SHIGH Figure A-195
MSTRT Figure A-196
MHIGH Figure A-197
STRTO Figure A-198
STPTO Figure A-199
RUNL Figure A-200
RUNH Figure A-201
RUNNG Figure A-202
STPPD Figure A-203
TRVL Figure A-204
FTRL Figure A-205
FTRH Figure A-206
FTR Figure A-207
FTS Figure A-208
FAILD Figure A-187
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

A-18 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TS2

TS2 The extensions and options for the TS2 device are listed in Table A-19 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-19 TS2 Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from NO UPS Figure A-130
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDL IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-192
OVRDH IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-193
DRV Figure A-209
SPEED Figure A-210
MSTRT Figure A-190
MHIGH Figure A-197
STRTO Figure A-211
STPTO Figure A-212
RUNL Figure A-200
RUNH Figure A-201
RUNNG Figure A-202
STPPD Figure A-203
TRVL Figure A-213
FTRL Figure A-205
FTRH Figure A-206
FTR Figure A-207
FTS Figure A-208
FAILD Figure A-187
Move image to NO UPS Figure A-136
V-Memory

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-19
CSD

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

CSD The extensions and options for the CSD device are listed in Table A-20 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table. See Table A-1 for definitions
of the options.

Table A-20 CSD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

Move image from
NO UPS Figure A-214
V-Memory
LOCKD Figure A-6
OVRDE IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-215
OVRDR IGN FDBK OVRD [ ] Figure A-216
EE Figure A-217
CMMD
ER Figure A-218
EE Figure A-219
MEXTEND
ER Figure A-220
EE Figure A-221
Extended Time Expired
ER Figure A-222
EE Figure A-223
Retracted Time Expired
ER Figure A-224
EE Figure A-225
ER Figure A-226
EE, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-227
ER, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-228

EXTENDED EE, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-229

ER, IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-230
EE, N.O. FDBK [X],
Figure A-231
IGN FDBK OVRD [X]
ER, N.O. FDBK [X],
Figure A-232
IGN FDBK OVRD [X]

A-20 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 CSD

Table A-20 CSD Extensions and Options (continued)

Extension Option Figure

EE Figure A-233
ER Figure A-234
EE, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-235
ER, N.O. FDBK [X] Figure A-236
EE, IGN OVRD [X] Figure A-237
RETRACTED
ER, IGN OVRD [X] Figure A-238
EE, N.O. FDBK [X],
Figure A-239
IGN FDBK OVRD [X]
ER, N.O. FDBK [X],
Figure A-240
IGN FDBK OVRD [X]
EE Figure A-241
TRVL
ER Figure A-242
FTE Figure A-243
FTE IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-244
FTR Figure A-245
FTR IGN FDBK OVRD [X] Figure A-246
FAILD Figure A-247
Move image to V-Memory NO UPS Figure A-248

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-21
CUD/Press

Device Extensions and Table Options (continued)

CUD The extensions and options for the CUD device are listed in Table A-21 and
illustrated in the figures specified in the table.

Table A-21 CUD Extensions and Options

Extension Option Figure

EXTTO Figure A-249
RETTO Figure A-250

Press The extensions and options for the Press devices are exactly like the Valve
devices with different extensions. Refer to the Valve section for examples on
how the RLL looks for Presses.

A-22 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
A.2 RLL for Devices

.OLS .OPND

Figure A-1 VND: OPND

.CLS .CLSD

Figure A-2 VND: CLSD

.OLS .CLS .FAILD

Figure A-3 VND: FAILD

.OLS .MOPEN

Figure A-4 VND: MOPEN

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-23
RLL for Devices (continued)

.PFAIL MWIR Bit Bucket

A: .VFLAGS
IR: .OPND
N= X

X = 10: VSN, VSS

= 12: VSD, VDD, VMD
= 13: BV1, BV2

Figure A-5 VALVES: Move Image from V

UNIT
.RTL .DSBLD .RTU .ENABL1 .LOCKD

.LOCKD

1Only applies to Unit devices

Figure A-6 ALL: LOCKD

.CMMD .PFAIL .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .CMMD

.RTO

.MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-7 VSN: CMMD (EO)

A-24 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .CMMD .PFAIL .RTO .LOCKD .NRDY .CMMD

.RTC

.MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-8 VSN: CMMD (EC)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.CMMD .MOPEN

JMPE

Figure A-9 VSN: MOPEN (EO)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-25
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.CMMD .MOPEN

JMPE

Figure A-10 VSN: MOPEN (EC)

TRUE .OPND
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-11 VSN: OPND (EO)

A-26 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TRUE .OPND
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-12 VSN: OPND (EC)

TRUE .CLSD
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-13 VSN: CLSD (EO)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-27
RLL for Devices (continued)

TRUE .CLSD
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-14 VSN: CLSD (EC)

.OPND .CLSD .TRVL

Figure A-15 VSN: TRVL

TRUE MIRW Bit Bucket

IR: .OPND
A: .VFLAGS
N= X

X = 10: VSN, VSS

= 12: VSD, VDD, VMD
= 13: BV1, BV2

Figure A-16 VALVES: Move Image to V

A-28 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OVRD .RESET .OVRD

Figure A-17 VSS: OVRD

.OPENC .PFAIL .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .OPENC

.RTO

.MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-18 VSS: OPENC (EO)

.OPENC .PFAIL .RTO .LOCKD .NRDY .OPENC

.RTC

.MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-19 VSS: OPENC (EC)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-29
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.OPENC .MOPEN

JMPE

Figure A-20 VSS: MOPEN (EO)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.OPENC .MOPEN

JMPE

Figure A-21 VSS: MOPEN (EC)

A-30 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Open Time
expired
TRUE (O.T.E.)
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.OPENC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-22 VSS: OPEN TIME EXPIRED [O.T.E.] (EO)

Open Time
expired
TRUE (O.T.E.)
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.OPENC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-23 VSS: OPEN TIME EXPIRED [O.T.E.] (EC)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-31
RLL for Devices (continued)

Closed Time
Expired
TRUE (C.T.E.)
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.OPENC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-24 VSS: CLOSED TIME EXPIRED [C.T.E.] (EO)

Closed Time
Expired
TRUE (C.T.E.)
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.OPENC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-25 VSS: CLOSED TIME EXPIRED [C.T.E.] (EC)

A-32 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OLS .OVRD .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-26 VSS: OPND (EO)

.CLS .OVRD .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-27 VSS: OPND (EC)

.OLS .OVRD .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-28 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-33
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CLS .OVRD .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-29 VSS: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK)

.OLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-30 VSS: OPND (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-31 VSS: OPND (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .OVRD .OPENC .FTO .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-32 VSS: OPND (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

A-34 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-33 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .OPENC .FTO .OPND

Figure A-34 VSS: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)
(CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-35 VSS: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .OVRD .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-36 VSS: CLSD (EO)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-35
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CLS .OVRD .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-37 VSS: CLSD (EC)

.OLS .OVRD .OPENC .OPND

Close Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-38 VSS: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK)

.CLS .OVRD .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-39 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK)

A-36 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-40 VSS: CLSD (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-41 VSS: CLSD (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OVRD .OPENC .FTC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-42 VSS: CLSD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-43 VSS: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-37
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-44 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OPENC .FTC .CLSD

Figure A-45 VSS: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)
(CLEAR CMMD OF FTO/FTC)

Open Time
Expired
.OPENC .OPND (O.T.E.) .TRVL

Closed Time
Expired
.OPENC .CLSD (C.T.E.)

Figure A-46 VSS: TRVL (EO)

A-38 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Open Time
Expired
.OPENC .OPND (O.T.E.) .TRVL

Closed time
expired
.OPENC .CLSD (C.T.E.)

Figure A-47 VSS: TRVL (EC)

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OPND .FTO

Figure A-48 VSS: FTO

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .CLSD .FTC

Figure A-49 VSS: FTC

.OPENC .CMMD

Figure A-50 VSS: CMMD (EO/EC)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-39
RLL for Devices (continued)

.OPENC .FTO .CMMD

Figure A-51 VSS: CMMD (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.OPENC .FTC .CMMD

Figure A-52 VSS: CMMD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.OVRDO .RESET .OVRDO

Figure A-53 VSD: OVRDO

.OVRDC .RESET .OVRDC

Figure A-54 VSD: OVRDC

A-40 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OLS .OVRDO .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-55 VSD: OPND (EO)

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-56 VSD: OPND (EC)

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-57 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-41
RLL for Devices (continued)

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-58 VSD: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK)

.OLS .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-59 VSD: OPENC (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-60 VSD: OPND (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .OPENC .FAILD .OPND

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-61 VSD: OPND (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

A-42 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OLS .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-62 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .CLS .OPENC .FAILD .OPND

Figure A-63 VSD: OPND (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)
(CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.OLS .CLS .OPENC .OPND

Figure A-64 VSD: OPND (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-65 VSD: CLSD (EO)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-43
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-66 VSD: CLSD (EC)

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-67 VSD: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK)

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-68 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK)

A-44 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .CLS .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-69 VSD: CLSD (EO) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-70 VSD: CLSD (EC) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .OPENC .FAILD .CLSD

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-71 VSD: CLSD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.CLS .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-72 VSD: CLSD (EO) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-45
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CLS .OLS .OPENC .CLSD

Figure A-73 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OLS .OPENC .FAILD .CLSD

Figure A-74 VSD: CLSD (EC) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)
(CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.TRVL .OLS .CLS .FAILD

Figure A-75 VSD: FAILD

Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OPND .OVRDO .FAILD .FTO

Figure A-76 VSD: FTO

A-46 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Open Time
Expired
(O.T.E.) .OPND .FAILD .FTO

Figure A-77 VSD: FTO (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .CLSD .OVRDC .FAILD .FTC

Figure A-78 VSD: FTC

Closed Time
Expired
(C.T.E.) .CLSD .FAILD .FTC

Figure A-79 VSD: FTC (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OPENC .CMMD

Figure A-80 VSD: CMMD (EO)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-47
RLL for Devices (continued)

.OPENC .FTO .FAILD .CMMD

Figure A-81 VSD: CMMD (EO) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.OPENC .FTC .FAILD .CMMD

Figure A-82 VSD: CMMD (EC) (CLEAR CMMD ON FTO/FTC)

.CMMD .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .CMMD

.RTO

.MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-83 VDD: CMMD

.CMMD .OPND .OPNTO .OPENC

Figure A-84 VDD: OPENC

A-48 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .CMMD .CLSD .CLSTO .CLSC

Figure A-85 VDD: CLSC

TRUE .OPNTO
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-86 VDD: OPNTO

TRUE .CLSTO
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-87 VDD: CLSTO

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-49
RLL for Devices (continued)

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .CMMD .OPND

.OPNTO .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-88 VDD: OPND

.OLS .OVRDO .CLS .CMMD .OPND

.OPNTO .OVRDO .OVRDC

Figure A-89 VDD: OPND (N.O. FDBK)

.OLS .CLS .CMMD .OPND

Figure A-90 VDD: OPND (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.OLS .CLS .CMMD .OPND

Figure A-91 VDD: OPND (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

A-50 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .CLS .OVRDC .OLS .CMMD .CLSD

.CLSTO .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-92 VDD: CLSD

.CLS .OVRDC .OLS .CMMD .CLSD

.CLSTO .OVRDC .OVRDO

Figure A-93 VDD: CLSD (N.O. FDBK)

.CLS .OLS .CMMD .CMMD

Figure A-94 VDD: CLSD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CLS .OLS .CMMD .CMMD

Figure A-95 VDD: CLSD (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-51
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CMMD .OPND .OPNTO .TRVL

.CMMD .CLSD .CLSTO

Figure A-96 VDD: TRVL

.OPNTO .OLS .OVRDO .FTO

Figure A-97 VDD: FTO

.CLSTO .CLS .OVRDC .FTC

Figure A-98 VSD: FTC

.OPNTO .OPND .FTO .FAILD

.CLSTO .CLSD .FTC

Figure A-99 VDD: FAILD

A-52 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .STOP .RTO .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .STOP

.RTS

Figure A-100 VMD: STOP

.CMMD .OPND .OPNTO .STOP .OPENC

Figure A-101 VMD: OPENC

.CMMD .CLSD .CLSTO .STOP .CLSC

Figure A-102 VMD: CLSC

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-53
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CMMD .STOP .RESET .PFAIL .$SCRATCH

.TRUE .OPNTO
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH

Figure A-103 VMD: OPNTO

.CMMD .STOP .RESET .PFAIL .$SCRATCH

.TRUE .CLSTO
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH

Figure A-104 VMD: CLSTO

A-54 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OVRDL .RESET .OVRDL

Figure A-105 BV1: OVRDL

.OVRDH .RESET .OVRDH

Figure A-106 BV1: OVRDH

.SLOW .PFAIL .RHIGH .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .SLOW

.RLOW

.MHIGH .MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-107 BV1: SLOW

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-55
RLL for Devices (continued)

.SHIGH .PFAIL .RLOW .RTC .LOCKD .NRDY .SHIGH

.RHIGH

.MHIGH .MOPEN .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-108 BV1: SHIGH

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.SLOW .MOPEN

.SHIGH

JMPE

Figure A-109 BV1: MOPEN

A-56 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .LOCKD .MHIGH .SLOW .HIPOS

.PFAIL .MHIGH

.HIPOS .LOCKD

.SHIGH

Figure A-110 BV1: MHIGH

.SLOW .$SCRATCH
:O:

.SHIGH
:O:

.MOPEN

.MOPEN .OPNTO
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-111 BV1: OPNTO

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-57
RLL for Devices (continued)

.MOPEN .CLSTO
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.MOPEN .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-112 BV1: CLSTO

.LIO .OVRDL .HIO .SLOW .OPNDL

.OPNTO .OVRDL .OVRDH

Figure A-113 BV1: OPNDL

.HIO .OVRDH .LIO .SHIGH .OPNDH

.OPNTO .OVRDH .OVRDL

Figure A-114 BV1: OPNDH

A-58 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .OPNDL .OPND

.OPNDH

Figure A-115 BV1: OPND

.LIO .OVRDL .SLOW .NOPNDL

.CLSTO .OVRDL

.NOPNDL

.HIO .OVRDH .SHIGH .NOPNDH

.CLSTO .OVRDH

.NOPNDH

.NOPNDL .NOPNDH .CLSD

Figure A-116 BV1: CLSD

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-59
RLL for Devices (continued)

.MOPEN .OPND .OPNTO .TRVL

.MOPEN .CLSD .CLSTO

Figure A-117 BV1: TRVL

.OPNTO .SLOW .LIO .OVRDL .FTOL

Figure A-118 BV1: FTOL

.OPNTO .SHIGH .HIO .OVRDH .FTOH

Figure A-119 BV1: FTOH

.FTOL .FTO

.FTOH

Figure A-120 BV1: FTO

A-60 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .LIO .CLSTO .CLSD .FTC

.OVRDL

.HIO

.OVRDH

Figure A-121 BV1: FTC

.SLOW .DRV

.SHIGH

Figure A-122 BV2: DRV

.SHIGH .SLOW .POS

.POS

Figure A-123 BV2: POS

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-61
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.DRV .MOPEN

JMPE

Figure A-124 BV2: MOPEN

A-62 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .SLOW .$SCRATCH
:O:

.SHIGH
:O:

.DRV

.DRV .OPNTO
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-125 BV2: OPNTO

.DRV .CLSTO
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.DRV .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-126 BV2: CLSTO

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-63
RLL for Devices (continued)

.DRV .OPND .OPNTO .TRVL

.DRV .CLSD .CLSTO

Figure A-127 BV2: TRVL

TRUE .OPNTO
TMR
P= .OTCP
VALUE
.RESET

Figure A-128 VUD: OPNTO

TRUE .CLSTO
TMR
P= .CTCP
VALUE
.RESET

Figure A-129 VUD: CLSTO

A-64 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TRUE MIRW Bit Bucket
IR: .RUNNG
A: .VFLAGS
N= X

X = 10: MSN, MSS, MDS, MDN

= 13: RM1, RM2
TS1, TS2

Figure A-130 MOTORS: Move Image To V

.CMMD .PFAIL .RTS .LOCKD .NRDY .CMMD

.RTR

.MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-131 MSN: CMMD

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-65
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.CMMD .MSTRT

JMPE

Figure A-132 MSN: MSTRT

TRUE .RUNNG
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-133 MSN: RUNNG

A-66 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TRUE .STPPD
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-134 MSN: STPPD

.RUNNG .STPPD .TRVL

Figure A-135 MSN: TRVL

.PFAIL MWIR Bit Bucket

A: .VFLAGS
IR: .RUNNG
N= X

X = 10: MSN, MSS, MDS, MDN

= 13: RM1, RM2
TS1, TS2

Figure A-136 MOTORS: Move Image from V

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-67
RLL for Devices (continued)

.STRTC .PFAIL .RTS .LOCKD .NRDY .STRTC

.RTR

.MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-137 MSS: STRTC

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.STRTC .MSTRT

JMPE

Figure A-138 MSS: MSTRT

A-68 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Running Time
Expired
TRUE (R.T.E.)
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.STRTC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-139 MSS: Running Time Expired (R.T.E.)

Stopped Time
Expired
TRUE (S.T.E.)
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.STRTC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-140 MSS: Stopped Time Expired (S.T.E)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-69
RLL for Devices (continued)

.RUNIO .OVRD .STRTC .RUNNG

Running Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-141 MSS: RUNNG

.RUNIO .STRTC .RUNNG

Figure A-142 MSS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.RUNIO .OVRD .STRTC .FTR .RUNNG

Running Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-143 MSS: RUNNG (LATCH FTR)

A-70 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .RUNIO .STRTC .FTR .RUNNG

Figure A-144 MSS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD) (LATCH FTR)

.RUNIO .OVRD .STRTC .STPPD

Stopped Time
Expired
(S.T.E.) .OVRD

Figure A-145 MSS: STPPD

.RUNIO .STRTC .RUNNG

Figure A-146 MSS: STPPD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-71
RLL for Devices (continued)

Running Time
Expired
.STRTC .RUNNG (R.T.E.) .TRVL

Stopped Time
Expired
.STRTC .STPPD (S.T.E.)

Figure A-147 MSS: TRVL

Running Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .RUNNG .FTR

Figure A-148 MSS: FTR

Stopped Time
Expired
(S.T.E.) .STPPD .FTS

Figure A-149 MSS: FTS

.STRTC .CMMD

Figure A-150 MSS: CMMD

A-72 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .STRTC .FTR .CMMD

Figure A-151 MSS: CMMD (LATCH FTR)

.CMMD .RTS .LOCKD .NRDY .CMMD

.RTR

.MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-152 MDN: CMMD

.CMMD .RUNNG .STRTC

Figure A-153 MDN: STRTC

.CMMD .STPPD .STOPC

Figure A-154 MDN: STOPC

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-73
RLL for Devices (continued)

.CMMD .RUNNG .STRTO .STRTC

Figure A-155 MDS: STRTC

.CMMD .STPPD .STPTO .STOPC

Figure A-156 MDS: STOPC

TRUE .STRTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-157 MDS: STRTO

A-74 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TRUE .STPTO
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.CMMD .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-158 MDS: STPTO

.RUNIO .OVRD .CMMD .RUNNG

.STRTO .OVRD

Figure A-159 MDS: RUNNG

.RUNIO .CMMD .RUNNG

Figure A-160 MDS: RUNNG (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-75
RLL for Devices (continued)

.RUNIO .OVRD .CMMD .STPPD

.STPTO .OVRD

Figure A-161 MDS: STPPD

.RUNIO .CMMD .STPPD

Figure A-162 MDS: STPPD (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.CMMD .RUNNG .STRTO .TRVL

.CMMD .STPPD .STPTO

Figure A-163 MDS: TRVL

.STRTO .RUNNG .FTR

Figure A-164 MDS: FTR

A-76 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .STPTO .STPPD .FTS

Figure A-165 MDS: FTS

TRUE .STRTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.RESET

Figure A-166 MUD: STRTO

TRUE .STPTO
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.RESET

Figure A-167 MUD: STPTO

.OVRDF .RESET .OVRDF

Figure A-168 RM1: OVRDF

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-77
RLL for Devices (continued)

.OVRDR .RESET .OVRDR

Figure A-169 RM1: OVRDR

.FWRD .RREV .RSTOP .LOCKD .NRDY .FWRD

.RFWRD

.MREV .MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-170 RM1: FWRD

.STPPD .FWRD .SFWRD

.SFWRD

Figure A-171 RM1: SFWRD

A-78 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .REV .RFWRD .RSTOP .LOCKD .NRDY .REV

.RREV

.MREV .MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-172 RM1: REV

.STPPD .REV .SREV

.SREV

Figure A-173 RM1: SREV

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-79
RLL for Devices (continued)

.SFWRD .DRV

.SREV

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.DRV .MSTRT

JMPE

Figure A-174 RM1: MSTRT

.LOCKD .MREV .SFWRD .DIR

.PFAIL .MREV

.DIR .LOCKD

.SREV

Figure A-175 RM1: MREV

A-80 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 TRUE .STRTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.DRV .RESET

Figure A-176 RM1: STRTO

TRUE .STPTO
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.DRV .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-177 RM1: STPTO

.FIO .OVRDF .RIO .SFWRD .RUNF

.STRTO .OVRDF .OVRDR

Figure A-178 RM1: RUNF

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-81
RLL for Devices (continued)

.RIO .OVRDR .FIO .SREV .RUNR

.STRTO .OVRDR .OVRDF

Figure A-179 RM1: RUNR

.RUNF .RUNNG

.RUNR

Figure A-180 RM1: RUNNG

.FIO .RIO .STPTO .STPPD

.OVRDF .OVRDR

Figure A-181 RM1: STPPD

A-82 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .DRV .RUNNG .STRTO .TRVL

.DRV .STPTO

Figure A-182 RM1: TRVL

.STRTO .SFWRD .FIO .OVRDF .FTRF

Figure A-183 RM1: FTRF

.STPTO .SREV .RIO .OVRDR .FTRR

Figure A-184 RM1: FTRR

.FTRF .FTR

.FTRR

Figure A-185 RM1: FTR

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-83
RLL for Devices (continued)

.FIO .STPTO .STPPD .FTS

.OVRDF

.RIO

.OVRDR

Figure A-186 RM1: FTS

.RUNNG .FTR .STRTO .FAILD

.STPPD .FTS .STPTO

Figure A-187 RM1: FAILD

.SFWRD .DRV

.SREV

Figure A-188 RM2: DRV

A-84 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .SREV .SFWRD .DIR

.DIR

Figure A-189 RM2: DIR

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.DRV .MSTRT

JMPE

Figure A-190 RM2: MSTRT

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-85
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD .MREV .SFWRD .DIRSP

.PFAIL .MREV

.DIRSP .LOCKD

.SREV

Figure A-191 RM2: MREV

.OVRDL .RESET .OVRDL

Figure A-192 TS1: OVRDL

.OVRDH .RESET .OVRDH

Figure A-193 TS1: OVRDH

A-86 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .SLOW .PFAIL .RHIGH .RSTOP .LOCKD .NRDY .SLOW

.RLOW

.MHIGH .MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-194 TS1: SLOW

.SHIGH .PFAIL .RLOW .RSTOP .LOCKD .NRDY .SHIGH

.RHIGH

.MHIGH .MSTRT .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-195 TS1: SHIGH

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-87
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.SLOW .MSTRT

.SHIGH

JMPE

Figure A-196 TS1: MSTRT

.LOCKD .MHIGH .SLOW .HISPD

.PFAIL .MHIGH

.HISPD .LOCKD

.SHIGH

Figure A-197 TS1: MHIGH

A-88 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .SLOW .$SCRATCH
:O:

.SHIGH
:O:

.MSTRT

.MSTRT .STRTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-198 TS1: STRTO

.MSTRT .STPTO
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.MSTRT .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-199 TS1: STPTO

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-89
RLL for Devices (continued)

.LIO .OVRDL .HIO .SLOW .RUNL

.STRTO .OVRDL .OVRDH

Figure A-200 TS1: RUNL

.HIO .OVRDH .LIO .SHIGH .RUNH

.STRTO .OVRDH .OVRDL

Figure A-201 TS1: RUNH

.RUNL .RUNNG

.RUNH

Figure A-202 TS1: RUNNG

A-90 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .LIO .OVRDL .SLOW .NRUNL

.STPTO .OVRDL

.NRUNL

.HIO .OVRDH .SHIGH .NRUNH

.STPTO .OVRDH

.NRUNH

.NRUNL .NRUNH .STPPD

Figure A-203 TS1: STPPD

.MSTRT .RUNNG .STRTO .TRVL

.MSTRT .STPPD .STPTO

Figure A-204 TS1: TRVL

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-91
RLL for Devices (continued)

.STRTO .SLOW .LIO .OVRDL .FTRL

Figure A-205 TS1: FTRL

.STRTO .SHIGH .HIO .OVRDH .FTRH

Figure A-206 TS1: FTRH

.FTRL .FTR

.FTRH

Figure A-207 TS1: FTR

A-92 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .LIO .STPTO .STPPD .FTS

.OVRDL

.HIO

.OVRDH

Figure A-208 TS1: FTS

.SLOW .DRV

.SHIGH

Figure A-209 TS2: DRV

.SHIGH .SLOW .SPEED

.SPEED

Figure A-210 TS2: SPEED

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-93
RLL for Devices (continued)

.SLOW .$SCRATCH
:O:

.SHIGH
:O:

.DRV

.DRV .STRTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.$SCRATCH .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-211 TS2: STRTO

.DRV .STPTO
TMR
P= .STCP
VALUE
.DRV .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-212 TS2: STPTO

A-94 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .DRV .RUNNG .STRTO .TRVL

.DRV .STPPD .STPTO

Figure A-213 TS2: TRVL

.PFAIL MWIR Bit Bucket

A: .VFLAGS
IR: .EXTENDED
N= X

X = 12: CYLINDERS

Figure A-214 CYLINDERS: Move Image from V

.OVRDE .RESET .OVRDE

Figure A-215 CSD: OVRDE

.OVRDR .RESET .OVRDR

Figure A-216 CSD: OVRDR

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-95
RLL for Devices (continued)

.EXTENDC .PFAIL .RTR .LOCKD .NRDY .EXTENDC

.RTE

.MEXTEND .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-217 CSD: CMMD (EE)

.EXTENDC .PFAIL .RTE .LOCKD .NRDY .EXTENDC

.RTR

.MEXTEND .LOCKD .PFAIL

Figure A-218 CSD: CMMD (ER)

A-96 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.EXTENDC .MEXTEND

JMPE

Figure A-219 CSD: MEXTEND (EE)

.LOCKD JMP

.NRDY

.PFAIL

.EXTENDC .MEXTEND

JMPE

Figure A-220 CSD: MEXTEND (ER)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-97
RLL for Devices (continued)

Extend Time
Expired
TRUE (E.T.E.)
TMR
P= .ETCP
VALUE
.EXTENDC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-221 CSD: EXTEND TIME EXPIRED [E.T.E] (EE)

Extend Time
Expired
.TRUE (E.T.E.)
TMR
P= .ETCP
VALUE
.EXTENDC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-222 CSD: EXTEND TIME EXPIRED [E.T.E] (ER)

Retract Time
Expired
TRUE (R.T.E.)
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.EXTENDC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-223 CSD: RETRACT TIME EXPIRED [R.T.E] (EE)

A-98 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Retract Time
Expired
.TRUE (R.T.E.)
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.EXTENDC .RESET .PFAIL

Figure A-224 CSD: RETRACT TIME EXPIRED [R.T.E] (ER)

.ELS .OVRDE .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .OVRDE .OVRDR

Figure A-225 CSD: EXTENDED (EE)

.ELS .OVRDE .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .OVRDE .OVRDR

Figure A-226 CSD: EXTENDED (ER)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-99
RLL for Devices (continued)

.ELS .OVRDE .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .OVRDE .OVRDR

Figure A-227 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (N.O. FDBK)

.ELS .OVRDE .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .OVRDE .OVRDR

Figure A-228 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (N.O. FDBK)

.ELS .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Figure A-229 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.ELS .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Figure A-230 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

A-100 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .ELS .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Figure A-231 CSD: EXTENDED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.ELS .RLS .EXTENDC .EXTENDED

Figure A-232 CSD: EXTENDED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.RLS .OVRDR .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRDR .OVRDE

Figure A-233 CDS: RETRACTED (EE)

.RLS .OVRDR .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRDR .OVRDE

Figure A-234 CSD: RETRACTED (ER)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-101
RLL for Devices (continued)

.RLS .OVRDR .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRDR .OVRDE

Figure A-235 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (N.O. FDBK)

.RLS .OVRDR .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .OVRDR .OVRDE

Figure A-236 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (N.O. FDBK)

.RLS .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Figure A-237 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

.RLS .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Figure A-238 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

A-102 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 .RLS .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Figure A-239 CSD: RETRACTED (EE) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK

OVRD)

.RLS .ELS .EXTENDC .RETRACTED

Figure A-240 CSD: RETRACTED (ER) (N.O. FDBK) (IGNORE FDBK

OVRD)

Extend Time
Expired
.CMMD .EXTENDED (E.T.E.) .TRVL

Retract Time
Expired
.CMMD .RETRACTED (R.T.E.)

Figure A-241 CSD: TRVL (EE)

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-103
RLL for Devices (continued)

Extend Time
Expired
.CMMD .EXTENDED (E.T.E.) .TRVL

Retract Time
Expired
.CMMD .RETRACTED (R.T.E.)

Figure A-242 CSD: TRVL (ER)

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .ELS .OVRDE .FTE

Figure A-243 CSD: FTE

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .ELS .FTE

Figure A-244 CSD: FTE (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .RLS .OVRDR .FTR

Figure A-245 CSD: FTR

A-104 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .RLS .FTR

Figure A-246 CSD: FTR (IGNORE FDBK OVRD)

Extend Time
Expired
(E.T.E.) .EXTENDED .FTE .FAILD

Retract Time
Expired
(R.T.E.) .RETRACTED .FTR

Figure A-247 CSD: FAILD

TRUE MIWR Bit Bucket

IR: .EXTENDED
A: .VFLAGS
N= X

X = 12: CYLINDERS

Figure A-248 CYLINDERS: Move image to V

APT Programming Reference (Tables) Device RLL Code for Series 505 A-105
RLL for Devices (continued)

TRUE .EXTTO
TMR
P= .ETCP
VALUE
.ERESET

Figure A-249 CUD: EXTTO

TRUE .RETTO
TMR
P= .RTCP
VALUE
.RRESET

Figure A-250 CUD: RETTO

A-106 Device RLL Code for Series 505 APT Programming Reference (Tables)
 Index
Numbers Analog input (continued)
scaling, 5-10
110 VAC rapid response module, 4-72 symbolic name extensions, 5-7, 5-11, 5-18,
5-19
110 VAC redundant output module, 4-71
Analog output
120 VDC rapid response module, 4-73 defining, 5-12
16-channel discrete input module, 4-32 I/O type, 5-3, 5-11
scaling, 5-13
16-channel discrete output module, 4-33
APT
16AF module, high density advanced function, controller models supported, 1-22
4-85 features
16-channel analog input module, 4-31 S5, 1-25
Series 505, 1-26
16-RTD module, 4-61
tools
2-channel analog output module, 4-9 S5, 1-24
20-channel AI/4-channel AO module, 4-34 Series 505, 1-24

24 VDC rapid response module, 4-74 APT flag. See Flag, APT

32-channel discrete input module, 4-35 Arrays

boolean, 8-26
32-channel discrete output module, 4-37 declaration table, 8-22
386/ATM coprocessor module, 4-66 DI10, 8-28
DO10, 8-30
4-ch analog in/4-ch analog out module, 4-13 integer, 8-24
4-channel analog input module, 4-11 real, 8-32
sequence, 8-34
4-channel analog output module, 4-12
shift register, 8-38
8-channel analog input module, 4-16, 4-17 text, 8-42
8-channel analog output module, 4-18, 4-19 ASCII message output module, 4-46
8-channel discrete input module, 4-27
8-channel discrete output module, 4-29
B
8-RTD module, 4-61
BCD, parallel word module, 4-20, 4-23, 4-26
BCD input
A defining, 5-21
I/O type, 5-5, 5-20
Address (controller) symbolic name extensions, 5-20
assigning, 4-4
channel ranges, 4-5 BCD output
defining, 5-23
Analog input I/O type, 5-5, 5-22
defining, 5-8 symbolic name extensions, 5-22
I/O type, 5-3, 5-6

Index-1
Bipolar, scaling, 5-10, 5-13 Cylinder
commands, 6-8
Booleans
device type, 6-6
declaration table, 8-12
extensions, 6-18
extensions, 8-13
RLL code, A-20, A-95
in arrays, 8-26
single-drive, dual-feedback, 7-64
BV1 user-defined, 7-68
commands, 7-28
extensions, 7-28
three-position/dual-feedback valve, 7-26
D
BV2
commands, 7-32 Date extensions, 2-6
extensions, 7-32 Declaration table
three-position/dual-feedback valve, 7-30 declaration types, 8-3
entering constants and variables, 8-4
PCS tag translation, 8-6
C Declaration types
APT flag, 8-16
CFC, language, 1-20
boolean, 8-12
Commands, symbolic name, DF, 5-14 boolean array, 8-26
Communications processor (CP1434TF), 4-84 counter presets, 8-44
DI10 array, 8-28
Configuration, APT objects, 1-14 DO10 array, 8-30
Constants integer, 8-7
declaration types, 8-3 integer array, 8-24
entering in declaration table, 8-4 real, 8-14
PCS tag translation, 8-6 real array, 8-32
scaled integer, 8-9
Controller, models supported by APT, 1-22 sequence array, 8-34
Counter shift register array, 8-38
extensions, 8-46 text, 8-19
presets, in declaration table, 8-44 text array, 8-42
timer (fast) presets, 8-50
Counter modules
timer (slow) presets, 8-52
HSC, 4-54
timer presets, 8-48
HSCE, 4-88
HSPI, 4-52 Device
auto mode, 6-2, 6-24
CP1434TF, H1 communications processor, 4-84
changing mode, 6-26
CSD changing state, 6-27
commands, 7-66 commands
extensions, 7-66 cylinder, 6-8
single-drive/dual-feedback cylinder, 7-64 motor, 6-8
CUD press, 6-8
commands, 7-70 stopwatch, 6-8
extensions, 7-70 timer, 6-8
user-defined cylinder, 7-68 valve, 6-8

Index-2
Device (continued) Device (continued)
cylinder types, 6-6
RLL code, A-20, A-95 valve
single-drive/dual-feedback (CSD), 7-64 dual-drive/dual-feedback (VDD), 7-14
user-defined (CUD), 7-68 hand-operated dual feedback (VND), 7-2,
defined, 6-2 7-72
dual feedback, 6-32 motor-drive/dual-feedback (VMD), 7-18
extensions, 6-10 RLL code, A-3, A-23
.VFLAGS (S5), 6-35 single-drive single feedback (VSS), 7-6
.VFLAGS (Series 505), 6-34 single-drive/dual-feedback (VSD), 7-10
cylinder, 6-18 single-drive/null-feedback (VSN), 7-4
motor, 6-16 three-position/dual-feedback (BV1), 7-26
press, 6-20 three-position/dual-feedback (BV2), 7-30
stopwatch, 6-17, 6-22 user-defined (VUD), 7-22
timer, 6-17, 6-22 DI10, in arrays, 8-28
valve, 6-13
fail bit, 6-31, 6-33 Digital flag
feedback override, 6-28 defining, 5-15
manual mode, 6-2, 6-23 I/O type, 5-4, 5-14
motor symbolic name commands, 5-14
dual-drive/null-feedback (MDN), 7-38 Digital input
dual-drive/single-feedback (MDS), 7-40 defining, 5-16
reversible type 1 (RM1), 7-48 I/O type, 5-4, 5-16
reversible type 2 (RM2), 7-52
RLL code, A-12, A-65 Digital output
single-drive/null-feedback (MSN), 7-34 defining, 5-17
single-drive/single-feedback (MSS), 7-36 I/O type, 5-4, 5-17
two-speed type 1 (TS1), 7-56 Direct controller addresses, defined, 3-2
two-speed type 2 (TS2), 7-60
DO10, in arrays, 8-30
user-defined (MUD), 7-44
null feedback, 6-29 Dot extensions, defined, 1-15
position bit, 6-31 Dual comm port module, 4-50
power fail recovery, 6-34
press
dual-drive/dual-feedback (PDD), 7-84
motor-drive/dual-feedback (PMD), 7-88 E
single-drive/dual-feedback (PSD), 7-80
ENET module, ethernet TCP/IP adapter, 4-87
single-drive/null-feedback (PSN), 7-74
single-drive/single-feedback (PSS), 7-76 Error codes, program extensions, 2-5
three-position/dual-feedback (PS1), 7-96 Ethernet TCP/IP adapter module, 4-87
three-position/dual-feedback (PS2), 7-100
user-defined (PUD), 7-92 Expert solutions processor (ESP) module, 4-67
reset command, 6-28 Extensions
single feedback, 6-30 date, 2-6
state bit, 6-31 defined, 1-15
status, 6-36
stopwatch, three-state (TMR), 7-104
timer, three-state (TMR), 7-104

Index-3
Extensions (continued) High speed counter encoder module, 4-54, 4-88
device, 6-10
High speed PID controller module, 4-70
cylinder, 6-18
motor, 6-16 High speed pulse input module, 4-52
press, 6-20 HSCE module, high speed counter encoder, 4-88
stopwatch, 6-17, 6-22
timer, 6-17, 6-22
valve, 6-13
error codes, 2-5 I
program, 2-3, 2-6
I/O
symbolic name
input modules (Series 505)
AI, 5-7, 5-11, 5-18, 5-19
16-channel discrete, 4-32
BI, 5-20
16-channel analog, 4-31
BO, 5-22
20-ch AI/4-ch AO, 4-34
RT, 5-24
32-channel discrete, 4-35
TC, 5-27
4-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-13
time of day, 2-6
4-channel analog, 4-11
unit, 2-6
6-ch analog in/2-ch analog out, 4-14
8-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-15
8-channel analog, 4-16, 4-17
F 8-channel discrete, 4-27
parallel word, 4-20
Fail bit for devices, 6-31, 6-33 smartslice, 4-39
Feedback for devices output modules (Series 505)
dual, 6-32 16-channel discrete, 4-33
null, 6-29 2-channel analog, 4-9
override, 6-28 20-ch AI/4-ch AO, 4-34
single, 6-30 32-channel discrete, 4-37
4-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-13
FIM module
4-channel analog, 4-12
SIMOREG broadcast mode, 4-78
6-ch analog in/2-ch analog out, 4-14
SIMOREG mode, 4-76
8-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-15
SIMOVERT broadcast mode, 4-82
8-channel analog, 4-18, 4-19
SIMOVERT mode, 4-80
8-channel discrete, 4-29
Firmware support parallel word, 4-23
S5, 1-23 smartslice, 4-39
Series 505, 1-23 referencing
direct address, 3-2
Flag, APT
symbolic name, 3-2
commands, 8-17
special function (SF) modules
declaration table, 8-16
110 VAC rapid response, 4-72
110 VAC redundant output, 4-71
120 VDC rapid response, 4-73
H 16-RTD, 4-61
24 VDC rapid response, 4-74
H1 communications processor, 4-84
386/ATM coprocessor, 4-66
High density advanced function module, 4-85 8-RTD, 4-61

Index-4
I/O Integers
special function (SF) modules (continued) arrays, 8-24
ASCII, 4-46 commands, 8-8
BASIC, 4-48 declaration table, 8-7
dual comm port, 4-50 extensions, 8-8
ESP, 4-67 scaled, declaration table, 8-9
ethernet TCP/IP adapter, 4-87 sequenced, in arrays, 8-34
FIM shift register, in arrays, 8-38
SIMOREG broadcast mode, 4-78
Isolated interrupt input module, 4-44
SIMOREG mode, 4-76
SIMOVERT broadcast mode, 4-82
SIMOVERT mode, 4-80
H1 communications processor, 4-84 K
high density advanced function, 4-85
Key words, 1-13
high speed counter encoder, 4-54, 4-88
high speed input, 4-52
high speed PID controller, 4-70
isolated interrupt input, 4-44 L
NIM, 4-55
Peerlink, 4-57, 4-59 Languages
program port expander, 4-90 CFC, 1-20
RTD, 4-61 math, 1-17
servo axis, 4-63 SFC, 1-18, 1-19
thermocouple, 4-64 state control, 1-17
turbomold, 4-68
user defined, 4-40, 4-42
symbolic name M
assigning, 4-7
defining, 3-9 Math, language, 1-17
table, 3-5 Math language, subroutines, 10-2
symbolic name types
analog input (AI), 5-3, 5-6 MDN
analog output (AO), 5-3, 5-11 commands, 7-39
BCD input (BI), 5-5, 5-20 dual-drive/null-feedback motor, 7-38
BCD output (BO), 5-5, 5-22 extensions, 7-39
defining, 5-2 MDS
digital flag (DF), 5-4, 5-14 commands, 7-42
digital input (DI), 5-4, 5-16 dual-drive/single-feedback motor, 7-40
digital output (DO), 5-4, 5-17 extensions, 7-42
resistance temperature input (RT), 5-5, 5-24
Modes, devices
thermocouple input (TC), 5-5, 5-27
auto, 6-24
word input (WI), 5-5, 5-18
changing, 6-26
word output (WO), 5-5, 5-19
manual, 6-23
Image register, 5-5
Module table (Series 505 only), defined, 3-5

Index-5
Modules (S5) Modules (Series 505)
and I/O symbolic name table, 3-5 special function (SF) (continued)
assigning addresses, 3-5 ethernet TCP/IP adapter, 4-87
FIM
Modules (Series 505)
SIMOREG broadcast mode, 4-78
assigning addresses, 4-4
defining, 3-11, 4-3 SIMOREG mode, 4-76
input SIMOVERT broadcast mode, 4-82
16-channel discrete, 4-32 SIMOVERT mode, 4-80
16-channel analog, 4-31 H1 communications processor, 4-84
20-ch AI/4-ch AO, 4-34 high density advanced function, 4-85
32-channel, 4-35 high speed counter encoder, 4-54, 4-88
4-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-13 high speed PID controller, 4-70
4-channel analog, 4-11 high speed pulse input, 4-52
6-ch analog in/2-ch analog out, 4-14 isolated interrupt input, 4-44
8-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-15 NIM, 4-55
8-channel analog, 4-16, 4-17 parallel word output, 4-26
8-channel discrete, 4-27 Peerlink, 4-57, 4-59
parallel word, 4-20 program port expander, 4-90
smartslice, 4-39 programmable BASIC, 4-48
output RTD, 4-61
16-channel discrete, 4-33 servo axis, 4-63
2-channel analog, 4-9 thermocouple, 4-64
20-ch AI/4-ch AO, 4-34 turbomold, 4-68
32-channel discrete, 4-37 user defined, 4-40, 4-42
4-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-13 Motor
4-channel analog, 4-12 commands, 6-8
6-ch analog in/2-ch analog out, 4-14 device type, 6-6
8-ch analog in/4-ch analog out, 4-15 dual-drive, single-feedback, 7-40
8-channel analog, 4-18, 4-19 extensions, 6-16
8-channel discrete, 4-29 null-feedback, 7-38
parallel word, 4-23 reversible
smartslice, 4-39 type 1, 7-48
special function (SF) type 2, 7-52
110 VAC rapid response, 4-72 RLL code, A-12, A-65
110 VAC redundant output, 4-71 single-drive
120 VDC rapid response, 4-73 null-feedback, 7-34
16-RTD, 4-61 single-feedback, 7-36
24 VDC rapid response, 4-74 two-speed
386/ATM coprocessor, 4-66 type 1, 7-56
8-RTD, 4-61 type 2, 7-60
ASCII, 4-46 user-defined, 7-44
dual comm port, 4-50
ESP, 4-67

Index-6
MSN PMD
commands, 7-35 commands, 7-90
extensions, 7-35 extensions, 7-90
single-drive/null-feedback motor, 7-34 motor-drive/dual-feedback press, 7-88
MSS Position bit for devices, 6-31
commands, 7-37
Power failure
extensions, 7-37
devices, 6-34
single-drive/single-feedback motor, 7-36
recovery logic
MUD S5 controllers, 6-35
commands, 7-46 Series 505 controllers, 6-34
extensions, 7-46
Power supply, UPS option, 6-34
user-defined motor, 7-44
PPEXP module, program port expander, 4-90
Press
N commands, 6-8
device type, 6-6
Network interface module (NIM), 4-55 dual-drive, dual-feedback, 7-84
extensions, 6-20
motor-drive/dual-feedback, 7-88
O single-drive
dual-feedback, 7-80
Objects null-feedback, 7-74
and recipes, 1-15 single-feedback, 7-76
avoiding key words, 1-13 three-position/dual-feedback (PS1), 7-96
configuring, 1-14 three-position/dual-feedback (PS2), 7-100
definitions, 1-12 user-defined, 7-92
dot extensions, 1-15
Process control
naming, 1-13
emergency conditions, 1-7
scope, 1-15
event sequence, 1-6
Override device feedback, 6-28
Product design, ingredients, 1-4
bits, 6-32
Program
content level, 1-10
P definition, 2-2
design, equipment, 1-4
Parallel word input module, 4-20 directory, 1-9
extensions, 2-3, 2-6
Parallel word output module, 4-23 structure, APT hierarchy, 1-8
Parallel word output SF module, 4-26 program content, 1-10
program directory, 1-9
PDD
unit content, 1-11
commands, 7-86
dual-drive/dual-feedback press, 7-84 Program port expander module, 4-90
extensions, 7-86 Programmable BASIC module, 4-48
Peerlink module, 4-57, 4-59

Index-7
PS1 Recipe (continued)
commands, 7-98 template, 9-2
extensions, 7-98 creating, 9-8
three-position/dual-feedback press, 7-96 editing, 9-9
unit level, creating, 9-10
PS2
usage table, 9-2, 9-10
commands, 7-102
editing, 9-12
extensions, 7-102
using, 9-4
three-position/dual-feedback press, 7-100
Redundant output module, 110 VAC, 4-71
PSD
commands, 7-82 Resistance temperature detector, I/O type, 5-24
extensions, 7-82
Resistance temperature detector (RTD) input,
single-drive/dual-feedback press, 7-80 I/O type, 5-5
PSN Resistance temperature detector (RTD) module,
commands, 7-75 4-61
extensions, 7-75
single-drive/null-feedback press, 7-74 Reversible motor
type 1, 7-48
PSS type 2, 7-52
commands, 7-78
extensions, 7-78 RLL code
single-drive/single-feedback press, 7-76 cylinder, A-20, A-95
motor, A-12, A-65
PUD valve, A-3, A-23
commands, 7-94
extensions, 7-94 RM1
user-defined press, 7-92 commands, 7-50
extensions, 7-50
reversible/dual-feedback motor, 7-48
R RM2
commands, 7-54
Rapid response module extensions, 7-54
110 VAC, 4-72 reversible/dual-feedback motor, 7-52
120 VDC, 4-73
RT input, symbolic name extensions, 5-24
24 VDC, 4-74
RTD input, defining, 5-25, 5-26
Real numbers
declaration table, 8-14
extensions, 8-15
in arrays, 8-32 S
Recipe S5
commands, 9-7 APT features, 1-25
defined, 1-15 APT tools, 1-24
elements, 9-6 firmware support, 1-23
editing, 9-12 I/O symbolic names, 3-10
extensions, 9-4, 9-7
program level, creating, 9-10 Scaled integer
commands, 8-11
extensions, 8-11

Index-8
Scaling, analog values, 5-10, 5-13 Symbolic name
assigning I/O, 4-7
Sequence array
defined, 3-2
commands, 8-36
defining I/O, 3-9
extensions, 8-36
Series 505
APT features, 1-26
APT tools, 1-24
T
firmware support, 1-23 TC input, symbolic name extensions, 5-27
I/O symbolic names, 3-9
Testing I/O, image register option, 5-5
Servo axis module, 4-63
Text
SFC declaration table, 8-19
language, 1-18, 1-19 extensions, 8-20
safe-state, overview, 1-21 in arrays, 8-42
Shift register array Thermocouple (TC) input, I/O type, 5-5
commands, 8-40
extensions, 8-40 Thermocouple input
defining, 5-28, 5-29
Smartslice module, 4-39 I/O type, 5-27
State, device, changing, 6-27 Thermocouple module, 4-64
State bit for devices, 6-31 Time of day extensions, 2-6
State control language, 1-17 Timer
device commands, 6-8 commands, 6-8
Status, device, 6-36 extensions, 6-17, 6-22
fast
Stopwatch commands, 8-51
commands, 6-8 extensions, 8-51
device type, 6-6 in declaration table, 8-50
extensions, 6-17, 6-22 presets, in declaration table, 8-48
three-state, 7-104 slow
Subroutine commands, 8-53
system-activated, 10-2 extensions, 8-53
accessing FBs, 10-16 in declaration table, 8-52
creating, 10-12 three-state, 7-104
design guidelines, 10-14 TMR
math language, 10-13, 10-16 commands, 7-106
user-defined, 10-2 extensions, 7-106
creating, 10-4 three-state timer, 7-104
design constraints, arrays, 10-9
design guidelines, 10-7 TS1
example, 10-10 commands, 7-58
math language, 10-6 extensions, 7-58
parameters, 10-5 two-speed/dual-feedback motor, 7-56
RLL, 10-8
SFPGM, 10-8

Index-9
TS2 Variables (continued)
commands, 7-62 scaled integer, 8-9
extensions, 7-62 text, 8-19
two-speed/dual-feedback motor, 7-60
VDD
Turbomold module, 4-68 commands, 7-16
dual-drive/dual-feedback valve, 7-14
Twenty percent offset, scaling, 5-10, 5-13
extensions, 7-16
Two-speed motor
VMD
type 1, 7-56
commands, 7-20
type 2, 7-60
extensions, 7-20
motor-drive/dual-feedback valve, 7-18

U VND
commands, 7-3, 7-73
Unit extensions, 7-3, 7-73
content level, 1-11 hand-operated/dual-feedback valve, 7-2, 7-72
definition, 2-2 VSD
extensions, 2-6 commands, 7-12
User-defined module, 4-40, 4-42 extensions, 7-12
single-drive/dual-feedback valve, 7-10
VSN
V commands, 7-5
extensions, 7-5
Valve single-drive/null-feedback valve, 7-4
commands, 6-8
device type, 6-6 VSS
dual-drive, dual-feedback, 7-14 commands, 7-8
extensions, 6-13 extensions, 7-8
hand-operated, dual-feedback, 7-2, 7-72 single-drive/single-feedback valve, 7-6
motor-drive/dual-feedback, 7-18 VUD
RLL code, A-3, A-23 commands, 7-24
single-drive extensions, 7-24
dual-feedback, 7-10 user-defined valve, 7-22
null-feedback, 7-4
single-feedback, 7-6
three-position/dual-feedback (BV1), 7-26
three-position/dual-feedback (BV2), 7-30
W
user-defined, 7-22 Word input
Variables defining, 5-18
boolean, 8-12 I/O type, 5-5, 5-18
declaration types, 8-3 Word input module, 4-20
entering in declaration table, 8-4
integer, 8-7 Word output
PCS tag translation, 8-6 defining, 5-19
real, 8-14 I/O type, 5-5, 5-19

Index-10
Word output module, 4-23
special function (SF), 4-26

Z
Zero bias, scaling, 5-10, 5-13

Index-11
Customer Response

We would like to know what you think about our user manuals so that we can serve you better.
How would you rate the quality of our manuals?

Excellent Good Fair Poor

Accuracy
Organization
Clarity
Completeness
Graphics
Examples
Overall design
Size
Index

Would you be interested in giving us more detailed comments about our manuals?

Yes! Please send me a questionnaire.

No. Thanks anyway.

Your Name:

Title:

Telephone Number: ( )

Company Name:

Company Address:

Manual Name: SIMATIC APT Programming Reference (Tables) Manual Edition: Tenth
Manual Assembly Number: 2801048--0007 Date: 4/01
Order Number: PPX:APT--8102--10
 FOLD

SIEMENS ENERGY & AUTOMATION INC NO POSTAGE

3000 BILL GARLAND RD NECESSARY
IF MAILED
P O BOX 1255 IN THE
JOHNSON CITY TN 37605--1255 UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL

FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO.3 JOHNSON CITY, TN

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

ATTN TECHNICAL COMMUNICATIONS M/S 1255

SIEMENS ENERGY & AUTOMATION INC
P O BOX 1255
JOHNSON CITY TN 37605--1255

FOLD